MY PEUGEOT 3008 MY PEUGEOT 5008
HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE
Install the (content available Visit the website and select the Scan MyPeugeot App PEUGEOT offline). ‘MyPeugeot’ section to view or download the handbook or go to the following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.
Then select: – the vehicle, Select: – the issue period corresponding to the vehicle’s initial – the language, registration date. – the vehicle and body style, – the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the vehicle’s initial registration date.
This symbol indicates the latest information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 3008 or a Peugeot 5008. This document presents the key information and recommendations required Additional information for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with this document and the Warranty and
Maintenance Record. Environmental protection feature Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle equipment and accessories without having to update this guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of the equipment / button passed on to the new owner. described using a black area.
Key This allows the specific features of your vehicle to be identified:
3008
5008
Contents
Overview ■ Seat modularity 57 Hill Assist Descent Control 93 Heating and Ventilation 58 Seat belts 94 Manual air conditioning 59 Airbags 97 Eco-driving ■ Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning 59 Child seats 100
Instruments 1 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 61 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 102 Front demisting - defrosting 64 ISOFIX child seats 105 Digital instrument panels 9 Heated windscreen 64 i-Size child seats 110 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Rear screen demisting/defrosting 65 Child lock 112 Indicators 17 Thermal pre-conditioning (Hybrid) 65 Manual test 20 Front fittings 66 Driving 6 Distance recorders 20 Courtesy lamps 69 Lighting dimmer 21 Driving recommendations 113 Interior ambience lighting 70 Trip computer 22 Starting / Switching off the engine Rear fittings 70 Monochrome screen C 23 with the key 114 Boot fittings 72 Touch screen 24 Starting / Switching off the engine Remote features (Hybrid) 27 with Keyless Entry and Starting 116 Lighting and visibility 4 Starting hybrid vehicles 116 Access 2 Exterior lighting control stalk 78 Electric parking brake 118 Direction indicators 79 6-speed manual gearbox 120 Remote control / Key 28 Headlamp beam height adjustment 80 Automatic gearbox 121 Keyless Entry and Starting 30 Automatic illumination of headlamps 80 Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid) 124 Central locking 32 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 81 Hill start assist 125 Back-up procedures 32 Automatic headlamp dipping 81 Dynamic pack 125 Alarm 34 Cornering lighting 82 Driving modes 126 Doors 36 Wiper control stalk 83 Gear efficiency indicator 127 Boot 36 Changing a wiper blade 85 Stop & Start 127 Hands-free tailgate 37 Automatic wipers 85 Under-inflation detection 129 Electric windows 41 Driving and manoeuvring aids - Panoramic sunroof 42 Safety 5 General recommendations 130 Ease of use and comfort 3 General safety recommendations 87 Memorising speeds 132 Hazard warning lamps 87 Speed Limit Recognition and Driving position 44 Horn 88 Recommendation 132 Front seats 45 Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) 88 Speed limiter 135 Steering wheel adjustment 49 Emergency or assistance call 88 Cruise control 137 Mirrors 49 Electronic stability control (ESC) 90 Drive Assist Plus 139 Rear bench seat 51 Advanced Grip Control 92 Adaptive Cruise Control 139 Rear seats 52
2 Contents
Lane positioning assist 143 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 190 Media 245 Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert and Tool kit 191 Telephone 247 Intelligent emergency braking assistance 146 Temporary puncture repair kit 193 Settings 250 Distraction detection 149 Spare wheel 196 Frequently asked questions 252 Lane Departure Warning System 150 Changing a bulb 201 Active Lane Keeping Assistance 150 Changing a fuse 205 PEUGEOT Connect Nav 12 Blind Spot Monitoring System 154 12 V battery 210 First steps 254 Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 155 Accessory batteries (Hybrid) 213 Steering mounted controls 255 Parking sensors 155 Towing the vehicle 215 Menus 255 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 157 Voice commands 257 Park Assist 161 Technical data 9 Navigation 260 Engine technical data and towed loads 219 Connected navigation 263 Practical information 7 Petrol engines 220 Applications 265 Compatibility of fuels 166 Diesel engines 222 Radio 268 Refuelling 166 Hybrid engines 225 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 269 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 167 Dimensions 226 Media 270 Hybrid system 167 Identification markings 227 Telephone 271 Charging the traction battery (Hybrid) 171 Settings 274 Towing device 173 Bluetooth® audio system 10 Frequently asked questions 275 Towing device with quickly detachable First steps 228 towball 174 Steering mounted controls 229 Alphabetical index ■ Roof bars 176 Menus 229 Snow chains 177 Radio 230 Very cold climate screen 178 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 231 Energy economy mode 179 Media 232 Bonnet 179 Telephone 234 Engine compartment 180 Frequently asked questions 237 Access to additional videos Checking levels 181 Checks 183 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
11 AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 185 First steps 240 Free-wheeling 187 Steering mounted controls 241 Advice on care and maintenance 187 Menus 242
Applications 243 In the event of a breakdown 8 Radio 243 Warning triangle 190 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 245 bit.ly/helpPSA
3 Overview
Instruments and controls 1. Sunroof and blind controls 2. 12 V socket/USB socket Front courtesy/map reading lamps Wireless smartphone charger These illustrations and descriptions are provided Warning lamp display for seat belts and front 3. Advanced Grip Control for information. The presence and location of passenger airbag Driving mode selector some elements vary depending on the version Emergency call/Assistance call Hill Assist Descent Control or trim level. 2. Interior rear view mirror/Driving in ELECTRIC 4. Key ignition switch mode indicator LED or 3. Head-up digital display "START/STOP” button 4. Fusebox 5. Gearbox control 5. Bonnet release “SPORT" button 6. Door mirror and electric window control panel 6. Electric parking brake 7. Front passenger airbag 8. Glove box Steering-mounted controls Deactivation of the front passenger airbag
1. Monochrome screen with Bluetooth audio
system or 1. External lighting controls/Direction indicators Touch screen with PEUGEOT Connect Radio 2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer or PEUGEOT Connect Nav 3. Automatic gearbox control paddles
4 Overview
4. Instrument panel and audio system 6. Heated windscreen 5. Rear screen defrosting adjustment controls 7. Electric child lock 6. Central locking A. Select the instrument panel display mode 8. Active Lane Keeping Assistance 7. Heated seats B. Voice commands 9. Lane positioning assist C. Decrease/Increase volume 10. Opening the fuel filler flap D. Select previous/next media Rechargeable hybrid Confirm a selection Central switch panel
E. Access the Telephone menu system
Manage calls F. Select an audio source
G. Display the list of radio stations/audio tracks 5. Horn/Driver front airbag 6. Cruise control/speed limiter/Adaptive Cruise Control
Side switch panel
1. Petrol engine 2. Front and rear electric motors (depending on version) 3. Traction battery 4. 12 V accessories batteries 1. Hazard warning lamps 5. 8-speed electric automatic gearbox (e-EAT8) 2. Bluetooth audio system controls 6. Charging flap 1. Halogen headlamp beam height adjustment or 7. Fuel filler flap 2. Temperature pre-conditioning operation Touch screen controls with PEUGEOT 8. Driving mode selector indicator lamp Connect Radio or PEUGEOT Connect Nav 9. Charging cable 3. Opening/Closing the hands-free tailgate Access the Hybrid menu 4. Stop & Start 3. Air conditioning The rechargeable hybrid technology combines 5. Alarm 4. Recirculation of interior air two sources of energy: that of the petrol engine
5 Overview
and that of one or two electric motors (depending on version). The engine and the motor can operate alternately or simultaneously, according to the driving mode selected and the driving conditions. The electric power alone provides the mobility of the vehicle in ELECTRIC mode, and in HYBRID mode in case of moderate demand. It assists the petrol engine during starting and acceleration phases. The electric power is supplied by a rechargeable traction battery.
6 Eco-driving
Eco-driving Use electrical equipment wisely bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a Before moving off, if the passenger compartment roof box. Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. practices that allow the motorist to optimise their and air vents before using the air conditioning. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit fuel consumption and CO emissions. 2 At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the summer tyres. Optimise your use of the gearbox windows and leave the air vents open. Avoid using the Dynamic Pack for too long, in With a manual gearbox, move off gently and Consider using equipment that can help keep order to limit your fuel consumption. change up promptly. While accelerating, change the temperature in the passenger compartment Comply with servicing instructions up early. down (sunroof blind and window blinds, etc.). Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal conditioning as soon as the desired temperature the driver's side. heavily or suddenly. has been reached. Carry out this check in particular: The gear efficiency indicator prompts you to Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, – before a long journey. engage the most suitable gear: whenever this if they are not managed automatically. – at each change of season. indication is displayed on the instrument panel, Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. – after a long period out of use. follow it straight away. Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when Do not overlook the spare wheel and, where With an automatic gearbox, this indicator the visibility conditions do not require their use. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. appears only in manual mode. Avoid running the engine before moving off, Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, Drive smoothly particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, much faster while driving. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use etc.) and observe the schedule of operations in As a passenger, avoid connecting your engine braking rather than the brake pedal and the manufacturer's service schedule. multimedia devices (film, music, video game, press the accelerator gradually. These attitudes With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system etc.) to help reduce consumption of electrical help to save fuel, reduce CO emissions and is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit 2 energy, and hence fuel. decrease general traffic noise. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop Disconnect all portable devices before leaving If the vehicle has the steering-mounted as soon as possible to restore your vehicle’s the vehicle. "CRUISE" control, use cruise control at speeds nitrogen oxide emissions to regulatory above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is Limit the causes of excess consumption compliance. flowing well. Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after heaviest items in the boot, as close as possible the third nozzle cut-out, to avoid overflow. to the rear seats. You will only see the fuel consumption of your Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and new vehicle settle down to a consistent average minimise wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).
7 Eco-driving
Optimising the driving range (hybrid vehicles) Connect the vehicle as soon as possible. Favour the ECO zone of the power indicator by driving smoothly and at a steady speed. Anticipate slowing down as much as possible and, if possible, favour decelerations with regenerative braking (power indicator in the CHARGE zone). When GPS navigation is activated, select the HYBRID mode to optimise electric consumption.
8 Instruments
Head-up digital display B. Short press: start a manual test 8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km) 1 Long press: reset the service indicator or trip 9. Total distance recorder (miles or km) This digital instrument panel can be customised. distance recorder (depending on the context) Depending on the display mode selected, certain A. Instrument panel ambient lighting on/off information is hidden or presented differently. B. Short press: start a manual test Example with the "DIALS" display mode: Long press: reset the service indicator or trip
Head-up digital display distance recorder (depending on the context) (Hybrid) This digital instrument panel can be customised. Displays Depending on the display mode selected, certain Most warning and indicator lamps do not have a information is hidden or presented differently. fixed position. Example with the "ÉNERGIE" display mode: The warning and indicator lamps in the second 1. Fuel gauge 2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) line are displayed from right to left in order of 3. Gear shift indicator priority. Selector position and gear engaged on For certain functions that have indicator lamps automatic gearbox for both operation and deactivation, there is only 4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) one dedicated location.
5. Cruise control or speed limiter settings 1. Fuel gauge and remaining range (miles or Permanent information Display of speed limit signs km) In the standard display, the instrument panel 6. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm) 2. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) shows: Engine coolant temperature indicator (°C) 7. READY indicator lamp – in fixed locations: 8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km) 3. Selector position and gear engaged on • Information related to the gearbox and gear Total distance recorder (miles or km) 9. automatic gearbox shift indicator. A. Instruments and controls lighting dimmer* 4. Energy flows • Fuel gauge. (available in night mode) 5. Driving mode selected • Coolant temperature indicator (Petrol or or 6. Power indicator Diesel). Instrument panel ambient lighting on/off** 7. Battery charge level and remaining range • Charge level and range indicator (Hybrid). (miles or km) • Distance recorders. – in variable locations:
* Versions with monochrome screen. ** Versions with touch screen.
9 Instruments
• Digital speedometer. As a safety measure, these adjustments various modes on the right-hand side of the • Status or alert messages displayed must be carried out with the vehicle instrument panel. temporarily. stationary. ► Press the thumbwheel to confirm the mode. Optional information The new display mode is applied immediately. Depending on the display mode selected and the Choosing a display colour Display mode overview active features, additional information may be (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) – "DIALS": standard display of analogue and displayed: The instrument panel display colour depends on digital speedometers, distance recorders and: – Rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). the colour scheme chosen in this system. • fuel gauge, coolant temperature indicator – Trip computer. ► Press Settings in the banner of the and rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). – Driving aid functions. touch screen. • fuel gauge, battery charge indicator and – Speed limiter or cruise control. ► Select "Color schemes". power indicator (Hybrid). – Media currently playing. ► Select a display colour and then press – NAVIGATION": specific display, showing – Navigation instructions. "OK" to confirm. the current navigation information (map and – Engine information from the Dynamic Pack. navigation instructions). – Power flow (Hybrid). Setting the display mode – "DRIVING": specific display, showing the In each mode, specific types of information are information relating to active driving aid systems. Customising the instrument displayed on the instrument panel. – "MINIMAL": minimal display with digital speedometer and distance recorders, and in panel Changing the display mode
the event of a warning only, the fuel gauge and You can modify the appearance of the instrument engine coolant temperature indicator. panel by choosing: – "ÉNERGIE": specific display showing a visual – a display colour. representation of the vehicle’s energy flows – a display mode. (Hybrid). Display language and units – "PERSONAL": minimal display, with the ability These depend on the multifunction to select and display optional information in the screen settings (configuration menu). customisable areas on the left and right. When travelling abroad, the speed must be Configuring a "PERSONAL" display mode shown in the official units of the country you With PEUGEOT Connect Radio are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). ► Press Settings in the banner of the
touch screen. ► Turn the thumbwheel on the left of the ► Select "Configuration". steering wheel to display and scroll through the
10 Instruments
► Select "Instrument panel malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating (1): You must stop the vehicle. personalisation". status of a system (operation or deactivation Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off 1 With PEUGEOT Connect Nav indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two the ignition. ► Press Settings in the banner of the ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified touch screen. Associated warnings workshop. ► Select "OPTIONS". (3): Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied ► Select "Instrument panel workshop. by an audible signal and/or a message displayed personalisation". in a screen. ► For each customised display area (left and List of warning and Relating the type of alert to the operating status right), select a type of information using the of the vehicle allows you to determine whether indicator lamps corresponding scroll arrows on the touch screen: the situation is normal or whether a fault has • "Driving aids". Red warning/indicator lamps occurred: refer to the description of each lamp • "Engine info" (Sport mode). for further information. STOP • "G-metres" (Sport mode). Fixed, associated with another warning When the ignition is switched on • "Temperatures" (engine oil). lamp, accompanied by the display of a • “Media". Certain red or orange warning lamps come on message and an audible signal. • “Navigation". for a few seconds when the ignition is switched A serious fault with the engine, braking system, • “Trip computer". on. These warning lamps should go off as soon power steering, automatic gearbox or a major • "Rev counter". as the engine is started. electrical fault has been detected. • "Energy flow" (depending on version). For more information on a system or a function, Carry out (1) and then (2). • "Power indicator" (depending on version). refer to the corresponding section. Maximum engine coolant temperature • "Energy consumption" (depending on Fixed. version). Warning lamp continuously The temperature of the cooling system is ► Confirm to save and exit. lit too high. The "PERSONAL" display mode is enabled The illumination of a red or orange warning lamp Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has immediately. indicates the occurrence of a fault that needs cooled down before topping up the level, if further investigation. necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2). Warning and indicator If a warning lamp remains lit Engine oil pressure Fixed. lamps The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning There is a fault with the engine lubrication Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator and indicator lamp description indicate whether system. lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a you should contact a qualified professional in addition to the immediate recommended actions. Carry out (1) and then (2).
11 Instruments
System malfunction (Hybrid) an audible signal. Orange warning/indicator lamps Fixed. A door or the tailgate is not properly closed Service The rechargeable hybrid system is faulty. (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Temporarily on, accompanied by the Carry out (1) and then (2). Seat belts not fastened/unfastened display of a message. Cable connected (Hybrid) Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an One or more minor faults, for which there is/are Fixed. increasing audible signal. no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. It is not possible to start the vehicle while A seat belt has not been fastened or has been Identify the cause of the fault using the message the charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s unfastened. displayed in the instrument panel. connector. Electric parking brake You can deal with certain problems yourself, for Disconnect the charging cable and close the Fixed. example an open door or the start of saturation flap. The electric parking brake is applied. of the particle filter. 12 V battery charge Flashing. For other faults, such as with the tyre under- Fixed. The electric parking brake is not applied inflation detection system, carry out (3). The battery charging circuit has a fault automatically. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a (dirty terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, etc.). Application/release is faulty. message. Carry out (1). Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level One or more major faults, for which there is/are If the electric parking brake is no longer working, surface). no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. immobilise the vehicle: With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. Identify the cause of the fault using the message ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P. displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out ► With an automatic gearbox, put the chocks Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). (3). against one of the wheels. Braking Fixed, accompanied by the message Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning Fixed. "Parking brake fault". lamp does not go off when the engine is started, The brake fluid level in the braking circuit Automatic release of the electric parking brake is carry out (2). has dropped significantly. unavailable. Door(s) open Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies Carry out (2). Fixed, associated with a message with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the Service warning lamp fixed and identifying the access. problem persists, carry out (2). service spanner flashing then A door or the tailgate is not properly closed Fixed. fixed. (speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)). The electronic brake force The servicing interval has been exceeded. Fixed, associated with a message distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. The vehicle must be serviced as soon as identifying the access, accompanied by Carry out (1) and then (2). possible. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
12 Instruments
Engine pre-heating (Diesel) Engine self-diagnostics system starting is prevented. Temporarily on Flashing. The AdBlue® tank is empty: the regulatory engine 1 (up to approximately 30 seconds in The engine management system has a immobiliser prevents the engine from being severe weather conditions). fault. restarted. When switching on the ignition, if the weather There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue®, or conditions and the engine temperature make it destroyed. carry out (2). necessary. You must carry out (2). You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its Wait until the warning lamp goes off before Fixed. tank. starting. The emissions control system has a fault. SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) When the warning lamp goes off, starting will The warning lamp should go off when the engine Fixed when the ignition is occur immediately if you press and hold: is started. switched on, accompanied – the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. Carry out (3) without delay. by an audible signal and a message. – the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. AdBlue® (BlueHDi) A malfunction involving the SCR emissions If the engine does not start, make the engine On for around 30 seconds when starting control system has been detected. starting request again, while keeping your foot the vehicle, accompanied by a message This alert disappears once the exhaust on the pedal. indicating the driving range. emissions return to normal levels. Low fuel level The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 Flashing AdBlue® warning Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red, miles (2,400 and 800 km). lamp on switching on the accompanied by an audible signal and Top up the AdBlue®. ignition, with the Service and Engine self- the display of a message. Fixed, on switching on the ignition, diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, When it first comes on, there remains accompanied by an audible signal and a accompanied by an audible signal and a approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank message indicating the driving range. message indicating the driving range. (reserve). The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles Depending on the message displayed, it may be Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will be (800 and 100 km). possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) repeated every time the ignition is switched on, Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). before the engine immobiliser is triggered. at increased frequency as the fuel level goes Flashing, accompanied by an audible Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting down and comes close to zero. signal and a message indicating the being prevented. Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. driving range. Flashing AdBlue® warning Never drive until completely empty, as The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). lamp on switching on the this could damage the emissions control and You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine ignition, with the Service and Engine self- injection systems. starting being prevented, or carry out (3). diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, Flashing, accompanied by an audible accompanied by an audible signal and a signal and a message indicating that
13 Instruments
message indicating that starting is prevented. If manual application and release commands are Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) The engine immobiliser prevents the engine not working, the electric parking brake control Fixed. from restarting (over the authorised driving limit lever is faulty. Horn fault detected. after confirmation of an emissions control system The automatic functions must be used at all Carry out (3). malfunction). times and are automatically re-enabled in the Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake To start the engine, carry out (2). event of a control lever fault. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Deactivation of the automatic functions Carry out (2). message. (with electric parking brake) Fixed, accompanied by the The system has been deactivated via the vehicle Fixed. message "Parking brake configuration menu. fault". The "automatic application" (on switching Distance Alert/Active Safety Brake The parking brake is faulty: manual and off the engine) and "automatic release" (on Flashing. automatic functions may not be working. acceleration) functions are deactivated. The system activates and brakes the When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: If automatic application/release is no longer vehicle momentarily so as to reduce the speed of ► Pull and hold the control lever for possible: collision with the vehicle ahead. approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator ► Start the engine. Fixed, accompanied by a message and lamp comes on on the instrument panel. ► Use the control lever to apply the parking an audible signal. If this procedure does not work, secure the brake. The system has a fault. vehicle: ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. Carry out (3). ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release ► Park on a level surface. Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. Fixed. ► Release the control lever. ► With an automatic gearbox, select P, then The system has a fault. ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. place the supplied chocks against one of the If these warning lamps come on after the engine ► Hold the control lever in the “Application” wheels. is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3). direction for 2 seconds. Then carry out (2). ► Release the control lever and the brake Braking Anti-lock braking system (ABS) pedal. Fixed. Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a fault. Malfunction (with electric parking brake) A minor fault with the braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking. Fixed, accompanied by the been detected. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry message "Parking brake fault". Drive carefully. out (3). The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the Carry out (3). engine running.
14 Instruments
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip Lane Departure Warning System Airbags regulation (ASR) Flashing, accompanied by an audible Fixed. 1 Fixed. signal. One of the airbags or seat belt The system is deactivated. A lane marking has been crossed on the left or pretensioners is faulty. The DSC/ASR system is reactivated right. Carry out (3). automatically when the vehicle is restarted, and Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction Front passenger airbag (ON) from around 31 mph (50 km/h). to return to the correct trajectory. Fixed. Below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be reactivated Fixed, accompanied by the display of a The front passenger airbag is activated. manually. message. The control is in the "ON" position. Flashing. The system has a fault. In this case, do NOT install a "rearward The DSC/ASR adjustment is activated if Stay alert and drive carefully, then carry out (3). facing" child seat on the front passenger seat there is a loss of grip or trajectory. Active Lane Keeping Assistance - Risk of serious injury! Fixed. Fixed. Front passenger airbag (OFF) The DSC/ASR system has a fault. The system has been automatically Fixed. Carry out (3). deactivated or placed on standby. The front passenger airbag is deactivated. Emergency brake malfunction (with Flashing. The control is in the "OFF" position. electric parking brake) You are about to cross a broken A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed, Fixed, accompanied by the lane marking without operating the direction unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags message "Parking brake fault". indicators. warning lamp on). Emergency braking does not deliver optimal The system is activated, then corrects the Under-inflation performance. trajectory on the side of the lane marking Fixed. If automatic release is not available, use manual detected. The pressure in one or more tyres is too release or carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by the display low. of a message and an audible Hill start assist Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as signal. Fixed, accompanied by the possible. The system has a fault. message "Anti roll-back system Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting Carry out (3). fault". the pressure. The system has a fault. Lane positioning assist Under-inflation warning lamp Carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by the flashing then fixed and Service Service warning lamp. warning lamp fixed. The system has a fault. The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Carry out (3). Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
15 Instruments
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible Fixed. Automatic wiping and carry out (3). The function has been activated, but the Fixed. Stop & Start conditions for regulation are not met (gradient, Automatic windscreen wiping is activated. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a gear engaged). Direction indicators message. Flashing. Flashing with audible signal. The Stop & Start system has been deactivated The function is regulating the speed of The direction indicators are on. the vehicle. manually. Front foglamps The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps The engine will not switch off at the next traffic Fixed. come on during the descent. stop. The front foglamps are on. Fixed. Stop & Start Sidelamps The Stop & Start system has been Fixed. Fixed. deactivated automatically. When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start The lamps are on. The engine will not switch off at the next traffic puts the engine into STOP mode. stop, if the exterior temperature is: Flashing temporarily. Dipped beam headlamps – below 0°C. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable Fixed. – above +35°C. or START mode is automatically triggered. The lamps are on. Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a Vehicle ready to drive (Hybrid) Automatic headlamp dipping message. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Fixed. The system has a fault. when it comes on. The function has been activated Carry out (3). The vehicle is ready to drive. via the touch screen (Driving / Vehicle menu). Rear foglamps The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" Fixed. speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and position. The lamps are on. lights up again when the vehicle stops moving. Blue warning/indicator lamps The lamp will go out when you turn off the Green warning/indicator lamps Main beam headlamps engine and exit the vehicle. Hill Assist Descent Control Fixed. Active Lane Keeping Assist Fixed. The lamps are on. Fixed. (grey) Black/white warning lamps The function has been activated. The function has been activated, but is currently All the conditions have been met: the system is Automatic gearbox or Electric automatic paused because the speed is too high. operating. gearbox (e-EAT8) (Hybrid) Reduce the vehicle speed to below 19 mph Fixed. (30 km/h). The automatic gearbox is locked.
16 Instruments
You must press the Unlock button to unlock it. Service spanner ► Switch on the ignition; a temporary display eSave function (Hybrid) On temporarily when the ignition is window appears and a countdown begins. 1 Fixed, accompanied by the reserved switched on. ► When the display indicates =0, release the electric range. Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 button; the spanner disappears. km) remain before the next service is due. The eSave function is activated. If you have to disconnect the battery Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. following this operation, lock the vehicle The next service is due in less than 620 and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be Indicators miles (1,000 km). registered. Have your vehicle serviced very soon. Service indicator Service spanner flashing The servicing information is expressed in terms Flashing then fixed, when the Reminder of the servicing information of distance (kilometres or miles) and time ignition is switched on. You can access the servicing information at any (months or days). (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the time.
The alert is given at whichever of these two Service warning lamp.) terms is reached first. The servicing interval has been exceeded. The servicing information is displayed in the Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. ► Press the trip distance recorder reset button. instrument panel. Depending on the version of The servicing information is displayed for a few the vehicle: Resetting the service indicator seconds, then disappears. – The distance recorder display line indicates The service indicator must be reset after each the distance remaining before the next service service. Engine oil level indicator is due, or the distance travelled since it was due If you have serviced your vehicle yourself: (Depending on version.) preceded by the "-" sign. ► Switch off the ignition.
On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the – An alert message indicates the distance engine oil level status is displayed on the remaining, as well as the period before the next instrument panel for a few seconds when service is due or how long it is overdue. the ignition is switched on, after the servicing
The value indicated is calculated information, in the form of messages. according to the distance covered and The level read will only be correct if the the time elapsed since the last service. vehicle is on level ground and the engine The alert may also be triggered close to a has been off for more than 30 minutes. due date.
► Press and hold the button located on the end of the wiper control stalk.
17 Instruments
Oil level incorrect Engine coolant temperature AdBlue® range indicators This is indicated by the message "Oil indicator (BlueHDi) level incorrect" on the instrument panel, The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with accompanied by the lighting of the Service a system that associates the SCR (Selective warning lamp and an audible signal. Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot damage to the engine. function without AdBlue®fluid. For more information on Checking levels, refer When the level of AdBlue® falls below the to the corresponding section. reserve level (between 1,500 miles and 0 miles Gauge fault (2,400 and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up This is indicated by the message "Oil level when the ignition is switched on and an estimate " on the instrument panel. of the distance that can be travelled before measurement invalid Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified With the engine running: engine starting is prevented is displayed in the workshop. – In zone A, the temperature is correct. instrument panel. In the event of a fault with the electric – In zone B, the temperature is too high; the The engine starting prevention system gauge, the oil level is no longer associated warning lamp and the central STOP required by regulations is activated monitored. warning lamp come on in red on the instrument automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty. If the system is faulty, you must check the panel, accompanied by the display of a message It is then no longer possible to start the engine oil level using the manual dipstick and an audible signal. engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has located under the bonnet. You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is been topped up. For more information on Checking levels, safe to do so. refer to the corresponding section. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Manually displaying the driving range While the driving range is greater than After switching off the ignition, carefully 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed open the bonnet and check the coolant automatically. level.
For more information on Checking ► Press this button to temporarily display the levels, refer to the corresponding driving range. section.
18 Instruments
Actions required related to a lack of If the fault is temporary, the alert Warning/ Action Remaining AdBlue® disappears during the next journey, after 1 indicator range The following warning lamps light up when the self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions lamps lit control system.
quantity of AdBlue® is lower than the reserve level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles A top-up is Between 62 (2,400 km). vital, there is miles and 0 Malfunction confirmed during the Together with the warning lamps, messages the risk that miles (100 permitted driving phase (between 685 the engine will km and 0 miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km))
regularly remind you of the need to top up to avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to be prevented km) If the fault indication is still displayed the Warning and indicator lamps section for from starting. permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the
details of the messages displayed. To be able 0 miles (km) fault in the SCR system is confirmed. to restart the The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, and an For more information on AdBlue® engine, add at "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in X miles (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on least 5 litres of (km)” message is displayed, indicating the
topping up, refer to the corresponding section. AdBlue® to the driving range in miles or kilometres. tank. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when switching Warning/ Action Remaining on the ignition. Malfunction of the SCR emissions indicator range You can continue driving for up to 685 miles control system lamps lit (1,100 km) before the engine starting
Top up. Between Malfunction detection prevention system is triggered.
1,500 miles
Have the system checked by a and 500 If a malfunction is detected, PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified miles (2,400 these warning lamps come workshop as soon as possible. km and 800 on, accompanied by an audible signal and an km) Starting prevented
"Emissions fault” message. Top up as Between Whenever the ignition is switched on, the soon as 500 miles
“Emissions fault: Starting prevented” message is possible. and 62 The alert is triggered while driving, when the displayed. miles (800 fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter km and when switching on the ignition for subsequent 100 km) journeys, while the cause of the fault persists.
19 Instruments
To be able to restart the engine, contact ECO Optimal use of energy (internal are permanently displayed when the vehicle is a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified combustion or electric). switched on. workshop. The cursor is located in this zone With the ignition off, opening the driver's during electric driving phases and door activates the indicator. Power indicator (Hybrid) during optimal usage phases of the petrol engine, accessible with suitable The power indicator makes it possible to know in driving. real time the power requested from the vehicle. An indicator indicates the restart Manual test in the There are 3 zones: threshold of the petrol engine. The instrument panel driver can therefore moderate their This function allows you, at any time, to check acceleration to remain in electric certain indicators and to display the alerts log. driving mode. CHARGE Energy recovery for recharging the traction battery. ► With the engine running, briefly press this The cursor is located in this zone button. during deceleration phases: taking The following information is displayed on the your foot off the accelerator pedal or instrument panel: braking. – Engine oil level. – Next service due. Charge level indicator POWER High power demand, using the – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and combined capabilities of the petrol (Hybrid) the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). engine and the electric motor(s) – Active alerts. (depending on version). This information is also displayed The cursor is located in this zone automatically every time the ignition is during more dynamic driving phases switched on. when high levels of performance are being requested. Distance recorders With the ignition on, the distances are
The charge level of the traction battery and permanently indicated. They are deactivated the remaining range in electric driving mode about 30 seconds after switching the ignition
20 Instruments off. They are displayed when the driver's door ► With the ignition on, press the button until ► Release the button when the desired is opened, and when the vehicle is locked or zeros appear. brightness is reached. 1 unlocked. Version with touch screen When travelling abroad, you may have to Instrument panel lighting Allows the instrument panel lighting to be change the distance units (km or miles): switched on or off. the road speed must be displayed in the local dimmer It only works when the vehicle lighting is on country’s official unit (km/h or mph). (“night” mode). The unit is changed via the screen Version with monochrome ► Press this button. configuration menu, with the vehicle screen stationary. Allows the brightness of the instruments and The brightness of the instrument panel lighting is controls and of the instrument panel to be adjusted using the touch screen. Total distance recorder adjusted. It only works when the vehicle lighting is on This recorder measures the total distance With PEUGEOT Connect Radio (“night” mode). ► Press this button to select the travelled by the vehicle since its initial registration. Settings menu. ► Select "Brightness". Trip distance recorder This recorder measures the distance travelled ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the since it was last reset by the driver. arrows or moving the slider. The settings are applied immediately. ► Press outside the settings window to exit. You can also switch off the screen: ► Press this button to select the Settings menu. ► Select "Dark".
► Press this button to adjust the The screen goes off completely. brightness. ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its ► When the lighting reaches the minimum/ surface) to activate it.
maximum setting, release the button, then press Resetting the trip recorder it again to increase/decrease brightness.
21 Instruments
WithPEUGEOT Connect Nav In all other display modes, pressing the end of Definitions ► Press this button to select the the wiper control stalk causes this data to appear Settings menu. temporarily in a specific window. Range ► Select "OPTIONS". Display of the different tabs (miles or km) ► Select "Screen configuration". The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank
► Select the "Brightness" tab. (depending on the average fuel consumption
► Adjust the brightness by pressing the over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled). arrows or moving the slider. This value may vary following a change in ► Press this button to save and exit. the style of driving or the terrain, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel You can also switch off the screen: consumption. ► Press this button to select the When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), ► Press this button located on the end of the Settings menu. dashes are displayed. wiper control stalk to display the different tabs ► Select "Turn off screen". After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range in turn: is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 – Current information: The screen goes off completely. miles (100 km). • Total range (petrol or Diesel). ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its If dashes instead of figures continue to be • Total range (petrol or Diesel). surface) to activate it. displayed when driving, contact a PEUGEOT • Stop & Start time counter (petrol or Diesel). dealer or a qualified workshop. • Percentage of the current journey travelled in Trip computer all-electric driving mode (Hybrid). Current fuel consumption – Trips "1" then "2": Displays information related to the current trip (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) • Average speed. (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). Calculated during the last few seconds. • Average fuel consumption. • Distance travelled. Display of data in the This function is only displayed from 19 mph instrument panel Trip reset (30 km/h). Trip computer data is displayed permanently ► When the desired trip is displayed, when the "TRIP COMPUTER" or "PERSONAL" Average fuel consumption press the button on the end of the wiper display mode is selected, depending on version. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) control stalk for more than 2 seconds. Calculated since the last trip computer Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used reset. identically.
22 Instruments
Average speed Monochrome screen C On the audio system control panel, use the (mph or km/h) following buttons: 1 Calculated since the last trip computer MENU Access the main menu Displays 5 6 Scroll through the items on the screen reset. or 7 or 8 Change a setting value Distance travelled OK Validate (miles or km) Back Abandon the current operation Calculated since the last trip computer reset. Main menu
Stop & Start time counter (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a
time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. Depending on the context, the following are ► Press the “MENU" ” button: It resets to zero every time the ignition is displayed: • "Multimedia". switched on. – Time. • "Telephone". – Date. • "Connections". – Outside temperature (it flashes if there is a risk • "Personalisation-configuration". of ice). ► Press the “7" or "8" button to select the – Visual parking sensors information. menu required, then confirm by pressing the – Current audio source playing. "OK" button. – Telephone or hands-free kit information. – Settings menus for the display and the vehicle "Multimedia" menu equipment. With the audio system switched on, this menu allows you to activate or deactivate Controls the functions associated with use of the radio
(Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, Radio Text (TXT) display) or to choose
the media play mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat).
23 Instruments
For more information on the "Multimedia" Defining the vehicle parameters Display configuration application, refer to the "Audio equipment and This menu allows the activation or deactivation This menu gives access to the following settings: telematics" section. of the following equipment, depending on – "Choice of units", version: – "Date and time adjustment", "Telephone" menu – "Access to the vehicle": – "Display parameters", With the audio system switched on, this • "Plip action". – "Brightness". menu allows you to make a call, view the For more information on the Remote control, Adjusting the date and time calls log or the various telephone directories. and in particular the selective unlocking of the ► Press the "7" or "8" button to display the For more information on the "Telephone" driver's door, refer to the "Access" section. "Display configuration" menu, then press OK. application, refer to the "Audio equipment and – "Comfort": ► Press the "5" or "6" button to select the telematics" section. • “Rear wipe in reverse gear". "Date and time adjustment" button, then press • “Parking assistance". OK. "Connections" menu • "Fatigue Detection System". ► Press the "7" or "8" button to select the With the audio system on, this menu For more information on the Wiper control setting to modify. Confirm by pressing OK, then allows a Bluetooth device (telephone, stalk, refer to the “Lighting and visibility” section. modify the setting and confirm again to save the media player) to be paired and the connection For more information on the Parking sensors modification. mode to be defined (hands-free, playing audio or the Fatigue detection system, refer to the ► Adjust the settings one by one, confirming files). “Driving” section. with the OK button. For more information on the "Connections" – "Driving assistance": ► Press the "5" or "6" button, then the OK application, refer to the "Audio equipment and • "Auto. emergency braking" (Active Safety button to select the OK box and confirm or the telematics" section. Brake). Back button to cancel. • "Speed recommendation" (Road signs As a safety measure, the driver must only "Personalisation- recognition). carry out operations that require • "Tyre inflation" (Tyre under-inflation configuration" menu sustained attention when stationary. detection). This menu gives access to the following For more information on the Active Safety functions: Brake, the Road signs recognition or the Tyre – "Define the vehicle parameters", under-inflation detection, refer to the “Driving” Touch screen – "Choice of language", section. This system gives access to the following – "Display configuration". elements: Choice of language – Permanent display of the time and the exterior This menu allows selection of the language used temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if by the screen and the instrument panel. there is a risk of ice).
24 Instruments
– Vehicle functions and equipment setting Principles Menus menus. 1 ► Use the buttons arranged below the touch – Audio system and telephone controls and screen for access to the menus, then press the display of related information. virtual buttons on the touch screen. – Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions Some menus may display across two pages: (visual parking sensor information, Park Assist, press the "OPTIONS" button to access the etc.). second page. – Internet services and display of related information. After a few moments with no action on – Navigation system controls and the second page, the first page is display of related information (depending on displayed automatically. version).
To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" For safety reasons, always stop the or "ON". Press with three fingers on the touch vehicle before performing operations Settings for a function that require sustained attention. screen to show all menu buttons. Some functions are not accessible while Access to additional information on the Radio / Media driving. function See "Audio equipment and telematics" Confirm section.. Recommendations Climate Return to the previous page or confirm Settings for temperature, air flow, etc. This screen is of the capacitive type. For more information on Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Semi-automatic and Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. mono-zone air conditioning Automatic , refer to the Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. dual-zone air conditioning corresponding sections. Connected Navigation* See "Audio equipment and telematics" section. Driving or Vehicle**
* The TomTom Traffic logo displayed on the map confirms the availability of connected navigation services. For more information, refer to the connected navigation section. ** Depending on equipment.
25 Instruments
Activation, deactivation and settings for certain – Green bar chart: energy recovered during functions. deceleration and braking, used to recharge the The functions are organised in 2 tabs : "Driving battery. functions" and "Vehicle settings". 2. Average fuel consumption for the current trip Telephone (kWh/100 km) and historical values (orange bar See "Audio equipment and telematics" chart). section.. ► You can change the displayed time scale by Applications pressing the - or + buttons. 1. Active driving mode 2. Petrol engine eSave function For the other functions, refer to the "Audio 3. Electric motor(s) equipment and telematics" section. The eSave tab makes it possible to reserve all or 4. Traction battery charge level Hybrid part of the electrical energy of the traction battery Access to the hybrid system features Energy flows have a specific colour for each type for later use during a journey (e.g. driving in an (energy flow, consumption statistics, deferred of driving: urban area or in an area reserved for electric charge, eSave function). – Blue: 100% electric power. vehicles). For more information on Charging the battery – Orange: power from the petrol engine. ► Activate the function by choosing ON then (Hybrid), refer to the corresponding section. – Green: energy recovery. select the electrical energy to be reserved: 10 Volume adjustment/mute. km, 20 km or all of the electrical energy (MAX). Consumption statistics See "Audio equipment and telematics" Activation of the function is confirmed by section. The Statistics tab shows electrical energy and the lighting up of this indicator lamp in the fuel consumption statistics. instrument panel and the display of the energy Hybrid menu reserve in miles or kms. ► To use the energy reserve, choose the Energy flow ELECTRIC driving mode in the mode selector. The Flow tab presents the operation of the The function settings are not saved when the rechargeable hybrid system in real time. ignition is switched off.
If the requested range exceeds the available range (not recommended), the
internal combustion engine starts to ensure 1. Average electrical consumption for the current that the traction battery is recharged to the trip (kWh/100 km) and historical values: requested threshold - risk of downgraded – Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy performance and overconsumption of fuel! supplied by the traction battery.
26 Instruments
Upper bar ► Create an account. ► Enter the vehicle’s VIN (code beginning with 1 Certain information is displayed permanently in "VF" on the vehicle registration document). the upper bar of the touch screen: For more information on – Time and exterior temperature (a blue warning Identification , refer to the corresponding section. lamp appears when there is a risk of ice). markings – Reminder of the air conditioning information, Network coverage and direct access to the corresponding menu. In order to be able to use the various – Reminder of information from the remotely operable features, ensure that your RadioMedia and Telephone menus and vehicle is located in an area covered by the navigation instructions (depending on mobile network. equipment). A lack of network coverage may prevent – Notifications. communication with the vehicle (for example, – Access to the Settings for the touch screen if it is in an underground car park). In such and the digital instrument panel (date/time, cases, the application will display a message languages, units, etc.). indicating that the connection with the vehicle could not be established. Remote features (Hybrid)
These features are accessible using a smartphone, via the MyPeugeot application:
– Battery charge management. – Temperature pre-conditioning management. – Consumption, charge status and driving range statistics. Installation procedure ► Download the MyPeugeot app from the appropriate online store for your smartphone.
27 Access
Remote control / Key Integral key Selective unlocking and opening of The key built into the remote control can be the tailgate Remote control function used for the following operations, depending on By default, selective unlocking of the tailgate version: is deactivated and its motorised operation is – Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. activated. – Activation/Deactivation of the manual child ► Press and hold this button to unlock lock. the boot and trigger the motorised – Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger opening of the tailgate. airbag. The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked.
– Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors. If selective unlocking of the tailgate is – Switching on the ignition and starting/switching ► To eject the key or put it back in place, pull deactivated, pressing the button unlocks off the engine. and hold the button. the whole vehicle. The remote control can be used for the following Without Keyless Entry and Starting remote functions, depending on version: Unlocking the vehicle – Unlocking / Locking / Deadlocking the vehicle. If motorised operation of the tailgate is – Unlocking - Opening / Closing the boot. deactivated, pressing the button releases – Remote operation of lighting. the tailgate. – Folding / Unfolding the door mirrors. Selective unlocking (driver's door, To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close – Activating / Deactivating the alarm. boot) is configured in the vehicle the tailgate again. – Locating the vehicle. configuration menu. – Opening / Closing the windows. Complete unlocking Locking the vehicle
– Closing the sunroof. – Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser. ► Press the unlocking button. The remote control includes a conventional key Selective unlocking that allows the central unlocking / locking of the ► To unfold or fold the key, press the button. vehicle using the door lock, as well as starting Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap Normal locking With Keyless Entry and Starting ► Press the unlocking button. and switching off the engine. ► Press the locking button. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be ► Press it again to unlock the other doors and The locking, and the activation of the alarm locked / unlocked in the event of a failure of the the boot. depending on version, is confirmed by the remote control, the central locking, the battery, Complete or selective unlocking and alarm lighting of the direction indicators. deactivation is confirmed by flashing the etc. For more information on the Back-up Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. direction indicators. procedures, please refer to the corresponding section. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
28 Access
Selective unlocking and opening of An access (door or boot) that is not For more information on the Alarm, refer to the tailgate properly closed prevents locking of the the corresponding section. 2 By default, selective unlocking of the tailgate vehicle. However, if the vehicle has an alarm, is deactivated and its motorised operation is it will be activated after 45 seconds. Locating the vehicle activated. If the vehicle is unlocked and there is no This function helps you to spot your vehicle from ► Press and hold this button to unlock action at the doors or boot, the vehicle will a distance, with the vehicle locked: the boot and trigger the motorised automatically lock itself again after about – The direction indicators flash for approximately opening of the tailgate. 30 seconds. If the vehicle has an alarm, it will 10 seconds. The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked. also be reactivated automatically. – The door mirror spotlamps come on. If selective unlocking of the tailgate is – The courtesy lamps come on. deactivated, pressing the button unlocks Deadlocking ► Press this button. the whole vehicle. ► Press the locking button again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by If motorised operation of the tailgate is the temporary lighting of the direction indicators). Remote lighting of the deactivated, pressing the button releases Deadlocking renders the interior door lamps the tailgate. controls inoperative. It also deactivates Availability of this function depends on version. To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close the central locking button. ► Press this button. The sidelamps, the tailgate again. The horn remains operational. dipped beam headlamps, number plate Never leave anyone inside the vehicle lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 Locking the vehicle when it is deadlocked. seconds.
Pressing again before the end of the timed Closing the windows period switches off the lamps immediately. Holding the locking button pressed for more than 3 seconds closes the windows. Advice Normal locking When closing the windows, ensure that Remote control ► Press the locking button. no person or object could prevent their The remote control is a sensitive, high- The locking, and the activation of the alarm correct closure. frequency device; avoid handling it in your depending on version, is confirmed by the To leave the windows partly open on versions pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally lighting of the direction indicators. with alarm, you must first deactivate the unlocking the vehicle. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. interior volumetric alarm protection. Avoid pressing the remote control buttons while out of range of the vehicle, due to
29 Access
the risk of rendering the remote control Keyless Entry and Selective unlocking is deactivated by default. If selective unlocking of the tailgate is inoperative. It would then be necessary to deactivated, pressing this control also reset it. Starting Complete unlocking unlocks the doors. The remote control does not work when the ► Pass your hand behind the handle of one key is in the ignition switch, even when the of the front doors or press the tailgate opening ignition is switched off. control. Locking the vehicle If the motorised tailgate opening control is activated, this action triggers its automatic Normal locking Anti-theft protection Do not modify the electronic vehicle opening. immobiliser, as this might result in Opening the windows malfunctions. Depending on version, keeping your hand For vehicles with a key ignition switch, behind the door handle or maintaining the remember to remove the key and turn the press on the tailgate opening control allows the steering wheel to engage the steering lock. windows to be opened to the desired position.
This system allows the unlocking, locking Selective unlocking Locking the vehicle and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap Driving with the doors locked could make electronic key on your person in the recognition ► Pass your hand behind the driver’s door ► Press the handle on one of the front doors it more difficult for the emergency services to zone A. handle. (at the markings) or the locking control on the enter the vehicle in an emergency. ► To unlock the vehicle completely, pass your tailgate. As a safety precaution, remove the key from Unlocking the vehicle It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the hand behind the front passenger door handle the ignition or take the electronic key with you with the electronic key close to the passenger electronic keys is left inside the vehicle. when leaving the vehicle, even for a short door. Closing the windows and sunroof time. Complete or selective unlocking, and Maintaining pressure on the door handle or deactivation of the alarm depending on the tailgate control allows the windows and, Purchasing a second-hand vehicle version, is confirmed by the flashing of the depending on version, the sunroof to be closed Have the key codes memorised by a direction indicators. to the desired position. PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. This operation also closes the sunroof blind. in your possession are the only ones able to
start the vehicle. Selective unlocking of the tailgate Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is ► Press the tailgate opening control to unlock configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch just the boot. screen menu. The doors remain locked.
30 Access
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is Make sure that no item or person could If one of the doors or the boot is still open deactivated, pressing this control also prevent the correct closing of the or if the electronic key for the Keyless 2 unlocks the doors. windows and sunroof. Entry and Starting system has been left inside Pay particular attention to children when the vehicle, central locking will not take place. operating windows. However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, Locking the vehicle it will be activated after 45 seconds. The locking, and the activation of the alarm Normal locking depending on version, is confirmed by the
If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or temporary lighting of the direction indicators. boot are not subsequently opened, the Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. vehicle will automatically lock itself again after Deadlocking about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically. Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates Depending on version, the automatic the central locking button. door mirror folding/unfolding function is The horn remains operational. configured via the Driving / Vehicle touch
Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it screen menu. ► Press the handle on one of the front doors is deadlocked. Otherwise, this setting can be carried out at a (at the markings) or the locking control on the
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. tailgate. It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the electronic keys is left inside the vehicle. As a safety measure, never leave the Closing the windows and sunroof vehicle, even for a short time, without Maintaining pressure on the door handle or taking the Keyless Entry and Starting the tailgate control allows the windows and, system’s electronic key with you. depending on version, the sunroof to be closed Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if to the desired position. the key is present in one of the defined areas while the vehicle is unlocked. This operation also closes the sunroof blind. ► Within 5 seconds, press again on the handle on one of the front doors (at the markings) or the To preserve the battery charge in the locking control on the tailgate (on the right-hand electronic key and the vehicle's battery, side) to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by the the "hands-free" functions are set to temporary lighting of the direction indicators). hibernation mode after 21 days without use.
31 Access
To restore these functions, press one of the When locking/deadlocking from the Back-up procedures ► Insert the key in the door lock. remote control buttons or start the engine with outside ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ the electronic key in the reader. When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked lock the vehicle. For more information on starting with the from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes Lost keys, remote control, ► Turn the key rearwards again within Keyless Entry and Starting system, refer to and the button is inoperative. electronic key 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. the corresponding section. ► After normal locking, pull one of the Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. registration certificate, a personal identification not be activated when locking with the ► After deadlocking, it is necessary to use Electrical interference document and, if possible, the label bearing the key. the remote control, Keyless Entry and Starting The electronic key may not operate if key code. If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. close to certain electronic devices: telephone The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the when the door is opened; switch on the (switched on or on standby), laptop computer, key code and the transponder code required to ignition to stop it. strong magnetic fields, etc. Automatic (anti-intrusion order a new key. security) Complete unlocking/locking Central locking not Central locking The doors and boot lock automatically while of the vehicle with the key functioning
driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Use this procedure in the following situations: Use these procedures in the following cases: To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated – Remote control battery discharged. – Central locking malfunction. by default): – Remote control malfunction. – Battery disconnected or discharged. ► Press the button until an audible warning is – Vehicle battery discharged. triggered and a confirmation message appears. In the event of a malfunction of the – Vehicle in an area subject to strong central locking system, the battery must Transporting long or voluminous electromagnetic interference. be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is objects In the first case, change the remote control locked fully. Press the central locking control to drive battery.
with the boot open and the doors locked. In the second case, reinitialise the remote Otherwise, every time the speed of the control. Driver's door Manual vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks Refer to the corresponding sections. ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle will rebound and an alert will appear. to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it. (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle. The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the Passenger doors central locking of the vehicle. Unlocking The central locking does not take place if ► Pull the interior door opening control. one of the doors is open. Locking
32 Access
► Insert the key in the door lock. ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ 2 lock the vehicle. ► Turn the key rearwards again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will not be activated when locking with the key. If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
when the door is opened; switch on the ignition to stop it. With Keyless Entry and Starting Battery ref.: CR2032/3 Volts. ► Open the doors. Central locking not ► For the rear doors, check that the child lock functioning is not on. Use these procedures in the following cases: Refer to the corresponding section. – Central locking malfunction. ► Remove the black cap, located on the edge – Battery disconnected or discharged. of the door, using the key. ► Insert the key into the socket without forcing In the event of a malfunction of the it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the central locking system, the battery must door. be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is ► Remove the key and refit the black cap. locked fully. ► Close the doors and check from the outside that the vehicle is locked. ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small Driver's door Changing the battery screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover. ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle ► Remove the discharged battery from its A message is displayed in the instrument panel to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it. housing. when the battery needs changing. ► Insert the new battery, observing the polarity, Without Keyless Entry and Starting Passenger doors and clip the cover onto the housing. Battery ref.: CR1620/3 Volts. Unlocking ► Reinitialise the remote control. ► Pull the interior door opening control. Locking
33 Access
For more information on Reinitialising the ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key Alarm When the vehicle is parked, the alarm remote control, refer to the corresponding from the switch. will not be triggered if the vehicle is (Depending on version)
section. The remote control is now fully operational knocked. again. Do not throw remote control batteries Self-protection function away, as they contain metals that are With Keyless Entry and Starting The system checks for the putting out of service
harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved disposal point. of its components. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring is put out of service or Reinitialising the remote damaged.
control For all work on the alarm system, contact Following replacement of the battery or in System which protects and provides a deterrent a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the event of a fault, it may be necessary to against theft and break-ins. workshop. reinitialise the remote control. Exterior perimeter monitoring The system checks for opening of the vehicle. Locking the vehicle with full Without Keyless Entry and Starting The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. alarm system ► Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into Interior volumetric monitoring the remote control) into the lock to open the Activation The system checks for any variation in volume in vehicle. ► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. the passenger compartment. ► Place the electronic key against the back-up ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a reader on the steering column and hold it there remote control or with the “Keyless Entry and window, enters the passenger compartment or until the ignition is switched on. Starting” system. moves inside the vehicle. ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the When the monitoring system is active, the red "START/STOP" button. Anti-tilt monitoring indicator lamp in the button flashes once per ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever The system checks for any change in the attitude second and the direction indicators come on for in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. of the vehicle. about 2 seconds. ► Switch off the ignition. ► With an automatic gearbox, while in mode The alarm goes off if the vehicle is lifted or The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated ► Return the key to position 2 (Ignition on). P, depress the brake pedal. moved. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and ► Immediately press the closed padlock button If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds. for a few seconds. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
34 Access
When the vehicle is parked, the alarm If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not Locking the vehicle will not be triggered if the vehicle is properly closed, the vehicle is not locked, 2 knocked. but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be with exterior perimeter activated after 45 seconds, at the same time monitoring only Self-protection function as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt The system checks for the putting out of service monitoring. monitoring to avoid the unwanted triggering of of its components. the alarm, in certain cases such as: The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central Deactivation – Slightly open window. control or the siren wiring is put out of service or – Washing the vehicle. ► Press one of the remote control unlocking damaged. – Changing a wheel. buttons: – Towing the vehicle. For all work on the alarm system, contact short press – Transport on a ship or ferry. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. long press Deactivating the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring or ► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds Locking the vehicle with full ► Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry and press the alarm button until its red indicator lamp Starting system. alarm system is on fixed. The monitoring system is deactivated: the ► Get out of the vehicle. Activation indicator lamp in the button goes off and the ► Lock the vehicle immediately using the direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. ► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. remote control or with the “Keyless Entry and ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the If the vehicle automatically locks itself Starting” system. remote control or with the “Keyless Entry and again (as happens if a door or the boot is Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is Starting” system. not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), activated; the red indicator lamp in the button When the monitoring system is active, the red the monitoring system is automatically flashes every second. indicator lamp in the button flashes once per reactivated. second and the direction indicators come on for To take effect, this deactivation must be about 2 seconds. carried out after each time the ignition is The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated switched off. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.
35 Access
Reactivating the interior volumetric ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. From inside When selective unlocking is activated, and anti-tilt monitoring The indicator lamp in the button goes off. ► Pull the interior opening control of a door; this the electronic key must be close to the ► Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring unlocks the vehicle completely. rear of the vehicle. by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control Locking the vehicle without With selective unlocking activated: or the Keyless Entry and Starting system. The tailgate is not designed to hold a activating the alarm – Opening the driver's door unlocks The indicator lamp in the button goes off. bicycle carrier. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not ► Reactivate all monitoring by locking the (integral to the remote control) in the driver's already been completely unlocked). vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless door lock. – Opening one of the passenger doors Entry and Starting system. Closing the tailgate unlocks the rest of the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button once again Malfunction ► Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. ► Release the grips and press down on the flashes every second. When the ignition is switched on, fixed outside of the tailgate to close it. illumination of the red indicator lamp in the Closing Triggering of the alarm button indicates a malfunction of the system. If a door is not properly closed, this In the event of a malfunction or if you This is indicated by sounding of the siren Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a warning lamp comes on accompanied by experience difficulty opening or closing and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 qualified workshop. a message if the engine is running, and an the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT seconds. audible signal when the vehicle is travelling at dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, Depending on the country of sale, certain more than 6 mph (10 km/h). to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent monitoring functions remain active until the alarm Doors any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially has been triggered eleven times consecutively. causing serious injury. When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote Opening Boot control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the From outside Opening the tailgate Back-up release
button informs you that the alarm was triggered ► After unlocking the vehicle or with the To manually unlock the boot in the event of a during your absence. When the ignition is Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key in the battery or central locking failure. switched on, this flashing stops. recognition zone, pull the door handle. Unlocking Failure of the remote control When selective unlocking is activated, ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock
the first press of the remote control To deactivate the monitoring functions: from inside the boot. unlocking button permits unlocking of the ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the ► With the vehicle unlocked or with the driver's door only. driver's door lock. "Keyless Entry and Starting" system electronic ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. key in the recognition zone, press the central tailgate control. ► Raise the tailgate.
36 Access
When selective unlocking is activated, the electronic key must be close to the 2 rear of the vehicle.
The tailgate is not designed to hold a bicycle carrier.
Closing the tailgate ► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the ► Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. lock to unlock the boot. Check that there is enough space to ► Release the grips and press down on the ► Move the latch to the left. allow for the movement of the motorised outside of the tailgate to close it. tailgate. Locking after closing
In the event of a malfunction or if you If the fault persists after closing again, the boot experience difficulty opening or closing will remain locked. the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, In the event of a fault with the central to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent locking system, it is essential to any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so causing serious injury. ensure complete locking of the vehicle.
Back-up release Hands-free tailgate To manually unlock the boot in the event of a The motorised tailgate must only be operated battery or central locking failure. Never insert a finger in the locking with the vehicle stationary. system of the motorised tailgate - risk of
Unlocking serious injury! ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot. Anti-pinch
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection system that automatically interrupts and reverses its movement by a few degrees, to allow the obstacle to be cleared.
37 Access
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not ► Briefly press the exterior tailgate control B, It is possible to interrupt the operation of active at the end of the closing travel (around 1 with the electronic key on your person. the tailgate at any point. cm from completely closed). or Pressing one of these controls again ► Briefly press the interior tailgate control C interrupts the movement that is underway. To avoid the risk of injury through (closing only). Following the interruption of a movement, pinching or trapping, before and during or pressing one of these controls again reverses operation of the motorised tailgate: ► Press the control D on the dashboard twice in the movement. – ensure that there is no-one close to the succession. rear of the vehicle, or – monitor the activity of the rear passengers, Hands-free function (“Hands-Free ► With the electronic key on your person, use particularly any children. the “Hands-Free Tailgate Access” function E by Tailgate Access”) performing a "kicking" movement below the rear With the electronic key on your person, this Bicycle carrier / Towbar bumper, near the number plate. function opens, closes or stops the movement of the tailgate with a “kicking” movement below the The motorised tailgate is not designed to support For more information on the Hands-free rear bumper. a bicycle carrier. (“Hands-Free Tailgate Access”) function, refer The "Hands-Free Tailgate/Access" When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar to the corresponding section.
function is set via the with connection of a cable to the towbar socket, Driving / Vehicle There are several ways of operating the tailgate: The tailgate opens, either completely by touch screen menu. the motorised operation of the tailgate will be default, or to the position memorised A. Using the Keyless Entry and Starting system automatically deactivated. beforehand. Ensure that you are steady on your feet electronic key. If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not If motorised operation is not activated, these before performing the “kicking” B. Using the exterior tailgate control. recommended by PEUGEOT, it is essential actions release the tailgate (partially-open movement. C. Using the interior tailgate control. to deactivate the motorised operation of the position). Take care not to touch the exhaust system D. Using the control on the dashboard*. tailgate. When the vehicle is locked, the request to which may be hot - risk of burns! E. Using the “Hands-Free Tailgate Access”
open the boot with one of controls , or function below the rear bumper. A B Motorised operation E unlocks the vehicle, or only the boot if Motorised operation of the tailgate is set selective unlocking is activated, prior to the via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen Opening / Closing opening of the boot. menu. ► Press and hold the central button A of the Closing the tailgate with the “Hands-Free
electronic key. Tailgate Access” function enables you to lock or the vehicle.
* Depending on version.
38 Access
It is possible to interrupt the operation of been detected, wait at least 2 seconds before the tailgate at any point. repeating the movement. 2 Pressing one of these controls again Do not perform repetitive “kicking” interrupts the movement that is underway. movements. Following the interruption of a movement, pressing one of these controls again reverses If the tailgate has not started to open, check that: the movement. – the function is activated. – the electronic key is on your person, outside the vehicle in the rear recognition area. Hands-free function (“Hands-Free – the “kicking” movement was performed in the Tailgate Access”) detection zone, close enough to the bumper. With the electronic key on your person, this – the foot was removed from the bumper quickly function opens, closes or stops the movement of enough. the tailgate with a “kicking” movement below the Automatic locking with the hands-free rear bumper. function
The "Hands-Free Tailgate/Access" function is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.
Ensure that you are steady on your feet before performing the “kicking” ► Position yourself behind the vehicle by the movement. number plate and perform a “kicking” movement Take care not to touch the exhaust system in the "OK" detection zone.
which may be hot - risk of burns! The “kicking” movement must be given forwards, ► To activate/deactivate the automatic locking
smoothly, not too fast and with a vertical of the vehicle when closing the tailgate with the movement from low to high. Raise the foot hands-free function, press this button. sufficiently and remove it immediately. The green indicator lamp comes on to indicate The taking into account of the “kicking” that the function is activated. movement is confirmed by the lighting of the direction indicators.
"Sideward kicking" movements do not work. If the “kicking” movement has not
39 Access
Recommendations on the hands-free ► move the tailgate to the desired position Manual closing of the In wintry conditions function ("Hands-Free Tailgate Access") manually or by pressing the button. To avoid any operating problems, remove ► press button C or the exterior control B for motorised tailgate in case of the snow or wait until the ice melts before If it does not work, check that the electronic key more than 3 seconds (memorisation is confirmed requesting motorised opening of the tailgate. is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic failure by a brief audible signal). interference (e.g. smartphone). This operation is only necessary in the case of The function may be deactivated or affected if Memorising is not available until the failure of the tailgate motor. When washing there is rain or snow. height of opening is more than or equal If the failure originates from the battery, it is When washing the vehicle in an The function may not work correctly with a to 1 metre between the low position and the recommended to recharge it or change it with the automatic car wash, do not forget to lock prosthetic leg. high position of the tailgate. tailgate closed. the vehicle to prevent any risk of unwanted In some circumstances, the tailgate may open or In this situation, a significant force may be opening. close by itself, particularly when: To delete the memorised position: needed to close the tailgate. – hitching up or removing a trailer; ► open the tailgate to any position. ► Close it gently without slamming, as slowly as – fitting or removing a bicycle carrier; ► press button C or the exterior control B for possible, by pushing at the centre of the tailgate. Electric windows more than 3 seconds (deletion is confirmed by a – loading or unloading bicycles on / from a Do not lower the tailgate by pushing at long audible signal). bicycle carrier; one of its sides - risk of damage! – depositing or lifting something behind the vehicle; Manual operation – an animal approaches the rear bumper; The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even Precautions in use – washing the vehicle; with motorised operation activated. To avoid unintentionally opening the – maintenance is performed on the vehicle; The tailgate must be stationary. 1. Left-hand front tailgate while operating the towing – accessing the spare wheel. When opening and closing the motorised tailgate 2. Right-hand front device: To avoid such operating problems, keep the manually, there is no assistance from gas struts. 3. Right-hand rear – Deactivate the “Hands-Free Tailgate electronic key away from the recognition zone or Resistance to opening and closing is therefore 4. Left-hand rear Access” function in advance in the vehicle deactivate the hands-free function. entirely normal. 5. Deactivation of the electric window controls configuration menu. located by the rear seats The installation of a towing device may Repeatedly opening and closing the – Or remove the electronic key from the disturb the detection system. motorised tailgate can cause overheating recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. of its electric motor, after which opening and For more information on the Towing device Manual operation closing will not be possible. with quickly detachable towball, refer to the ► To open/close the window, press/pull the Memorising an opening Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric corresponding section. switch without passing the point of resistance; position motor to cool down before operating the the window stops as soon as the switch is tailgate again. released. To memorise a position, in order to limit the If you are unable to wait, operate it manually. motorised tailgate opening angle:
40 Access
In wintry conditions Automatic operation The red indicator lamp in the button comes To avoid any operating problems, remove on and a confirmation message is displayed. 2 ► To open/close the window, press/pull the the snow or wait until the ice melts before The lamp will remain lit until the controls are switch past its resistance point: the window requesting motorised opening of the tailgate. reactivated. opens/closes completely when the switch is The rear electric windows can still be controlled released. using the driver's controls. When washing Operating the switch again stops the movement When washing the vehicle in an of the window. automatic car wash, do not forget to lock Reinitialising the electric the vehicle to prevent any risk of unwanted Window controls remain operational for windows approximately 45 seconds after switching opening. Following reconnection of the battery, or if off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch After that time, the controls are disabled. function must be reinitialised. To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or Electric windows unlock the vehicle. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during these operations. Anti-pinch For each of the windows: ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the stops and immediately partially lowers again. control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window is fully closed. 1. Left-hand front Deactivating the rear ► Continue to pull the switch for at least 2. Right-hand front controls for the rear electric one second after reaching the window closed 3. Right-hand rear position. 4. Left-hand rear windows
5. Deactivation of the electric window controls If an electric window meets an obstacle located by the rear seats during operation, the movement of the window must be reversed. To do this, press the switch concerned. Manual operation When the driver operates the passengers’
► To open/close the window, press/pull the electric window switches, it is important to switch without passing the point of resistance; For your children's safety, press control 5 to ensure that nothing can prevent the window the window stops as soon as the switch is deactivate the controls for the rear electric from closing properly. released. windows, irrespective of their positions. It is important to ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.
41 Access
Be particularly aware of children when Precautions Operation operating the windows. When opening the sunroof fully, the movable Be aware of passengers and/or other persons Do not put your head or arms through the glass moves to a partially open position, then present when closing the windows using sunroof when driving - risk of serious slides over the roof. All intermediate positions the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and injury! are allowed. Starting" system. Ensure that any luggage or accessories Depending on the speed of the vehicle, carried on the roof bars does not the partially open position may vary to Panoramic sunroof interfere with the movement of the sunroof. improve the acoustics. Do not place heavy loads on the movable The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable glass panel of the sunroof. Before operating the sunroof or blind glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind control buttons, ensure that no object or that can be opened independently. Opening the If the sunroof is wet, following a shower person might prevent the movement. sunroof automatically opens the blind. or washing the vehicle, wait until it is Be particularly aware of children when ► To operate the panoramic sunroof or the completely dry before opening. operating the sunroof or blind. blind, use the buttons in the roof console. Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by If something is trapped when operating the snow or ice - risk of damage! sunroof or blind, you should reverse the Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or movement of the sunroof or blind by pressing
ice from the sunroof. the control in question. The driver must ensure that passengers use Check the condition of the sunroof seals the sunroof and blind correctly. regularly (presence of dust or deposits, dead leaves, etc.). Anti-pinch system If using a car wash, check that the roof is If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle correctly closed in advance and keep the when closing, the movement is automatically A. Sunroof blind control tip of the high-pressure lance at least 30 reversed. B. Sunroof control centimetres from the seals. The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be The sunroof or blind can be operated when the effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h). ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof Opening / Closing enough), with the engine running, in STOP mode open. ► To open the sunroof or the blind, use the part of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds after of the button located towards the rear. turning off the ignition or after locking the vehicle.
42 Access
► To close the sunroof or the blind, use the part Reinitialisation of the button located towards the front. 2 Following reconnection of the battery or in the Operation of buttons event of a fault or jerky movement of the sunroof ► Pressing a button beyond its point of or blind, reinitialisation is required. resistance directly opens or closes the sunroof ► Check that nothing is interfering with the fully. sunroof or blind and that the seals are clean. ► Pressing the button again stops the current ► With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof movement. and blind. ► When holding a button (without going ► Press and hold the front part of button B, until beyond the point of resistance), the movement the sunroof and blind move slightly, then hold for of the sunroof or blind stops when this button is a further 1 second before releasing. released. ► Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold the ► When the sunroof is closed: pressing once front part of button B. The blind and the sunroof without passing the point of resistance moves it will open and close, one after the other. When to a partially open position. both are completely closed again, hold for a ► When the sunroof is partially open: pressing further 2 seconds and release. once without passing the point of resistance If there is an operating fault, restart the opens or closes it fully. whole procedure. The roof and windows, then the blind, can be closed by holding down the door locking control. The operation stops as soon as the locking control is released.
Closing of the blind is limited by the position of the sunroof: the blind cannot go further than the front of the mobile glass. During simultaneous movements of the sunroof and blind, the blind automatically stops or resumes movement depending on the position of the sunroof.
43 Ease of use and comfort
The distance between your knees and the Passenger’s side When driving
Driving position dashboard should be at least 10 cm, for easy Maintain a good driving position and hold the access to the dashboard controls. steering wheel with both hands at the 'quarter to Correct seating position Adjust the backrest angle to as vertical a position three' position, so that you can easily and quickly Adopting a good driving position helps improve as possible; never tilt it more than 25°. reach the controls behind and near the steering your comfort and protection. Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is wheel. It also optimises interior and exterior visibility as level with the top of your head. well as access to controls. Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support Never adjust the seats or steering wheel Whether or not the vehicle has certain seat your thighs. when driving. adjustments described in this section depends Adjust the lumbar support so that it conforms to Always keep your feet on the floor. on the trim level and country of sale. the shape of your spine. Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at least 25 Driver’s side cm from your sternum and you can hold it with Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back Front seats your arms slightly bent. and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. The steering wheel should not hide the Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so that Before moving the seat backwards, instrument panel. you are at a distance of at least 25 cm from the ensure that there is no person or object dashboard. that might prevent the full travel of the seat. As a safety precaution, adjust the seats Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is There is a risk of trapping or pinching only when the vehicle is stationary. level with the top of your head. passengers if present in the rear seats or of jamming the seat if large objects are placed If your vehicle has electric seats, the Before moving off on the floor behind the seat. ignition must be on to adjust them. Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors to reduce blind spots.
Fasten your seat belt: place the diagonal belt in Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back the middle of your shoulder and adjust the lap and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. belt so that it is tightened across your pelvis. Adjust the seat cushion height so that your eyes Ensure that all passengers have fastened their are level with the centre of the windscreen. seat belts correctly. The head room (from the roof) should be at least 10 cm. If your vehicle has electric door mirrors, Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so the ignition must be on to adjust them. that you can fully depress the pedals with legs slightly flexed.
44 Ease of use and comfort
When driving Manually-adjusted seats 5. Lumbar support adjustment 3 Maintain a good driving position and hold the (only on the driver's seat) steering wheel with both hands at the 'quarter to ► Turn the knob forwards or backwards three' position, so that you can easily and quickly to increase or decrease the level of lumbar reach the controls behind and near the steering support. wheel.
Never adjust the seats or steering wheel ‘AGR’ certified seats when driving. Additional adjustments
Always keep your feet on the floor.
Front seats
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is no person or object
1. Longitudinal adjustment of the seat position that might prevent the full travel of the seat. ► Raise the control bar and slide the seat Seat cushion length adjustment There is a risk of trapping or pinching 1. forwards or backwards. ► Pull the handle forwards to release the passengers if present in the rear seats or of ► Release the bar to lock the seat in cushion, then move the front part of the seat jamming the seat if large objects are placed position in one of the notches. cushion forwards or backwards. on the floor behind the seat. 2. Seat cushion height adjustment 2. Seat cushion angle electric adjustment ► Raise or lower the control as many times ► Press and hold the front or rear of the as needed to obtain the desired height. button to raise or lower the front part of the 3. Seat backrest angle adjustment seat cushion. ► Turn the knob forwards or backwards to recline the backrest to the desired angle. or ► For a passenger seat that can be placed in the table position, pull the handle and guide the backrest forwards or backwards. 4. Head restraint height adjustment Refer to the corresponding section.
45 Ease of use and comfort
3. Lumbar support electric adjustment Folding the backrest Front head restraints Refitting a head restraint
The control allows independent adjustment of ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides the depth and vertical position of the lumbar Adjusting the height in the corresponding seat backrest. support. ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will ► Press and hold the front or rear of the go. control to increase or reduce the lumbar ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint support. and push it down. ► Press and hold the top or bottom of the ► Adjust the height of the head restraint. control to raise or lower the lumbar support Never drive with the head restraints area. removed; they should be in place and adjusted for the occupant of the seat. Placing the passenger seat in the table position ► Pull the control fully up to release the
backrest. Electrically-adjusted driver's The backrest of the passenger seat can be fully ► Tip the backrest fully forward. ► Upward: pull the head restraint up to the folded forwards and secured in this position. seat In this position, the backrest can support desired position; the head restraint can be felt to This function, when associated with folding To carry out these electric adjustments, a maximum load of . click into position. of the backrest of the rear seats, helps with 30 kg switch on the ignition or start the engine When sharp deceleration occurs, objects ► Downward: press lug A to lower the head transporting long and bulky objects. if the vehicle has gone into energy economy placed on the folded backrest can turn into restraint. First steps: mode. projectiles. ► Lower the head restraint. The head restraint is correctly adjusted These electric adjustments are accessible ► Fold up the “aircraft” type table (depending when its upper edge is level with the top about 1 minute after opening the driver's door. on version). Returning the backrest to the normal of the passenger’s head. They are deactivated about 1 minute after ► Move the seat backwards to allow space for position switching the ignition off. the head restraint. ► Pull the control fully up to release the Removing a head restraint ► Adjust the seat to the lowest position. backrest. ► Check that there is nothing that might ► Pull the head restraint fully up. ► Raise the backrest and guide it back until it interfere with folding of the backrest (seat belt, ► Press lug A to release the head restraint and latches into place. child seat, items of clothing, bags, etc.). raise it fully. ► Check that the backrest has engaged ► Stow the head restraint securely. Deactivation of the front passenger correctly. airbag is recommended.
46 Ease of use and comfort
Refitting a head restraint 5. Lumbar support adjustment 3 ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides The control allows independent adjustment of in the corresponding seat backrest. the depth and vertical position of the lumbar ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will support. go. ► Press and hold the front or rear of the ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint control to increase or reduce the lumbar and push it down. support. ► Adjust the height of the head restraint. ► Press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower the lumbar support Never drive with the head restraints area. removed; they should be in place and adjusted for the occupant of the seat. Memorising driving
Electrically-adjusted driver's positions 1. Seat cushion height and angle adjustment/ Associated with the electrically-adjusted driver’s seat Longitudinal adjustment of the seat position seat, this function allows two driving positions To carry out these electric adjustments, ► Raise or lower the front of the control to to be memorised, to make these adjustments switch on the ignition or start the engine obtain the desired seat cushion angle. easier if there are frequent driver changes. if the vehicle has gone into energy economy ► Raise or lower the rear of the control to It takes account of the electric adjustments of the mode. raise or lower the seat cushion. seat and the door mirrors.
These electric adjustments are accessible ► Slide the control forwards or backwards to about 1 minute after opening the driver's door. move the seat forwards or backwards. They are deactivated about 1 minute after 2. Seat backrest angle adjustment switching the ignition off. ► Turn the control forwards or backwards to recline the backrest to the desired angle.
3. Head restraint height adjustment Refer to the corresponding section. 4. Seat cushion length adjustment ► Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion, then move the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
Using buttons M / 1 / 2
47 Ease of use and comfort
► Enter the vehicle and switch the ignition on. The function is active only with the engine – do not kneel or stand on the seat, ► Next, proceed with the passenger's seat in ► Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. running. – do not spill liquids onto the seat, the same way. ► Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 – never use the heating function if the seat The changes are applied immediately. within 4 seconds. On/Off is wet. Once activated, the system starts a one hour An audible signal confirms the memorisation. ► Press the button corresponding to your seat. massage cycle, made up of sequences of 6 Memorising a new position cancels the previous ► Each press changes the heating level; the minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at position. corresponding number of indicator lamps come Multipoint massage rest. on. System with a choice of type of massage and The system automatically stops at the end of the Recalling a stored position ► To stop heating, press the button again until adjustment of its intensity. cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes off. Ignition on or engine running all the indicator lamps are off. This system operates with the engine running, as ► Press button 1 or 2 to recall the The system status is memorised when the well as in STOP mode of the Stop & Start. corresponding position. ignition is switched off. The massage settings are adjusted via the touch Steering wheel An audible signal sounds when the adjustment screen. Do not use the function when the seat adjustment is finished. From the front seat: is not occupied. You can interrupt the current movement by ► Press this button; its green indicator Reduce the heating intensity as soon as pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the lamp comes on. possible. seat adjustment controls. The settings page is displayed on the touch When the seat and passenger compartment A stored position cannot be recalled while screen with the last memorised settings. have reached a satisfactory temperature, driving. If the settings suit you and you make no switch the function off; reducing electricity Recalling stored positions is deactivated 45 changes, the display returns to its previous state,
consumption in turn decreases fuel seconds after switching off the ignition. and the function activates immediately. consumption. Seats must be adjusted one after another, ► When stationary, pull the control to release Heated seats starting with the driver's seat. the steering wheel. Prolonged use of the heated seats is not To modify the settings: ► Adjust the height and reach to suit your recommended for those with sensitive ► Begin with the driver’s seat. driving position. skin. ► Select a massage intensity from the three ► Push the control lever to lock the steering There is a risk of burns for people whose levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3" wheel. perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking (High). As a safety measure, these adjustments medication, etc.). ► Select another type of massage from those must only be carried out with the vehicle To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent offered. stationary. a short circuit: ► Wait for the driver's seat settings page to
– do not place sharp or heavy objects on the disappear. seat,
48 Ease of use and comfort
► Next, proceed with the passenger's seat in Mirrors the same way. ► Move control A to the right or to the left to 3 The changes are applied immediately. select the corresponding mirror. Once activated, the system starts a one hour Door mirrors ► Move control B in any of the four directions massage cycle, made up of sequences of 6 As a safety measure, the mirrors should to adjust. minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". ► Return control A to its central position. rest. The objects that you see in the mirrors are Manual folding The system automatically stops at the end of the in fact closer than they appear. Take this cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes off. into account in order to correctly judge the The mirrors can be folded manually (parking distance of vehicles approaching from behind. obstruction, narrow garage, etc.). Steering wheel ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle. adjustment Demisting/Defrosting Electric folding
If the vehicle is so equipped, demisting/ Depending on equipment, the mirrors can be defrosting of the heated door mirrors is folded electrically, when the vehicle is parked. performed when the heated rear screen is ► From the inside, with the switched on. ignition on, place control A in the For more information on Rear screen central position. demisting/defrosting, refer to the ► Pull control A backwards. corresponding section.
► Lock the vehicle from the outside. ► When stationary, pull the control to release Adjustment the steering wheel. Electric unfolding ► Adjust the height and reach to suit your ► From outside: unlock the vehicle. driving position. ► From inside: with the ignition on, place ► Push the control lever to lock the steering control A in the central position and then pull it wheel. rearwards.
As a safety measure, these adjustments Depending on version, the automatic must only be carried out with the vehicle door mirror folding/unfolding function is stationary.
49 Ease of use and comfort
configured via the Driving / Vehicle touch ► Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle Rear head restraints The rear head restraints can be removed.
screen menu. "night” position. Removing a head restraint Otherwise, this setting can be carried out at a ► Push the lever to change to the normal "day" ► Pull the head restraint fully up. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. position. ► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint
Adjustment
and remove it completely. ► Set the mirror to the normal “day” position. Automatic tilting in reverse gear ► Store the head restraint. Depending on version, this function allows to Automatic "electrochrome" model Refitting a head restraint automatically tilt the mirrors downwards to assist ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides with parking manoeuvres in reverse gear. in the corresponding seat backrest. With the engine running, on engaging reverse ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards. go. They return to their initial position: ► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint – A few seconds after coming out of reverse and push it down. gear.
– Once the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph This system automatically and progressively Never drive with passengers seated at (10 km/h). transitions between day and night modes, using the rear when the head restraints are – When the engine is switched off. a sensor that measures the light entering from removed; the head restraints should be in This function is set via the Driving/ the rear of the vehicle. place and in the high position.
Vehicle touch screen menu. To ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens The head restraint for the central Interior rear view mirror automatically when reverse gear is engaged. seat and those for the side seats are not interchangeable. Manual model Day/night position Rear bench seat
High position (use): ► Pull the head restraint fully up.
Low position (stowing; when the seats are not in use): Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. ► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint and push it down.
50 Ease of use and comfort
The rear head restraints can be removed. Folding the backrests The folding of the backrest is Removing a head restraint accompanied by a slight lowering of the 3 corresponding cushion. ► Pull the head restraint fully up. To obtain a flat surface, it is necessary to ► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint place the adjustable boot floor in the high and remove it completely. position. ► Store the head restraint. When the backrest is released, the red Refitting a head restraint indicator in the release grip is visible. ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides in the corresponding seat backrest. Folding from the passenger ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will compartment
go.
► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint and push it down. Each section of the backrest has two release Never drive with passengers seated at controls: the rear when the head restraints are – a grip 1 on the outer edge of the backrest, removed; the head restraints should be in – a lever 2 on the boot side trim. place and in the high position. Manoeuvring the seat backrests should only be done when the vehicle is The head restraint for the central stationary. seat and those for the side seats are not interchangeable. First steps:
► Lower the head restraints. ► Lift up the rear armrest. ► Press the backrest release grip 1. Rear bench seat ► If necessary, move the front seats forward. ► Guide the backrest 3 down to the horizontal ► Check that no person or object will interfere position.
with folding down the backrests (clothing, luggage, etc.). ► Check that the outer seat belts are lying flat
Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding on the backrests. backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. ► Check that the centre seat belt buckle is stored in its housing.
51 Ease of use and comfort
Folding from the boot ► Put the backrest 3 in the upright position and push it firmly to latch it home. ► Check that the red indicator is no longer visible in the release grip 1. ► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not trapped during the operation.
Please note: an incorrectly latched backrest compromises the safety of passengers in the event of sudden braking or an accident. The contents of the boot may be thrown forward - risk of serious injury!
► Pull the backrest release lever 2 towards you. The backrest 3 folds fully onto the cushion. Second row seats Repositioning the backrests
First check that the outer seat belts are
lying vertically flat alongside the backrest A. Longitudinal adjustment latching rings. B. Seat backrest angle adjustment and folding Seat adjustment C. Folding the backrest from behind and
The three second row seats are independent emergency exit for third row passengers and of the same width. Their backrests can be D. Access to third row seats folded to adapt the boot load space.
52 Ease of use and comfort
Longitudinal adjustment ► Lift control handle B1 and guide the backrest Before and while performing the backwards or forwards, raising yourself slightly operation on the seats, check that the 3 if needed. passengers, children in particular, keep their ► Release the handle and ensure the backrest hands and their feet far from the moving parts is properly locked on one of the positions offered. of the seats (hinges, slides, etc.) - risk of Central seat serious injury! ► Lift control strap B2 and guide the backrest backwards or forwards, raising yourself slightly Folding from the outside
if needed. ► Release the strap and ensure the backrest is properly locked on one of the positions offered.
Flat floor
► Raise control bar A and slide the seat forwards or backwards. ► Release the bar to lock the seat in position in one of the notches. Seat backrest angle adjustment
► Pull handle B1 or strap B2 until the backrest is fully folded. ► Release the control. ► Gently push the backrest forwards so that
the backrest tilts until it is folded onto the seat cushion. Folding the backrests ► Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the front seats are properly folded. ► Place the second row seats in the maximum rear position. Side seats
53 Ease of use and comfort
Folding from the boot ► Straighten the backrest until it locks. Before deploying the continuity panels, If this system fails (paddle D), the third
check that the 2nd row seats are pulled as row passengers can also get out after Before performing any operations on the far back as possible. having folded the backrest of the second row rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat seats using strap C. belts, check that the lateral seat belts are Do not let children operate the seats properly tensioned. The central seat belt must Accessing third row seats unsupervised. be stored in the headlining. The third row seats are accessed via the second row side seats.
Continuity panels Third row seats
When loading, for example, or from the third row The two third row seats are stored in a retracted seats: position in the bottom of the boot. Each one is ► Pull strap C to unlock the desired seat and covered with rigid concertina panels, secured to give the backrest a slight push forwards. the vehicle. Do not let children operate the seats Repositioning the seat
unsupervised. From the outside or from the third row seats:
► Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom of Each concertina panel can support a front seats are properly folded up. the backrest, which, once unfolded: maximum load of 100 kg with the third ► Pull paddle and guide the backrest – allows for a continuous loading surface in the D row seats folded away. forwards to tilt it and move the seat forwards. boot, whatever the position of the seats, With the third row seats removed and the To put the seat back in place: – prevents objects from sliding beneath the 2nd removable concertina panels supports ► Straighten the backrest until the seat locks. row seats. installed, the maximum load is limited to Whatever the initial position of the seat, it is The continuity panels are held against the 50 kg. placed automatically a third of the way along backrests with a magnetic fixing element. the longitudinal adjustment range in order to These continuity panels are not designed preserve enough space for passengers in the
to support a weight greater than 30 kg. ► Place the continuity panels of the 2nd row third row seats. seats back against the backrests.
54 Ease of use and comfort
If this system fails (paddle D), the third ► Pull one of the straps; the 3 parts of the row passengers can also get out after corresponding panel fold into concertina form. 3 having folded the backrest of the second row When the 3rd row seats are straightened, these seats using strap C. folded concertina panels can be left: Do not let children operate the seats – either flat behind the seats, unsupervised. – or in the vertical position, so allowing the seat well to be used for storage.
Third row seats Positioning the seats
When there is a seat at the back of the boot, the These operations are carried out from the boot removable support is fixed against the front wall sill.
of its housing.
If the seat is removed from the back of the boot The two third row seats are stored in a retracted for extra storage space, the removable support position in the bottom of the boot. Each one is must be installed on the two lugs on the central covered with rigid concertina panels, secured to wall. the vehicle.
Do not let children operate the seats Folding the concertina unsupervised. panels
Each concertina panel can support a maximum load of with the third 100 kg row seats folded away. ► Remove the load space cover roller. With the third row seats removed and the ► Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd row removable concertina panels supports seats. installed, the maximum load is limited to ► Fold back the concertina panels and 50 kg. straighten them vertically.
► Pull the black strap E, located behind the backrest. The backrest tilts backwards bringing the seat cushion with it; the seat locks in the open position.
55 Ease of use and comfort
The load space cover roller can be stored behind ► Put the concertina panels back above the the backrests of the 3rd row seats. folded seats. For more information on the Interior fittings, Before doing anything to the 3rd row and in particular the load space cover roller, refer seats, straighten the continuity panels of to the corresponding section. the 2nd row seats. Storing the seats Do not try to fold back a seat in the 3rd row
without having opened it until the backrest is
fully locked. Do not leave anything on or underneath the ► Lift the yellow lever G, located on the right- ► Once the rear part of the seat has been 3rd row seats when they are being folded. hand side, as far upwards as possible to unlock raised, take hold of each side of the seat Do not guide strap F when storing the seat - the seat. cushion, at the plastic covers, then bring the seat
your fingers may get jammed! towards you, keeping it at the same angle. Repositioning the seats Removing the seats These operations must be performed from the Removing the right-hand seat first is boot sill. recommended in order to facilitate access to the As long as the seat is not in the correct left-hand seat unlocking control.
position, it must be held with both hands ► Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd row by the sides, keeping it folded. seats. ► Put the head restraints in the low position. ► Check in advance that the seat storage well ► Check that the seat belts in the 3rd row are is empty and that the removable support is ► While keeping the yellow lever held at the properly secured against the front wall.
properly stored along the side trims without being folded or twisted. top, raise the rear part of the seat using the red strap F.
► Pull red strap F, located at the bottom of the backrest.
The seat is unlocked. The seat must be in the folded-away position. ► Push the backrest slightly forwards. These operations must be performed from the The backrest tilts and folds back on the cushion; boot sill. the folded seat is stored at the back of its ► Fold back the concertina panel. storage area.
56 Ease of use and comfort
► While holding it by the sides at the plastic Seat modularity
covers, tilt the seat forwards. 3 ► Place the hooks located at the front of the seat, both at the same time, onto the coloured
securing lugs on the right and left at the bottom of the seat well. Configuration examples
Check that the front hooks of the seat are
properly positioned on the two lugs. ► Once the rear part of the seat has been If they are not, you must remove the seat and raised, take hold of each side of the seat start the procedure again. cushion, at the plastic covers, then bring the seat
towards you, keeping it at the same angle. Repositioning the seats These operations must be performed from the
boot sill. 7 seats 5 seats Transport of As long as the seat is not in the correct objects position, it must be held with both hands by the sides, keeping it folded.
► Release the rear part of the seat which will ► Check in advance that the seat storage well lock in place under its own weight. is empty and that the removable support is The yellow lever folds automatically. properly secured against the front wall. G
If the seat is not perfectly horizontal, do not press on the backrest and do not try to unfold it - risk of damaging the
mechanism! Take out the seat and start the operation 6 seats 4 seats again. By folding the second row seats and retracting the third row seats, you obtain
57 Ease of use and comfort
a continuous storage floor through to the back Air distribution regulate the automatic air conditioning Servicing the ventilation and air
of the front seats. system. conditioning system By placing the front passenger seat in the ► Operate the air conditioning system for at ► Ensure that the passenger compartment table position, you obtain a continuous least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to filter is in good condition and have the filter storage floor through to the dashboard. keep it in perfect working order. elements replaced regularly. ► If the system does not produce cold air, We recommend using a composite passenger Operations on the seats must only be switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer compartment filter. Thanks to its special active done when the vehicle is stationary. or a qualified workshop. additive, this type of filter helps to purify the When towing the maximum load on a steep air breathed by the occupants and keep the gradient in high temperatures, switching off passenger compartment clean (by reducing the air conditioning increases the available allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and Heating and Ventilation engine power, enhancing the towing capacity. greasy deposits). 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents Air intake ► To ensure correct operation of the 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents Avoid driving for too long with the air conditioning system, have it checked The air circulating in the passenger compartment 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents ventilation off or with prolonged operation according to the recommendations in the is filtered and originates either from the 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and Maintenance and Warranty Guide. exterior, via the grille located at the base of the 5. Air outlets to the front footwells deterioration of the air quality! windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells mode. 7. Adjustable and closable air vents, with blower Stop & Start The heating and air conditioning systems Controls (depending on version) If the interior temperature is very high after the vehicle has stood for a long only operate when the engine is running. Depending on version, the controls are time in the sunshine, air the passenger Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start accessible in the "Air conditioning" touch Advice compartment for a few moments. system to maintain a comfortable temperature screen menu or are grouped together in the in the passenger compartment. Using the ventilation and air Put the air flow control at a setting high control panel on the centre console. For more information on the Stop & Start, conditioning system enough to quickly change the air in the refer to the corresponding section. ► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, passenger compartment. keep the external air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the Condensation created by the air air outlets and the air extractor in the boot conditioning results in a discharge of Manual air conditioning free from obstructions. water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly The air conditioning system only operates with ► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located normal. the engine running. on the dashboard; this sensor is used to
58 Ease of use and comfort
Servicing the ventilation and air If you keep pressing the "small fan" button until conditioning system all of the indicator lamps go off (system off), the 3 ► Ensure that the passenger compartment temperature is no longer controlled.
filter is in good condition and have the filter A slight flow of air can still be felt, due to the elements replaced regularly. 1. Temperature adjustment forward movement of the vehicle. We recommend using a composite passenger 2. Air flow adjustment compartment filter. Thanks to its special active 3. Air distribution adjustment Air conditioning on/off additive, this type of filter helps to purify the 4. Interior air recirculation The air conditioning system is designed to air breathed by the occupants and keep the 5. Air conditioning on/off operate effectively in all seasons, with the passenger compartment clean (by reducing windows closed. allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and Adjusting the temperature It is used to: greasy deposits). – lower the temperature in summer, ► Turn the knob 1 from blue (cold) to red (hot). ► To ensure correct operation of the – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in air conditioning system, have it checked winter, above 3°C. according to the recommendations in the Adjusting the air distribution ► Press button 5 to turn the air conditioning on/ Maintenance and Warranty Guide. Windscreen and side windows. off. When the system is activated, the indicator lamp Central and side air vents. Stop & Start of the button comes on. The heating and air conditioning systems Footwells. Air conditioning does not operate when only operate when the engine is running. the air flow is disabled. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start ► Press button 3 as many times as necessary To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior system to maintain a comfortable temperature to obtain the desired air distribution. air recirculation for a brief period. Then return in the passenger compartment. The air distribution can be adapted by combining to the intake of exterior air. For more information on the Stop & Start, the corresponding orange indicator lamps. Switching off the air conditioning may result in refer to the corresponding section. some discomfort (humidity or misting). Adjusting the air flow ► Press one of the buttons 2 “large fan” or Manual air conditioning “small fan” to increase or decrease the air flow. Mono-zone semi- The air conditioning system only operates with The corresponding orange indicator lamps come the engine running. on. automatic air conditioning The air conditioning system only operates with the engine running.
59 Ease of use and comfort
The temperature at the nozzles and vents Temperature adjustment Air conditioning on/off Automatic Visibility is regulated by the system according to the ► Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) The air conditioning system is designed to temperature in the passenger compartment and programme or decrease (blue) the value. operate effectively in all seasons, with the the temperature setting. For more information on button 8, refer to the The value displayed corresponds to a level of windows closed. Press the menu button to display “Front Demisting/Defrosting” section. Climate comfort and not to a precise temperature. It is used to: the system controls page. – lower the temperature in summer, Switching the system off Air flow adjustment – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in ► Press button 7; all the indicator lamps of the ► Press one of the buttons ( or ) to winter, above 3°C. 2 - + system go out. decrease or increase the speed of the air ► Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air This action deactivates all functions of the air booster fan. conditioning system. conditioning system. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in When the system is activated, the indicator lamp The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight progressively as the speed of the fan is of the button comes on. flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward increased. Air conditioning does not operate when movement of the vehicle. When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, the air flow is disabled. ventilation stops. To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. Dual-zone automatic air
air recirculation for a brief period. Then return to the intake of exterior air. conditioning Air distribution adjustment Switching off the air conditioning may result in This air conditioning system operates with ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow some discomfort (humidity or misting). distribution inside the passenger compartment. the engine running, but the ventilation and its
Windscreen and side windows controls are available with just the ignition on. 1. Temperature adjustment Maximum air conditioning Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the 2. Air flow adjustment Central and side air vents This function automatically adjusts the passenger compartment are automatic. 3. Air distribution adjustment temperature setting to the lowest possible, the Press the menu button to display 4. Interior air recirculation Footwells air distribution towards the central and side air Climate 5. Air conditioning on/off the system controls page. vents, the air flow to maximum and activates 6. Maximum air conditioning The lighting of the button indicates that air is interior air recirculation. 7. Switching the system off being blown in the specified direction. ► Press button 6 to activate / deactivate the 8. Automatic visibility programme It is possible to activate all three buttons function (the indicator lamp will come on/switch simultaneously, for uniform distribution off). throughout the passenger compartment. Once the function is deactivated, the system returns to the previous settings.
60 Ease of use and comfort
Automatic Visibility 8. Automatic visibility programme 3 programme 9. Automatic comfort programme on/off 10. Access to the secondary page For more information on button 8, refer to the 11. Selection of settings for the Automatic “Front Demisting/Defrosting” section. comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast) 12. "AQS (Air Quality System)" function (with Switching the system off pollution sensor) ► Press button ; all the indicator lamps of the 7 13. Mono-zone/Dual-zone system go out. 14. "REAR" function (depending on version)
This action deactivates all functions of the air conditioning system. The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight Temperature adjustment flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward The driver and front passenger can each choose movement of the vehicle. their own temperature setting. The value indicated corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a precise temperature. Dual-zone automatic air ► Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) conditioning or decrease (blue) the value. It is recommended that you avoid a difference of This air conditioning system operates with more than 3°C in the settings for left and right. the engine running, but the ventilation and its
controls are available with just the ignition on. Automatic Comfort Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the programme passenger compartment are automatic. This automatic mode ensures optimum Press the Climate menu button to display management of the passenger compartment Temperature adjustment the system controls page. 1. temperature, air flow and air distribution, based Air flow adjustment 2. on the selected comfort level. 3. Air distribution adjustment ► Press button 9 to activate or deactivate the Interior air recirculation 4. air conditioning system’s automatic mode . Air conditioning on/off 5. The indicator lamp in the button lights up Maximum air conditioning 6. when the air conditioning system is operating Switching the system off 7. automatically.
61 Ease of use and comfort
You can adjust the intensity of the Automatic Visibility – air distribution. Air conditioning on / off automatic Comfort programme by using the As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator The air conditioning is designed to operate " " button to select a profile: programme lamp in the " " button goes off. OPTIONS AUTO effectively in all seasons, with the windows – " ": provides soft and quiet operation by For more information on button 8, refer to the ► Press button again to reactivate the Soft 9 closed. limiting air flow. “Front Demisting/Defrosting” section. automatic comfort programme. It is used to: – " ": offers the best compromise Normal – lower the temperature in summer; between a comfortable temperature and quiet "Air Quality System" (AQS) Air flow adjustment – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in operation (default setting). ► Press one of the buttons ( or ) to function 2 - + winter, above 3°C. – "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. decrease or increase the speed of the air Using a pollution sensor, this function ► Press button 5 to activate / deactivate the air To change the current profile (shown by the booster fan. automatically activates recirculation of the conditioning system. corresponding indicator lamp), press button The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in 11 interior air once a certain level of polluting When the system is activated, the indicator lamp repeatedly until the desired profile is displayed: progressively as the speed of the fan is substances in the exterior air is detected. of the button comes on. The "Normal" or "Fast" profiles are the most When the air quality returns to a satisfactory increased. The air conditioning does not operate comfortable for passengers in the rear seats. level, recirculation of interior air is automatically When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, when the air flow is deactivated. This profile setting is associated with automatic deactivated. ventilation stops. To obtain cool air more quickly, use mode only. However, on deactivation of the This function is not designed to detect "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. recirculation of the interior air for a few AUTO mode, the indicator lamp for the most unpleasant odours. Adjusting the air distribution moments. Then return to the intake of exterior recently selected profile remains on. Recirculation is automatically activated when the air. Changing the profile setting does not reactivate windscreen wash is used or when reverse gear ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow Switching off the air conditioning may result in AUTO mode if it was deactivated. is engaged. distribution inside the passenger compartment. Windscreen and side windows. some discomfort (humidity, misting). In cold weather with the engine cold, the The function does not operate if the exterior air flow is increased gradually until the temperature is below 5 °C, to avoid the risk of Central and side air vents. comfort setting has been reached, in order to misting of the windscreen and side windows. Maximum air conditioning To activate or deactivate the function, go to the limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger This function automatically adjusts the secondary page by using the " " button, Footwells. compartment. OPTIONS temperature setting to the lowest possible, the On entering the vehicle, if the interior then press button 12. The lighting of the button indicates that air is air distribution towards the central and side air temperature is much colder or warmer than being blown in the specified direction. vents, the air flow to maximum and activates the comfort setting requested, there is no Manual control For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger interior air recirculation. need to alter the value displayed to more You can manually adjust one or more of these compartment, the three buttons can be activated ► Press button 6 to activate / deactivate the quickly reach the required level of comfort. functions, while retaining automatic control of the simultaneously. function (the indicator lamp will come on/switch The system automatically corrects the other functions by the system: In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three off). temperature difference as quickly as possible. – air flow, buttons 3 are off.
62 Ease of use and comfort
Air conditioning on / off Once the function is deactivated, the system air vents independently of the air conditioning air returns to the previous settings. flow control for the front air vents. 3 The air conditioning is designed to operate When the function is deactivated, the maximum effectively in all seasons, with the windows air flow distributed by the rear air vents is limited closed. Mono-zone / Dual-zone by the air conditioning air flow setting for the It is used to: The passenger temperature setting can be linked front air vents. – lower the temperature in summer; to the driver's setting (mono-zone function). The function is available on the secondary – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in It is available in the secondary page by pressing page, which can be accessed by pressing the winter, above 3°C. the "OPTIONS” button. “OPTIONS” button. ► Press button 5 to activate / deactivate the air ► Press button 13 to activate the "MONO" ► Press button to activate the " " conditioning system. function; its status is displayed as "ON". 14 REAR function; its status is displayed as " ". When the system is activated, the indicator lamp The function is automatically deactivated if the ON ► Press the “ ” or “ ” button to of the button comes on. passenger uses their temperature adjustment large fan small fan buttons (dual-zone function). increase or decrease the air flow. The air conditioning does not operate The corresponding indicator lamps come on. when the air flow is deactivated. “REAR” function If all of the indicator lamps are off, a slight air To obtain cool air more quickly, use flow can still be felt as a result of the vehicle's recirculation of the interior air for a few movement. moments. Then return to the intake of exterior
air. Ventilation with the ignition Switching off the air conditioning may result in on some discomfort (humidity, misting). When the ignition is switched on, you can use the ventilation system to adjust the air flow 2 Maximum air conditioning and air distribution 3 settings in the passenger This function automatically adjusts the compartment, for a period which depends on the temperature setting to the lowest possible, the battery charge. air distribution towards the central and side air This function does not allow the operation of the vents, the air flow to maximum and activates air conditioning system. interior air recirculation. Switching the system off ► Press button 6 to activate / deactivate the function (the indicator lamp will come on/switch When this function is activated, the rear air ► Press button 7; all the indicator lamps of the off). vents blower starts up. In this case, the rear system go out. passengers can control the air flow from these
63 Ease of use and comfort
This action deactivates all functions of the air ► Adjust the air distribution to the "Windscreen" With Stop & Start, when demisting has the accumulation of snow resulting from the conditioning system. position; its associated orange indicator lamp been activated, STOP mode is not operation of the windscreen wipers. The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight comes on. available. flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward ► Check that the recirculation of interior air is On/Off
movement of the vehicle. deactivated; its indicator lamp must be off. In wintry conditions, remove all snow or ► Switch on the air conditioning by pressing the ice on the windscreen near the camera "A/C" button; its orange indicator lamp comes before moving off. Interior air recirculation on. Otherwise, the operation of the equipment The intake of exterior air prevents the formation With Stop & Start, when these associated with the camera may be affected. of mist on the windscreen and side windows. functions - demisting, air conditioning Recirculating the interior air isolates the and air flow - are activated, STOP mode is passenger compartment from outside odours not available. and fumes and allows the desired passenger Heated windscreen ► With the engine running, press this button to compartment temperature to be achieved more activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an rapidly. With semi-automatic/ indicator lamp). ► Press this button to activate/deactivate automatic air conditioning The function is activated when the exterior the function (confirmed by the temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). Automatic Visibility programme automatically when the engine is switched off. The function is activated automatically This mode allows the windscreen and side when reverse gear is engaged. windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly Rear screen demisting/ as possible. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate defrosting Front demisting the mode (confirmed by the illumination/ Demisting/defrosting only operates with the - defrosting extinction of the indicator lamp). engine running. The programme automatically manages the air In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of Depending on version, this also applies to the conditioning (depending on version), air flow the windscreen, as well as the area alongside door mirrors. With manual air and air intake, and provides optimum distribution the left-hand windscreen pillar. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate conditioning towards the windscreen and side windows. Without changing the settings for the air the function (confirmed by the ► Adjust the temperature to maximum (red). It is possible to manually change the air flow conditioning system, it allows faster release illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). ► Adjust the air flow to maximum; all of the without deactivating the automatic Visibility of the windscreen wiper blades when they are Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically orange indicator lamps come on. programme. frozen to the windscreen and helps to prevent to prevent an excessive consumption of electrical current.
64 Ease of use and comfort
the accumulation of snow resulting from the Switch off demisting/defrosting as soon operation of the windscreen wipers. as you no longer consider it necessary, 3 as reducing the consumption of electrical
On/Off current reduces fuel consumption.
Thermal pre-conditioning
(Hybrid) This indicator lamp remains lit throughout the This function allows you to programme the pre-conditioning phase. vehicle to adjust the passenger compartment
temperature to a pre-defined, non-modifiable You can define multiple programmings. ► With the engine running, press this button to temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the Each one is saved in the system. activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an vehicle, on the days and times of your choice. To optimise battery life, we recommend indicator lamp). programming with the vehicle plugged in. The function is activated when the exterior Programming This feature can be programmed using a temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) smartphone, via the automatically when the engine is switched off. In the Climate > OPTIONS menu: application. Select Temperature conditioning. MyPeugeot With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, the programming can only be carried out using a Rear screen demisting/ ► Press + to programme. ► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and smartphone, via the application. defrosting For more information on the desired days. Press OK. Remotely operable Demisting/defrosting only operates with the , refer to the corresponding section. ► Press ON to activate this programming. features engine running. Pre-conditioning begins approximately 45 Depending on version, this also applies to the minutes before the programmed time, and is Operating conditions door mirrors. maintained for 10 minutes afterwards. – The function is only activated when the ► Press this button to activate/deactivate ignition is off and the vehicle locked. the function (confirmed by the – The function is not activated if the battery illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). charge level is below 50%. Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically – If recurrent programming is activated (e.g. to prevent an excessive consumption of from Monday to Friday) and two pre-conditioning electrical current.
65 Ease of use and comfort
sequences are performed without the vehicle 11. Front armrest with storage It houses the front passenger airbag deactivation USB socket being used, the programming will be deactivated. 12. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W) switch. 13. Storage compartment or Rear blower Never drive with the glove box open 14. 230 V/50 Hz socket when a passenger is at the front. It may Front fittings
cause injury during sharp deceleration! Sun visor ► With the ignition on, raise the concealing 12 V accessory socket
flap; depending on the version, the mirror is illuminated automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket It allows the connection of a portable device or a holder. USB memory stick. It reads audio files that are sent to your audio Glove box system and played via the vehicle's speakers. ► To open the glove box, raise the handle. These files can be managed using the steering- With the ignition on, the glove box is lit when mounted controls or those on the touch screen.
open. Depending on version, the ► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter. USB port located on the
centre console also allows a smartphone to be 1. Grab handle Observe the maximum power rating to connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto® or 2. Sun visor avoid damaging the accessory.. CarPlay®, so that certain smartphone 3. Card holder applications can be used on the touch screen. 4. Storage compartment below the steering The connection of an electrical device To achieve the best results, it is necessary to wheel not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a use a cable made or approved by the device 5. Illuminated glove box USB charger, may adversely affect the manufacturer. 6. Door pockets operation of vehicle electrical systems, These applications can be managed using the 7. USB socket / Front 12 V accessory socket causing faults such as poor radio reception or steering mounted controls or those of the audio (120 W) interference with displays in the screens. system. 8. Storage compartment or Wireless smartphone charger 9. Storage compartment
10. Cup holder
66 Ease of use and comfort
USB socket When the USB port is used, the portable – High fidelity woofer/mid-range speakers: device charges automatically. Polyglass technology delivering balance and 3 A message is displayed if the power drawn precise sound. by the portable device exceeds the current – TNF tweeters: inverted dome aluminium
supplied by the vehicle. technology giving optimum sound dispersion and
For more information on how to use this very detailed higher frequencies. equipment, refer to the Audio equipment – 12-way active amplification - 515 atts:W and telematics section . Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology providing breadth and finesse in the high frequency
® signals, as well as real power in the bass. It allows the connection of a portable device or a FOCAL Premium Hi-Fi – Subwoofer: 200 mm triple coil Power FlowerTM USB memory stick. system technology for defined and dynamic reproduction It reads audio files that are sent to your audio of lower frequencies. system and played via the vehicle's speakers. These files can be managed using the steering- Wireless smartphone mounted controls or those on the touch screen. charger Depending on version, the USB port located on the centre console also allows a smartphone to be connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto® or
CarPlay®, so that certain smartphone applications can be used on the touch screen. To achieve the best results, it is necessary to
use a cable made or approved by the device The vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity manufacturer. acoustic system from the French brand FOCAL®. These applications can be managed using the 10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL® It allows wireless charging of a portable device steering mounted controls or those of the audio technologies offer the pleasure of pure and such as a smartphone, using the magnetic system. detailed sound inside the vehicle: induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1 – Central speaker/satellite speakers: Polyglass standard. technology delivering sound immersion and The portable device to be charged must be spatialisation. compatible with the Qi standard, either by design or by using a compatible holder or shell. The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol.
67 Ease of use and comfort
The charger works with the engine running and Operating check If the problem persists, have the system checked A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air. with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. The state of the indicator lamp allows the by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Charging is managed by the smartphone. operation of the charger to be monitored. Closing With the Keyless Entry and Starting system, the Front armrest State of the Meaning charger’s operation may be briefly disrupted It includes a refrigerated storage space. when a door is opened or the ignition is switched indicator lamp off. Off Engine switched off. Opening No compatible devices Charging detected. ► With the charging area clear, place a device Charging finished. in its centre.
Fixed green Compatible device detected.
Charging. ► Replace the two parts of the cover. When the portable device is detected, the Flashing orange Foreign object detected in charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It the charging zone.
remains lit for the whole time that the battery is Mats Device not well centred in ► Press the lever beneath the cover. being charged. the charging zone. The cover opens in two parts. Fitting The system is not designed to charge Fixed orange Fault with the device's multiple devices simultaneously. battery meter. Storage
Device battery temperature too high. Charger malfunction.
Do not leave any metal objects (coins,
keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the If the indicator lamp is lit orange: charging area while a device is being – remove the device, then place it back in the charged, due to the risk of overheating or centre of the charging zone.
interrupting the charging process. or
– remove the device and try again in a quarter When fitting the mat for the first time, on the The small removable tray can be installed in of an hour. driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in front of or behind the storage space. the enclosed sachet.
68 Ease of use and comfort A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air. The other mats are simply laid over the carpet. 3 Closing Removing/Refitting ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the seat backwards and unclip the fixings. ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by pressing.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: – only use mats that are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, 3. Rear courtesy lamp – never fit one mat on top of another. 4. Rear map reading lamps The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT ► Replace the two parts of the cover. may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control/ Front and rear courtesy Mats speed limiter. lamps The approved mats have two fasteners In this position, the courtesy lamp comes Fitting located underneath the seat.
on gradually: – when the vehicle is unlocked. – when the key is removed from the ignition Courtesy lamps switch. – when a door is opened. – when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate the vehicle. It switches off gradually: – when the vehicle is locked. – when the ignition is switched on. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the 1. Front courtesy lamp driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in Permanent lighting. 2. Front map reading lamps the enclosed sachet.
69 Ease of use and comfort
In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time Rear fittings Connect only one device at a time to the The connection of an electrical device varies according to the circumstances: socket (do not use extension leads or not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a – With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes. multi-socket adapters). USB charger, may adversely affect the – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 230 V/50 Hz socket Connect only devices with class II insulation operation of vehicle electrical systems,
seconds. (shown on the device). causing faults such as poor radio reception or – With the engine running, unlimited. Do not use metal-cased devices (e.g. electric interference with displays in the screens. shaver, etc.). When the front courtesy lamp is in the "Permanent lighting" position, the rear Rear armrest courtesy lamp also comes on, unless it is in As a safety measure, if power the "Permanently off" position. consumption is high and power is To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it in required by the vehicle's electrical system
(due to severe weather conditions, electrical
the "Permanently off" position. overload, etc.), power to the socket may be cut off, in which case the green indicator lamp
Map reading lamps goes off. ► With the ignition on, operate the It is located at the back of the centre console corresponding switch. beneath a protective cover. This socket (max. power: 150 W) operates with 12 V accessory socket
Take care not to place anything in the engine running, and with the Stop & Start contact with the courtesy lamps. system in STOP mode. ► Lift the protective cover. ► Check that the green indicator lamp is on. Interior ambience lighting ► Connect your multimedia or other electrical The dimmed passenger compartment lighting device (telephone charger, laptop computer, improves visibility in the vehicle when the light CD-DVD player, bottle warmer, etc.). is poor. In the event of a malfunction, the At night, the ambience lighting automatically green indicator lamp flashes. The armrest incorporates two cup holders. comes on / switches off when the sidelamps are Have the socket checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
switched on / off. or a qualified workshop. Activation / deactivation and adjustment ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum of the light intensity are set via the power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. suitable adaptor.
70 Ease of use and comfort
The connection of an electrical device Ski flap "Aircraft" type tables not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a 3 USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio reception or
interference with displays in the screens. Mechanism for storing and transporting long objects. Rear armrest Opening ► Lower the rear armrest. ► Pull the flap handle downwards.
► To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in the low position. ► To store it, raise the table to the high position, passing the point of resistance.
On the passenger side, do not forget to fold it before placing the backrest in the "table" position. For more information on the Front seats, and
in particular placing the backrest in the "table" ► Lower the flap. position, refer to the corresponding section. ► Load the objects from inside the boot. The armrest incorporates two cup holders. Do not place hard or heavy objects on the table. They could become dangerous projectiles in the event of emergency braking or impact.
71 Ease of use and comfort
Side blinds 2. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W) 8. Concertina panels 3. Boot lamp 9. Stowing rings 4. Rear seat folding controls 5. Hooks The stowing rings are designed to secure
luggage using different types of retaining 6. Stowing rings Depending on version, the storage boxes are 7. Adjustable boot floor (2-position) nets. fitted in the floor, at the foot of the side seats on 8. Storage well/Tool box under the floor These retaining nets are available as an the second row. 9. Open storage compartments option or as an accessory. On the left-hand side, it may also contain the For more information, contact a PEUGEOT temporary puncture repair kit. dealer. ► To open them, lift the cover by the notch. For information on installing the High load retaining net, refer to the corresponding
Boot fittings section.
Load space cover shelf
Fitted to the second row windows, they protect
the passenger compartment from the sun's rays. ► Pull the central tab to unroll the blind.
► Position the blind's clip on the hook.
Always guide the blind slowly, using the tab, while raising or lowering it.
1. Load space cover roller Storage boxes 2. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W)
3. Boot lamp 4. Luggage retaining strap 5. Storage brackets of the load space cover
roller Armrest with cup holder and storage 6.
compartment It consists of two sections: 1. Load space cover shelf 7. Open storage compartment – a fixed section with an open storage space.
72 Ease of use and comfort
8. Concertina panels – a movable section which rises when the boot In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind is opened, with an open storage space. the second row seats, with the third row seats 3 Stowing rings 9. stored folded away. The stowing rings are designed to secure In the 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the luggage using different types of retaining third row seats. nets. In the event of sudden deceleration, These retaining nets are available as an objects placed on the load space cover option or as an accessory. roller can turn into projectiles. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer. For information on installing the High load Installation
retaining net, refer to the corresponding
section. To remove the load space cover shelf: Load space cover shelf ► Unhook the two cords.
► Raise the movable section slightly, then unclip it on each side. ► Unclip the fixed section on each side, then
take out the load space cover shelf. The load space cover shelf can be stowed under the boot floor.
In the event of sudden deceleration, objects placed on the load space cover ► Position the left-hand and right-hand ends of shelf can turn into projectiles. the load space cover roller in the cut-outs A, with the moving flap at the front. ► Unwind the roller until it reaches the boot Load space cover roller pillars. ► Insert the guides of the roller into the rails in pillars B.
It consists of two sections: – a fixed section with an open storage space.
73 Ease of use and comfort
Removal ► Position the load space cover roller in the This removable net allows the entire loading space located above the armrest, one side after volume up to the roof to be used: the other, tilting it slightly. – behind the front seats (1st row) when the rear ► Slide the load space cover roller as far as seats are folded down. possible, until it reaches the notches at the back – behind the rear seats (2nd row) when the load of the boot, with the two hinges facing down. space cover is removed. ► Unfold the third row seats. It protects the occupants in case of The folded concertina panels can be placed in sudden braking. the horizontal or upright position. To fold the third row seats with the load space cover roller stored at the back, it is necessary to raise the concertina panels in order to give
access to the seat unlocking controls (red ► Remove the roller guides from the rails in straps). pillars B. Behind the front seats ► Guide the roller as it reels in. (Depending on version)
High load retaining net
► Unlock the roller by pressing one of the
handles located at the ends of the roller bracket.
rd
Storage behind the 3 row seats
► Fold down the rear seats. ► Remove the trim covers on each side, located in the upper section in the roof.
► Make sure that the third row seats are folded. ► Position the net's upper hooks in the roof.
► Fold the first two concertina panels.
74 Ease of use and comfort
This removable net allows the entire loading ► Attach the net’s straps to the lower anchorage Behind the front seats volume up to the roof to be used: points, located directly below the fixings of the 3 – behind the front seats (1st row) when the rear rear bench seat cushion. seats are folded down. ► Pull on the straps to stretch the net. – behind the rear seats (2nd row) when the load Once fitted, the net does not prevent space cover is removed. tipping of the rear backrests. It protects the occupants in case of sudden braking. Behind the rear seats
Behind the front seats ► Fold down the rear seats. ► Insert the ends of the bar, one after the other, (Depending on version)
into the fixing points in the roof. ► Remove the caps from the Top Tether fixings. ► Attach the net’s straps to the lower anchorage points, located in the housing of the Top Tether fixings.
► Pull on the straps to stretch the net. ► Remove the load space cover. ► Remove the trim covers on each side, located in the upper section in the roof. ► Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. ► Attach the straps of the net to the lower rings, located on each side trim of the boot.
► Pull on the straps to stretch the net. ► Fold down the rear seats. ► Remove the trim covers on each side, located in the upper section in the roof.
► Position the net's upper hooks in the roof.
75 Ease of use and comfort
Behind the rear seats On certain versions, the adjustable boot 12 V accessory socket floor cannot be fitted in the low position. ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum To change the height: power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a ► Lift and pull the floor towards you using its suitable adaptor. central handle, then use the lateral stops to ► Switch on the ignition. move it. The connection of an electrical device ► Push the floor all the way forwards to place it not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a in the desired position. USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.
► Remove the load space cover roller. ► Insert the ends of the bar, one after the other, Boot lamp into the fixing points in the roof. It comes on automatically when the boot is ► Attach the straps of the net to the lower rings, opened and goes off automatically when the located on each side trim of the boot. boot is closed. ► Pull on the straps to stretch the net. The lighting time varies according to the circumstances:
2-position boot floor – When the ignition is off, approximately 10
To keep it in the inclined position:
► From the high position, lift the floor towards minutes. the load space cover. ► Fully raise the boot floor to access the – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 seconds. ► Take it past the retractable stops, then rest storage well. This two-position floor allows the boot volume to the floor on these stops. Depending on version, it includes: – With the engine running, unlimited. be optimised using the lateral stops located on – A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool the sides: Storage well kit. – High position (100 kg max.): to obtain a flat – A spare wheel with the tool kit. floor up to the front seats, when the rear seats – The battery charging cable (Hybrid). are folded down. The load space cover can also be stowed here.
– Low position (150 kg max.): maximum boot volume.
76 Ease of use and comfort 12 V accessory socket 3 ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a suitable adaptor. ► Switch on the ignition.
The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.
Boot lamp It comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed. The lighting time varies according to the circumstances: – When the ignition is off, approximately 10 minutes. – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 seconds. – With the engine running, unlimited.
77 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp dipping Front foglamps/Rear only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may
Exterior lighting control vary depending on country). stalk foglamps Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when They operate with the sidelamps, dipped they are no longer necessary. or main beam headlamps on.
Main lighting
Switching off of the lamps when the ► Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and ignition is switched off main beam headlamps. When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped Displays beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp lighting is activated. ► Rotate the ring forwards: in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting • once to switch on the front foglamps, selected is on. Switching on the lamps after • a second time to switch on the rear A fault with a lamp is signalled by the switching off the ignition foglamps. permanent illumination of this warning If the driver's door is opened, a temporary Lamps off (ignition off) / ► Rotate the ring backwards: lamp, accompanied by the display of a message audible signal warns the driver that the lamps Daytime running lamps (engine running) • once to switch off the rear foglamps, and an audible signal. are on. Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime • a second time to switch off the front running lamps foglamps. Rear foglamps In some weather conditions (e.g. low Sidelamps only If the lighting is switched off automatically (with They only work if the dipped or main temperature or humidity), misting on the AUTO model) or the dipped beam headlamps beam headlamps are on. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Dipped or main beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear sidelamps remain on. after the lamps have been on for a few ► Rotate the ring backwards to switch the "Highway function" minutes. With "Full LED" technology headlamps, foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off. the range of the dipped beam headlamps is Switching on the foglamps is prohibited Never look too closely at the luminous automatically increased once the speed of the in clear weather or in rain, both day and beam of Full LED headlamps: risk of vehicle is above 68 mph (110 km/h). ► Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on night. In these situations, the power of their serious eye injury! and backwards to switch them off. beams may dazzle other drivers. They must When the lighting is switched off automatically Travelling abroad (version with AUTO lighting), the foglamp and Vehicles equipped with halogen the dipped beam headlamps will remain on. headlamps:
78 Lighting and visibility only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may If planning to use your vehicle in a country ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control vary depending on country). that drives on the other side of the road, the stalk, beyond the point of resistance. 4 Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when headlamp dipped beams must be adjusted to If you forget to cancel the direction they are no longer necessary. avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a indicators for more than 20 seconds, the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. volume of the audible signal will increase if Switching off of the lamps when the the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h). ignition is switched off Daytime running lamps / When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped Sidelamps Three flashes beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home These LED lamps at the front and rear of the ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without lighting is activated. vehicle light up automatically when the engine going beyond the point of resistance; the starts. direction indicators will flash 3 times. Switching on the lamps after They perform the following functions: With the LED direction indicators, the lighting of switching off the ignition – Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk these LEDs is scrolling. If the driver's door is opened, a temporary at position "0" or "AUTO" with adequate ambient The brightness of the daytime running lamps is audible signal warns the driver that the lamps light). reduced when the direction indicators are on. are on. – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position "AUTO" with low ambient light or "Sidelamps Parking lamps only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). In some weather conditions (e.g. low Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps temperature or humidity), misting on the on the traffic side only. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Direction indicators ► Depending on version, within one minute and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear of switching off the ignition, move the lighting after the lamps have been on for a few control stalk up or down, depending which side minutes. the traffic is on (for example, when parking on the left, moving the lighting control stalk upwards turns on the right-hand sidelamps). Never look too closely at the luminous This is confirmed by an audible signal and the beam of Full LED headlamps: risk of lighting of the corresponding direction indicator serious eye injury! lamp on the instrument panel. ► To switch off the parking lamps, return the Travelling abroad lighting control stalk to the central position. Vehicles equipped with halogen headlamps:
79 Lighting and visibility Headlamp beam height Automatic illumination of Guide-me-home and
adjustment headlamps welcome lighting 0 (Initial setting) When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and Driver only or driver + front passenger Manual adjustment of the a low level of ambient light is detected by Guide-me-home lighting 1 Driver only or driver + front passenger + row 3 the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate halogen headlamps 2 7 people Automatic lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps 3 7 people + load in the boot are switched on automatically, without any action With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the 4 Not used on the part of the driver. They can also come on light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come 5 Driver only + load in the boot if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic on automatically when the ignition is switched 6 Not used operation of the windscreen wipers. off. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient You can activate/deactivate this Automatic adjustment of level or after the windscreen wipers are switched function and adjust the guide-me- off, the lamps are switched off automatically. home lighting duration in the vehicle the Full LED technology configuration menu.
To avoid dazzling other road users, the height headlamps Malfunction Manual of these headlamp beams should be adjusted This system automatically adjusts the height of In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ according to the load in the vehicle. the headlamp beams according to the load in the sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lighting
vehicle. comes on and this warning lamp is displayed in In the event of a malfunction, this warning the instrument panel, accompanied by an lamp comes on on the instrument panel,
audible signal and/or the display of a message. accompanied by the display of a message and 0 (Initial setting) Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified an audible signal. Driver only or driver + front passenger workshop. The system then places the headlamp beams in 1 5 people the lowest position. Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor 2 Not used Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT located at the top centre of the 3 5 people + load in the boot ► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control dealer or a qualified workshop. windscreen behind the interior rear view 4 Not used mirror; the associated functions would no stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/ 5 Driver only + load in the boot Do not touch the "Full LED" technology longer be controlled. deactivate the function. 6 Not used headlamps - risk of electrocution! Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
automatically after a period of time. In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically.
80 Lighting and visibility
Guide-me-home and For versions without "Automatic illumination Whatever the position of the front courtesy lamp of lamps", the manual guide-me-home lighting switch, they also come on with the welcome 4 welcome lighting switches off automatically after 30 seconds. lighting and guide-me-home lighting functions. For versions with "Automatic illumination of They go off automatically after 30 seconds. Guide-me-home lighting lamps", the period of operation of the manual guide-me-home lighting is the same as that set Automatic for the automatic guide-me-home lighting. Automatic headlamp With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the dipping light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come Welcome lighting When the ring is in the "AUTO” position, this on automatically when the ignition is switched When the vehicle is unlocked in low light system automatically switches between dipped off. conditions and the "Automatic illumination of and main beam headlamps according to the You can activate/deactivate this headlamps" function is activated, this system lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera function and adjust the guide-me- automatically switches on: located at the top of the windscreen. home lighting duration in the vehicle – On the outside, sidelamps, dipped beam configuration menu. headlamps and door mirror spotlamps. Manual – Inside, courtesy lamps and footwell lighting.
Activation / deactivation and adjustment of the duration of the welcome lighting are set via the vehicle configuration menu. Door mirror spotlamps These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle by lighting the ground near the front doors.
When the front courtesy lamp switch is in
► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control this position, the spotlamps come on This system is a driving aid. stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/ automatically: The driver remains responsible for deactivate the function. – when the vehicle is unlocked. the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off – when a door is opened. prevailing conditions of light, visibility and automatically after a period of time. – when a request to locate the vehicle is traffic, and for observation of driving and received from the remote control. vehicle regulations.
81 Lighting and visibility
The system becomes operational when Pause Clean the windscreen regularly, the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). particularly the area in front of the If the situation requires a change of headlamp When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), camera. beam, the driver can take over at any time. the function is no longer operational. The internal surface of the windscreen can ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: also become misted around the camera. • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator In humid and cold weather, demist the lamps were on, the system changes to main Activation/Deactivation windscreen regularly. beam, It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch Do not allow snow to accumulate on the • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator screen menu. bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could lamps were on, the system changes to Without/With cornering lighting The state of the system stays in the memory obstruct the detection camera. dipped beam. when switching off the ignition. To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps Activation / Deactivation Operation again. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch Cornering lighting screen menu.
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the The system may be disrupted or not work traffic conditions do not allow the main beam correctly: Switching on / off headlamps to be lit: – When visibility conditions are poor This system starts: – The dipped beam headlamps (snowfall, heavy rain, etc.). – when the corresponding direction indicator is remain lit. These indicator lamps – If the windscreen in front of the camera is switched on. come on on the instrument panel. dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a or If the ambient light level is very low and traffic sticker). – from a certain angle of rotation of the steering conditions permit: – If the vehicle is facing highly reflective wheel. – The main beam headlamps signs. It becomes inactive: come on automatically. These When the system detects thick fog, it – below a certain angle of rotation of the indicator lamps come on on the instrument temporarily deactivates the function. steering wheel.
panel. The system is not able to detect: – above 25 mph (40 km/h). The function is deactivated if the fog lamps are – Road users that do not have their own (Only on versions equipped with Full LED – when reverse gear is engaged. switched on or the system detects dense fog. lighting, such as pedestrians. technology headlamps) When the fog lamps are switched off or the – Vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for This system makes use of the beam from a front vehicle leaves the area of dense fog, the function example, vehicles driving behind a safety foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when Wiper control stalk is automatically reactivated. barrier on a motorway). the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and This indicator lamp goes out when the – Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or function is deactivated. slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. (urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking frost present on the windscreen, around manoeuvres).
82 Lighting and visibility
the wiper arms and blades and on the Fast wiping (heavy rain) windscreen seal, before operating the wipers. 4 Normal wiping (moderate rain) Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold Intermittent wiping (proportional to the conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are vehicle’s speed) not stuck to the windscreen before operating Off
the wipers. Without/With cornering lighting After switching off the ignition, a slight Activation / Deactivation Without AUTO wiping movement of the windscreen wipers to store them under the bonnet may occur. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. If the ignition has been switched off with
Switching on / off the windscreen wiper active, it is necessary to operate the control stalk to This system starts: reactivate the wiping when the ignition is – when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on (unless the ignition is off for less switched on. than 1 minute). or – from a certain angle of rotation of the steering Automatic wiping (proportional to the wheel. rainfall). It becomes inactive: With AUTO wiping Refer to the corresponding section. – below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. Single wipe – above 25 mph (40 km/h). ► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. – when reverse gear is engaged.
Wiper control stalk Windscreen wipers In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the frost present on the windscreen, around stalk to the desired position.
83 Lighting and visibility
Front screenwash To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do In the event of accumulation of snow or not operate the screenwash if the hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to screenwash reservoir is empty. a towing device, deactivate the automatic rear Only operate the screenwash if there is no wiper via the vehicle configuration menu. risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. During the winter period, use "very cold climate" rated products. Rear screenwash Never top up with water. ► Turn the ring all the way towards the dashboard and hold. The screenwash and the wiper operate for as Rear wiper long as the ring remains turned. A final wiping cycle is performed when
screenwashing ends. ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and hold. Special position of the The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate
windscreen wipers for as long as the control stalk is pulled. ► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with This maintenance position is used while cleaning Termination of the screenwash is followed by a the marking. or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be final wiping cycle. Off useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the wiper The front screenwash jets are integrated blades from the windscreen. in the tips of each arm. Intermittent wipe To maintain the effectiveness of the flat The screenwash fluid is sprayed along the wiper blades, it is advisable to: length of the wiper blade. This improves Wash-wipe – handle them with care. visibility and reduces the consumption of – clean them regularly using soapy water. screenwash fluid. – avoid using them to hold cardboard on the In some cases, depending on the contents Reverse gear windscreen. or colour of the fluid and on the exterior When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper – replace them at the first signs of wear. brightness, the liquid spray may be hardly will come into operation automatically if the front noticeable. windscreen wipers are operating. This function is set via the vehicle configuration menu.
84 Lighting and visibility
Before removing a windscreen wiper blade Changing a wiper blade ► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you and remove it. 4 Removing/refitting at the front ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm. ► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper blade. ► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, once again hold each arm by the rigid section, then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.
Removing/refitting at the rear ► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. ► Operating the wiper control stalk within one ► Clean the rear screen using screenwash minute after switching off the ignition will place fluid. the wiper blades in a vertical position. ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. ► Proceed with the desired operation or replace operations from the driver's side. ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the the wiper blades. ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from arm. After refitting a windscreen wiper blade you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, it as far as possible. ► To return the wiper blades to their initial then guide it carefully onto the rear screen. position, switch on the ignition and operate the Take care not to hold the arms at the jet wiper control stalk. locations. Automatic windscreen Do not touch the wiper blades. Risk of irreparable deformation. wipers Do not release them while moving them. Risk In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate of damaging the windscreen! automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. If rain is detected, the wiping adapts to ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash the intensity of the rainfall automatically. fluid. Detection of rainfall is by means of a rain/ Do not apply "Rain X" type water- sunshine sensor at the top centre of the repellent products. windscreen, behind the rear view mirror.
85 Lighting and visibility
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. If the ignition has been off for more than When using an automatic car wash, one minute, the automatic wipers must switch off the automatic wipers and the be reactivated by pushing the control stalk ignition. downwards. In winter, wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wipers. Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Switching on Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
► Give a short downwards push to the control stalk. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted. This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message. Switching off ► Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.
86 Safety
General safety PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, Hazard warning lamps
equipped with the special tools required (risk 5 recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not include safety warnings as well as followed. identification information for the vehicle. – Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty.
of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Installation of accessory radio ► Pressing the red button causes all the communication transmitters direction indicators to flash. Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication They can operate with the ignition off. certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for Automatic operation of warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can hazard warning lamps spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial When braking in an emergency, depending on flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic lamps come on automatically. They switch off Installing electrical accessories: Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). automatically when you next accelerate. – The fitting of electrical equipment or They can be turned off by pressing the button accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may Declarations of conformity for radio again. cause excessive current consumption and equipment faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/ for information on the range of approved website. accessories. – As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
87 Safety
Horn Emergency or assistance If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made call automatically, independently of the deployment of any airbags.
‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that
can be accessed free of charge.
System operation – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
out: the system is operating correctly. ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. Peugeot Connect SOS – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system (PE112) malfunction – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) emergency battery. than 2 seconds. This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle is In the latter two cases, emergency and The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice approaching, when driving in ELECTRIC mode assistance call services may not work. message confirm that the call has been made to (100% electric driving). Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon the emergency services*. The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle as possible. ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph your vehicle and puts you in contact with the The system fault does not prevent the (30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. appropriate emergency services**. vehicle from being driven. Malfunction ► Pressing again immediately cancels the In the event of a malfunction, this warning request. Data processing lamp comes on on the instrument panel. The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle All processing of personal information by Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified data is sent, and then remains lit when the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112) workshop to have the system checked. communication is established. complies with the framework for protection
* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
88 Safety
of personal information established by a call is made. The system is not traceable Peugeot Connect Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive and is not continuously monitored in its 5 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament normal operating mode. Assistance and the Council, and in particular, seeks to The data in the system's internal memory is ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 protect the vital interests of the data subject, automatically and continuously erased. Only for more than 2 seconds to request assistance in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of the vehicle’s three most recent locations are (confirmed by a voice message*). Regulation 2016/679. stored. ► Pressing again immediately cancels the Personal information processing is strictly When an emergency call is triggered, the data request. limited to the management of the "Peugeot log is stored for no more than 13 hours. Privacy mode allows you to manage the Connect SOS" system used with the “112” level of sharing (data and/or position) European single emergency call number. Access to data between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able You have the right to access the data brand. to collect and process only the following and, if necessary, submit a request to It can be configured in the Settings menu on data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, rectify, erase or restrict the processing of the touch screen. type (passenger vehicle or light commercial any personal information not processed in By default, depending on equipment, vehicle), fuel type or power source, most accordance with the provisions of Regulation deactivate/reactivate geolocation by recent three locations and direction of travel, 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then and a timestamped log file recording the has been communicated shall be notified of press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" automatic activation of the system. any rectification, erasure or restriction carried button to confirm. The recipients of the processed data are the out in accordance with the aforementioned emergency call handling centres designated Directive, unless doing so would be If you purchased your vehicle outside the by the relevant national authorities in the impossible or require a disproportionate effort. PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you territory in which they are located, enabling You also have the right to lodge a complaint to have a dealer check the configuration of priority reception and handling of calls to the with the relevant data protection authority. these services and, if desired, modify them to “112” emergency number. suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, configuration is possible in the official national Data storage language of your choice. Data contained in the system’s memory is not accessible from outside the system until
* According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
89 Safety
For technical reasons, in particular to Anti-lock braking system When changing wheels (tyres and rims), The use of snow tyres is strongly improve the quality of telematic services ensure that these are approved for your recommended on surfaces offering low for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the (ABS) and Electronic brake vehicle. levels of grip. right to carry out updates to the vehicle's force distribution (EBFD) on-board telematic system at any time. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability After an impact, have these systems Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and handling during braking, and enable greater checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect control while cornering, particularly on poor or qualified workshop. / Dynamic stability control Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance slippery road surfaces. (DSC) Pack included, there are additional services ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using available to you in your personal space, via emergency braking. Emergency braking engine braking and by applying the brakes on the website for your country. EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by assistance (EBA) the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It For information about the SOS and wheel. In an emergency, this system enables you also enhances the vehicle's directional stability Assistance Pack, please refer to the general This warning lamp comes on fixed in the to reach the optimum braking pressure more while accelerating. conditions for these services. event of an ABS malfunction. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping If there is a difference between the vehicle’s The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive distance. trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the carefully at a moderate speed. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which dynamic stability control system automatically Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Electronic stability control the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a uses engine braking and the brakes on one or workshop as soon as possible. reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired (ESC) This warning lamp, when lit together with increase in braking efficiency. path, within the limits of the laws of physics. the and ABS warning lamps, The electronic stability control programme STOP These systems are activated automatically every accompanied by a message and an audible includes the following systems: Intelligent traction control time the vehicle is started. signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic system They come into operation in the event of a grip brake force distribution (EBFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Depending on version, the vehicle has a system or trajectory problem. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified to help with driving on snow: This warning lamp on the instrument – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). workshop. intelligent traction . panel flashes to indicate that they are – Dynamic stability control (DSC). control The normal operation of the ABS may This system detects situations of poor surface operating. – Trailer stability assist (TSA). result in slight vibrations in the brake grip that could make it difficult to move off Deactivation / Reactivation pedal. or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow. In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck When braking in an emergency, press In these situations, the system limits the amount in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, very firmly and maintain this pressure. of wheel spin to provide the best traction and etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR trajectory control for the vehicle.
90 Safety
The use of snow tyres is strongly system to freely spin the wheels and regain recommendations relating to the wheels recommended on surfaces offering low traction. (tyres and rims), braking and electronic 5 levels of grip. Reactivate the system as soon as the level of components, as well as the assembly and grip permits. repair procedures used by PEUGEOT It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch dealers. Anti-slip regulation (ASR) screen menu. The use of snow tyres is recommended, to / Dynamic stability control Deactivation is confirmed by the ensure that these systems remain effective (DSC) illumination of this indicator lamp in the in winter conditions. All four wheels must be instrument panel and the display of a message. fitted with tyres approved for the vehicle. Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using The ASR system is reactivated automatically engine braking and by applying the brakes on every time the ignition is switched back on or the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It from 31 mph (50 km/h). Trailer stability assist (TSA) also enhances the vehicle's directional stability Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). When towing, this system reduces the risk of the while accelerating. vehicle or trailer snaking. If there is a difference between the vehicle’s Malfunction trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the In the event of a system malfunction, this Operation dynamic stability control system automatically warning lamp comes on, accompanied by The system is activated automatically when the uses engine braking and the brakes on one or an onscreen message and audible signal. ignition is switched on. more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic stability control system (ESC) path, within the limits of the laws of physics. workshop to have the systems checked. must not have any faults. These systems are activated automatically every Between 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if time the vehicle is started. ASR / DSC the system detects oscillations (snaking) in the They come into operation in the event of a grip These systems enhance safety during movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to or trajectory problem. normal driving, but should not encourage stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces This warning lamp on the instrument the driver to take extra risks or drive at high engine power to slow down the vehicle. panel flashes to indicate that they are speed. This warning lamp flashes in the operating. It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, instrument panel and the brake lamps ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It light up to draw attention to this corrective action. Deactivation / Reactivation is therefore important for your safety to keep For information on towed loads and masses, In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck these systems activated in all conditions, and refer to the Technical data section or your in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, particularly in difficult conditions. vehicle’s registration certificate etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR Correct operation of these systems depends on compliance with the manufacturer's
91 Safety
To ensure complete safety while driving with Advanced Grip Control Operating modes regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the a Towing device, refer to the corresponding most grip is controlled in such a way as to section. (Depending on version) transmit as much torque as possible. A special, patented traction control system, When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
Malfunction which improves driveability on snow, mud and to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes sand. as possible. on in the instrument panel, accompanied This system, optimised for operation in a range (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h)) by a message and an audible signal. of conditions, enables you to manoeuvre in most If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce slippery conditions (encountered during normal Sand your speed and drive carefully! passenger car use). This mode allows little spin on the two Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified This system, which can be combined with all- driving wheels at the same time to allow workshop to have the system checked. season M+S (Mud and Snow) tyres, offers a the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of compromise between safety, grip and driveability. getting stuck in the sand. The trailer stability assist system offers The accelerator pedal should be pressed (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) enhanced safety in normal driving, sufficiently to allow the system to harness the provided that the recommendations on towing power of the engine. Operation at high engine Standard (ESC) Do not use the other modes on sand as a trailer are observed. It should not speeds is completely normal. This mode is calibrated for a low level of the vehicle may become stuck. encourage the driver to take risks, such as A five-position selector knob allows you to wheel spin, based on the different levels towing a trailer in adverse operating choose the setting best suited to the driving of grip normally encountered on the road. You can deactivate the ASR and conditions (overloading, failure to observe the conditions encountered. DSC systems by turning the knob Whenever the ignition is switched off, the trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated An indicator lamp associated with each mode to the "OFF" position. system automatically resets to this mode. tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive comes on, accompanied by the display of a The ASR and DSC systems will no longer at excessive speeds. message to confirm your choice. act on the operation of the engine or of the In certain cases, the system may not detect Snow brakes in the event of a change of trajectory. trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. This mode adapts its strategy to the These systems are reactivated automatically When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the conditions of grip encountered for each of from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the system may not be able to prevent sudden the two front wheels on moving off. ignition is switched on. trailer snaking. (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h)) Recommendations All terrain (mud, damp grass, etc.) The vehicle is designed principally to This mode, when moving off, allows drive on tarmac roads, but it allows you to considerable spin on the wheel with the occasionally drive on other less passable least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to terrain.
92 Safety regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the However, it does not permit off-road driving When the system is regulating, the Active most grip is controlled in such a way as to such as: Safety Brake system is automatically 5 transmit as much torque as possible. – driving on terrain which could damage the deactivated. When moving, the system optimises wheel spin underbody or strip away components (fuel to respond to the driver's requirements as fully pipe, fuel cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or The system is not available: as possible. stones in particular, – if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h)) – driving on terrain with steep gradients and mph (70 km/h), poor grip, – if the speed of the vehicle is being Sand – crossing a waterway. controlled by the Adaptive Cruise Control, This mode allows little spin on the two depending on the type of gearbox. driving wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of Hill Assist Descent getting stuck in the sand. Switching on (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) Control By default, the system is not selected. System that provides assistance when The state of the function is not saved when the Do not use the other modes on sand as descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel, ignition is switched off. the vehicle may become stuck. mud, etc.) or a steep gradient. The driver can select the system when the This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of engine is running, when the vehicle is stationary You can deactivate the ASR and control of the vehicle when descending, whether or when moving at speeds up to approximately DSC systems by turning the knob going forward or in reverse. 31 mph (50 km/h). to the " " position. OFF During a descent, it assists the driver in The ASR and DSC systems will no longer maintaining a constant speed, depending on the act on the operation of the engine or of the gear engaged, while progressively releasing the
brakes in the event of a change of trajectory. brakes. These systems are reactivated automatically from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the For the system to activate, the slope ignition is switched on. must be greater than 5 %. The system can be used with the gearbox in
Recommendations neutral. The vehicle is designed principally to Otherwise engage a gear corresponding to ► To select the system, at speeds below drive on tarmac roads, but it allows you to the speed to prevent the engine stalling. 31 mph (50 km/h), press this button until occasionally drive on other less passable With an automatic gearbox, the system can its green indicator lamp comes on; this lamp terrain. be used with the selector at N, D or R. appears in grey in the instrument panel.
93 Safety
► The system becomes active at speeds Off Depending on the severity of the impact, the Fastening below 19 mph (30 km/h); this lamp comes pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly ► Press the button until its indicator lamp goes ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the on in green in the instrument panel. tightens the seat belts against the body of the off; the indicator lamp on the instrument panel buckle. ► When the vehicle begins its descent, you can occupants. also goes off. ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly release the accelerator and brake pedals; the The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are At speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system by pulling on the strap. system regulates the speed: enabled when the ignition is on. is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in – if the gearbox is in first or second gear, the button goes off. Force limiter Unfastening the speed decreases and the This system reduces the pressure of the seat ► Press the red button on the buckle. indicator lamp flashes rapidly, Malfunction belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. – if the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch pedal their protection. If a fault occurs with the system, this is depressed, the speed decreases and the Height adjustment
warning lamp comes on in green, In the event of an impact indicator lamp flashes slowly; in this case, the accompanied by the display of a message in the Depending on the nature and maintained descent speed is lower. instrument panel. seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT pretensioner device may trigger before release the accelerator and brake pedals, the dealer or a qualified workshop. and independently of airbag deployment. system will release the brakes to set the vehicle Deployment of the pretensioners is gradually in motion. accompanied by a slight discharge of The brake lamps light up automatically when the Seat belts harmless smoke and a noise, due to the system is regulating. Inertia reel activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel incorporated in the system. regulation is paused automatically, the which allows the strap length to automatically In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes indicator lamp goes back to grey in the adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its on.
instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in storage automatically when it is not used. Following an impact, have the seat belt the button remains on. ► To adjust the height of the anchorage point, The inertia reels are fitted with a device which system checked, and if necessary replaced, Regulation resumes automatically when the squeeze control A and slide it to the notch automatically locks the strap in the event of a by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the desired. collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls workshop. slope and pedal release conditions are met. over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Rear seat belts again at any time. Pyrotechnic pretensioning Front seat belts This system improves safety in the event of a The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
frontal or side impact. pretensioning system and force limiter.
94 Safety
Fastening ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the 5 buckle. ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling on the strap.
Unfastening ► Press the red button on the buckle. ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
Height adjustment Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt Before performing any operations on the with inertia reel. rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic belts, check that: pretensioning and force limiting system. – the outer seat belts are properly tensioned. For the centre seat, the buckle is held – the central seat belt is completely reeled in. horizontally by an elastic strap if the centre seat belt is not being used. Rear second row central Rear second row seat belts seat belt
► To adjust the height of the anchorage point, Each of the rear second row seats is fitted with a squeeze control A and slide it to the notch The seat belt for the rear central seat is built into three-point selt belt with an inertia reel. desired. the roof. The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and force limiting system.
Rear seat belts
95 Safety
Installation Installation Not fastened at the rear
► Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the When the ignition is switched on, with the engine buckle. running or the vehicle moving at a speed below
► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp and the
by pulling the strap. corresponding indicator lamps light up for around thirty seconds, if one or more rear seat belts are Removal and storage not fastened.
Unfastened Not fastened / unfastened warning lamp After the ignition is switched on, the warning It comes on in red in both the instrument panel lamp and the corresponding indicator lamps light and the front passenger airbag and seat belts up if the driver and/or one or more passengers
warning lamps display, once the system detects unfasten their seat belts. ► Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the that a seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened. At a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h), these right-hand buckle. Seat belts not fastened / unfastened warning lamps flash, accompanied by an audible ► Insert tongue B into the left-hand buckle. identification warning lamp signal for approximately two minutes. After this ► Check that each buckle is fastened correctly The red indicator lamps on the display indicate time, these warning lamps remain on as long as by pulling the strap. the location of the seat belts which are not the seatbelts are not refastened. fastened or unfastened. Removal and storage ► Press the red button on the buckle. Advice ► Guide the seat belt as it reels in. Not fastened at the front ► Press the red button on buckle B, then the ► Flatten the seat belt strap against the boot When the ignition is switched on, the warning The driver must ensure that passengers black button on buckle A. side trim using the magnetic retaining system. lamp and the corresponding indicator lamps light use the seat belts correctly and that they ► Guide the strap as it reels in and take tongue up if the driver and/or the front passenger have are all fastened before setting off. , then to the magnet at the anchoring point Ensure seat belts are always fixed when B A not fastened their seat belts. Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must on the roof. not in use. At a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h), always fasten the seat belt, even for short these warning lamps flash, accompanied by an journeys. Rear third row seat belts increasing audible signal for approximately two Seat belt not fastened / Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as minutes. After two minutes, these warning lamps they will not fulfil their role fully. unfastened alerts remain on as long as the front seatbelts are not Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt
fastened. is reeled in correctly.
96 Safety
Not fastened at the rear After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned the skills and equipment needed, which a 5 When the ignition is switched on, with the engine running or the vehicle moving at a speed below and reeled in correctly. PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp and the Have the seat belts checked regularly by a corresponding indicator lamps light up for around Installation PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, thirty seconds, if one or more rear seat belts are The lower part of the strap must be particularly if the straps show signs of not fastened. positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or Unfastened The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT After the ignition is switched on, the warning In order to be effective, a seat belt: dealers. lamp and the corresponding indicator lamps light – must be tightened as close to the body as up if the driver and/or one or more passengers possible; unfasten their seat belts. – must be pulled in front of you with a smooth Airbags At a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h), these movement, ensuring that it is not twisted; warning lamps flash, accompanied by an audible – must only be used to secure one person; General information signal for approximately two minutes. After this – must not show signs of tearing or fraying; System designed to help improve the safety time, these warning lamps remain on as long as – must not be changed or modified, in order of the occupants sitting in the front seats and the seatbelts are not refastened. to avoid affecting its performance. the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent Advice collision. The airbags supplement the action Recommendations for children of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting The driver must ensure that passengers Use a suitable child seat if the passenger system. use the seat belts correctly and that they is less than 12 years old or shorter than one Electronic detectors record and analyse the are all fastened before setting off. and a half metres. front and side impacts sustained in the impact Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must Never use the same seat belt to secure more detection zones: always fasten the seat belt, even for short than one child. – In the event of violent impact, the airbags journeys. Never carry a child on your lap. deploy instantly and help better protect the Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as For more information on Child seats, refer to occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the they will not fulfil their role fully. the corresponding section. impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the is reeled in correctly. Maintenance occupants. In accordance with current safety – In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags
97 Safety
may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to The detonation noise associated with the Deployment Deployment protect you in these situations. deployment of one or more airbags may result They deploy, except the front passenger airbag They are deployed on one side in the event of a The seriousness of the impact depends on the in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front serious side impact applied to all or part of the nature of the obstacle and the speed of the impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. side impact zone B. vehicle at the moment of collision. Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax and The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and The airbags do not operate when the head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the ignition is switched off. steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, corresponding door trim panel. This equipment will only deploy once. If a passenger's side, to cushion their forward second impact occurs (during the same or a movement. Curtain airbags subsequent accident), the airbag will not be System contributing towards greater protection deployed again. Lateral airbags for the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of Impact detection zones injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
This system protects the driver and front Deployment passenger in the event of a serious front impact, It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding in order to limit the risk of head and chest lateral airbag in the event of a serious side injuries. impact applied to all or part of the side impact A. Front impact zone The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the zone B. Side impact zone B. steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is The curtain airbag inflates between the front fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. This system protects the driver and front and rear occupants of the vehicle and the When one or more airbags are deployed, passenger in the event of a serious side impact The front airbags are adaptive. In corresponding windows. the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between particular, they inflate less firmly in the incorporated in the system makes a noise and the hip and the shoulder. Malfunction releases a small quantity of smoke. presence of a smaller occupant, with the seat Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest If this warning lamp comes on in the This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive set in a forward longitudinal position. frame, door side. instrument panel, you must contact a individuals may experience slight irritation. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.
98 Safety
Deployment The airbags may no longer be deployed in the ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The They are deployed on one side in the event of a event of a serious impact. airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few 5 milliseconds) then deflates within the same serious side impact applied to all or part of the In the event of a minor impact or bump at time discharging the hot gas via openings side impact zone B. the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle provided for this purpose. The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the In the event of a rear or front collision, none of corresponding door trim panel. the lateral airbags are deployed. Front airbags Do not drive holding the steering wheel Curtain airbags by its spokes or resting your hands on the System contributing towards greater protection Advice centre part of the wheel. for the driver and passengers (with the exception Passengers must not place their feet on the For the airbags to be fully effective, of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a dashboard. observe the safety recommendations serious side impact in order to limit the risk of Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags below. injury to the side of the head. can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Adopt a normal upright sitting position. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and cigarette or pipe. Fasten the seat belt ensuring it is correctly the upper passenger compartment area. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or positioned and adjusted. hit it violently. Do not leave anything between the occupants Deployment Do not fix or attach anything to the steering and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding wheel or dashboard, as this could cause fix or attach anything close to or in the way of lateral airbag in the event of a serious side injuries when the airbags are deployed. the airbag release trajectory; this could cause impact applied to all or part of the side impact injuries during their deployment. zone B. Never modify the original definition of your Lateral airbags The curtain airbag inflates between the front Use only approved covers on the seats, vehicle, particularly in the area directly around and rear occupants of the vehicle and the compatible with the deployment of the lateral the airbags. corresponding windows. airbags. For information on the range of seat After an accident or if the vehicle has been covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a stolen, have the airbag systems checked. Malfunction PEUGEOT dealer. All work on the airbag systems must only If this warning lamp comes on in the Do not fix or attach anything to the seat be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a instrument panel, you must contact a backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could cause qualified workshop. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to injuries to the thorax or arm when the lateral Even if all of the precautions mentioned have the system checked. airbag is deployed. are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be
99 Safety
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any child seats suited to their weight, on seats When installing a child seat using the seat – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, nearer to the door than necessary. fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is The vehicle's front door panels include side – Statistically, the safest seats in your correctly on the child seat and that it secures exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, impact sensors. vehicle for carrying children are the rear the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. – the keys within reach of children inside the A damaged door or any unauthorised or seats. If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it vehicle. incorrectly executed work (modification or – Children weighing less than 9 kg must forwards if necessary. repair) on the front doors or their interior trim travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in Remove the head restraint before could compromise the operation of these the front or rear of the vehicle. installing a child seat with a backrest on a Child seat at the rear sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral passenger seat. It is recommended that children travel airbags! Ensure that the head restraint is stored or "Forward facing" or "Rearward on the rear seats of the vehicle: Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT attached securely to prevent it from being facing" – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, dealer or a qualified workshop. thrown around the vehicle in the event of – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once Curtain airbags the child seat has been removed. Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, positioned and tightened. as this could cause head injuries when the Installing a booster seat For child seats with a support leg, ensure that curtain airbag is deployed. The chest part of the seat belt must be the support leg is in firm and steady contact Do not remove the grab handles installed on positioned on the child's shoulder without with the floor. the roof, as they play a part in securing the touching the neck.
curtain airbags. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt Advice passes correctly over the child's thighs. ► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped straighten the backrest so that the legs of the Child seats An incorrectly installed child seat with a belt guide at shoulder level. child in the "forward facing" child seat or the compromises the child's safety in the "rearward facing" child seat itself do not touch event of an accident. The regulations on carrying children are Additional protections the vehicle's front seat. Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt specific to each country. Refer to the To prevent accidental opening of the ► Verify that the backrest of the "forward facing" buckle under the child seat, as this could legislation in force in your country. doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". child seat is as close as possible to the backrest destabilise it. Take care not to open the rear windows by of the vehicle's rear seat, and is ideally in contact For maximum safety, please observe the Remember to fasten the seat belts or the more than one third. with it. following recommendations: harness of child seats, keeping the slack To protect young children from the rays of the – In accordance with European regulations, relative to the child's body to a minimum, In the presence of a dog guard, it all sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. even for short journeys. is essential that booster seat type children under the age of 12 or less than 4 As a safety precaution, do not leave: ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved
100 Safety
– a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, child seats with backrest be installed in the "Forward facing" – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is second row. 5 exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, – the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.
Child seat at the rear
"Forward facing" or "Rearward facing" You must leave the front passenger
airbag active.
"Rearward facing"
Centre rear seat
► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and A child seat with a support leg must never be
straighten the backrest so that the legs of the installed on the centre rear passenger seat. child in the "forward facing" child seat or the The front passenger airbag must be "rearward facing" child seat itself do not touch Child seat at the front deactivated before installing a rearward
the vehicle's front seat. facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks ► Verify that the backrest of the "forward facing" being seriously injured or killed if the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest airbag is deployed.
of the vehicle's rear seat, and is ideally in contact with it.
In the presence of a dog guard, it ► Adjust the front passenger seat to the is essential that booster seat type highest and fully back longitudinal position, with the backrest straightened.
101 Safety
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Warning label - Front passenger airbag
With the ignition off: Passenger airbag OFF ► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the switch to the "OFF" position. For your child’s safety, the front ► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" passenger airbag MUST be deactivated position. when a "rearward facing" child seat is Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt When the ignition is switched on: installed on the front passenger seat. In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt, This warning lamp comes on and remains Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle. lit to signal the deactivation.
risk of death or serious injury in the event of Or airbag deployment. You must comply with the following instruction, This warning lamp comes on for about 1 reminded by the warning label on both sides of minute to signal the activation. the passenger sun visor: Vehicles not equipped with a NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint deactivation/reactivation control Recommended child seats Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in Range of recommended child seats secured the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the using a three-point seat belt. - risk of death or serious injury in the event of CHILD can occur. airbag deployment! Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag
For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is located inside the glove box.
102 Safety
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg 5
L1 L5 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Installed in the "rearward facing" position. Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the side rear L6 seats. "GRACO Booster" The head restraint on the vehicle seat must The child is restrained by the seat belt. be removed. Only suitable for installation on the front
passenger seat or on the rear side seats.
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt, based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle.
103 Safety
Weight of the child/indicative age Seat Front passenger Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg airbag (groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) 0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to Up to about 1 years old years old 10 years old year old Row 1 (c) Passenger seat Deactivated: U U U U with height adjustment "OFF" (d) Activated: "ON" X UF UF UF without height adjustment (e)
Row 2 (f) Rear seats (c) (g) U U U U
Rear side seats U U U U
Row 3 (f)
U: Seat position suitable for the installation of UF: Seat position suitable for the installation a X: Seat position not suitable for the installation a child seat secured using the seat belt and child seat secured using the seat belt and of a child seat for the specified weight universally approved for "rearward facing" universally approved for "forward facing" group. and/or "forward facing" use. use.
104 Safety
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be (g) 5 installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear seat.
Carrycots and "car" infant carriers cannot be “ISOFIX" mountings installed on the front passenger seat. The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX compliant mountings: * Depending on version.
The mountings comprise three rings for each Carrycots and "car" infant carriers cannot be seat, indicated by a marking:
installed on the front passenger seat or in – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat
the 3rd row. backrest and cushion.
(c) Refer to the current legislation in your country before installing your child on this
seat.
(d) Maximum height position (e) Backrest straightened. (f) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward facing" child seat at the rear, move the front
seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.
105 Safety
Front seat This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
Recommended ISOFIX child reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the
seats
vehicle. To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: Also consult the user guide from the child ► Remove and stow the head restraint before seat’s manufacturer to find out how to installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once install and remove the seat. the child seat has been removed). ► Pass the strap of the child seat behind the "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX seat backrest, in between the 2 head restraint base" anchoring points. (size category: E) ► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B. ► Tighten the upper strap. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat
to the left-hand rear seat of the The 2 latches of ISOFIX child seats are secured bench seat, before fitting the seat, first move
to them. the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of
– One ring B, located behind the seat, called the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering the TOP TETHER, for fixing seats fitted with an with the operation of the seat belt. upper strap.
An incorrectly installed child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's safety in
the event of an accident. Locations for ISOFIX child seats Strictly observe the fitting instructions In accordance with European regulations, this table shows the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. provided in the user guide supplied with the In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, as determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child child seat. seat next to the i-Size logo.
For information about the options for
* Depending on country of sale. fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle, Rear seats refer to the summary table. This system prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a front impact.
106 Safety
Recommended ISOFIX child "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" 5 seats base" (size category: B1) (size category: E) Also consult the user guide from the child Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg seat’s manufacturer to find out how to Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg install and remove the seat. Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to rings A. "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX The base has a support leg, height- base" adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. (size category: E) This child seat can also be secured with a Suitable for forward-facing installation only. seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as and attached to the vehicle seat using the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. three-point seat belt. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down. This child seat can also be used in seat positions not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Locations for ISOFIX child seats In accordance with European regulations, this table shows the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, as determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the i-Size logo.
107 Safety
Weight of the child / indicative age
Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1) Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
months old (group 0+) Up to about 1 year old Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing" facing" ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Seat Front passenger airbag Row 1 Passenger Deactivated: X IL IL IUF/IL (a) seat "OFF" with or Activated: X X X IUF/IL without height "ON" adjustment Row 2 Rear side IL (b) IL IL IUF/IL seats Rear central Not ISOFIX seat
108 Safety
Weight of the child / indicative age 5
Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1) Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
months old (group 0+) Up to about 1 year old Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing" facing" ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Seat Front passenger airbag Row 1 Passenger Deactivated: Not ISOFIX (a) seat "OFF" with or Activated: without height "ON" adjustment Row 2 Rear seat X IL (b) IL IL IUF/IL behind the driver's seat Rear seat IL (b) X IL IL IUF/IL behind the passenger seat Rear central X IL IL IUF/IL seat Row 3 Rear side Not ISOFIX seats
109 Safety
IUF: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixU niversal seat, "Forward facing", secured using the upper strap. IL: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixS emi-Universal seat, either: – "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. – “forward facing”, fitted with a support leg. – a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. X: Seat position not suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX seat or carrycot for the specified weight group. (a) Refer to the current legislation in your country before placing a child in this seat position. (b) The installation of a carrycot on this seat may prevent the use of one or more of the other seats in this row. i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
110 Safety
5
Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system i-Size restraint system Row 1 (a) Passenger seat Deactivated: "OFF" i-U Not i-Size with or without height adjustment
Activated: "ON" i-UF Not i-Size
Row 2 Rear side seats i-U i-U
Rear central seat Not i-Size i-U
Row 3 Rear side seats - Not i-Size i-U: Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the i-UF: Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems (a) Refer to the current legislation in your "Universal" category, "forward facing" and in the "Universal" category which are country before installing a child at this seat "rearward facing". "forward facing". position.
X: Seat position not suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
111 Safety Manual child lock Electric child lock This system prevents opening of a rear door This remote control system prevents the opening using its interior handle. of the rear doors using their interior handles and The control, red in colour, is located on the edge the use of the rear electric windows. of each rear door (marked by a label). Activation/Deactivation Locking / Unlocking
► To lock, turn the red control as far as it will go using the integral key: ► With the ignition on, press this button to • To the right on the left-hand rear door. activate/deactivate the child lock. • To the left on the right-hand rear door. When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is ► To unlock, turn it in the opposite direction. activated.
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always keep the electronic key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact, the electric Do not confuse the child lock control, child lock is switched off automatically to which is red, with the back-up locking permit the exit of the rear passengers. control, which is black.
112 Driving
Driving recommendations Do not park the vehicle or leave the ► Check that the depth of water does not engine running on a flammable exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that 6 ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The might be generated by other users. vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, ► Deactivate the Stop & Start function. ► Monitor your environment and keep your even several minutes after the engine stops. ► For hybrid engines, place the mode selector hands on the wheel to be able to react to Risk of fire! in 4WD position (depending on version). anything that may happen any time. ► Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In ► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for Never leave a vehicle unattended with all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h). braking and maintain a longer safety distance, the engine running. If you have to leave ► Do not stop and do not switch off the engine. especially in bad weather. your vehicle with the engine running, apply On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety ► Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that the parking brake and put the gearbox into conditions allow, make several light brake require close attention (such as adjustments). neutral or position N or P (depending on the applications to dry the brake discs and pads. ► During long trips, take a break every two type of gearbox). If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, hours. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Important! Never leave children inside the vehicle unsupervised. Never leave the engine running in a In case of towing closed space without sufficient On flooded roads Driving with a trailer places greater ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit demands on the towing vehicle and We strongly advise against driving on flooded toxic exhaust gases such as carbon requires extra care from the driver. monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! roads, as this could cause serious damage to the internal combustion engine or electric motor, Respect the maximum towable weights. the gearbox and the electrical systems of the In severe wintry conditions (temperature reduce the maximum load by vehicle. At altitude: below -23°C), let the engine run for 4 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the density minutes before moving off, to ensure the of the air decreases with altitude and the correct operation and durability of the performance of the engine reduces. mechanical components of your vehicle (engine and gearbox). New vehicle: do not pull a trailer before having driven at least 620 miles (1,000 Never drive with the parking brake kilometres).
applied. Risk of overheating and damage to the braking system! If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
113 Driving
If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not Starting / Switching off the Once the state of charge of the battery drops to engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the increase with engine speed. the reserve level, the system switches to energy vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to engine with the key economy mode : the power supply is cut off limit heating up. automatically to preserve the remaining battery In all cases, pay attention to the coolant Key ignition switch charge.
Before setting off temperature. Nose weight If this warning lamp and the STOP Starting the engine ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the warning lamp come on, stop the With the parking brake applied: heaviest items are as close as possible to the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever axle and the nose weight (at the point where it possible. in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum Brakes ► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector in mode N or P then fully depress the permitted without exceeding it. Braking distances are increased when towing a brake pedal. Tyres trailer. To avoid overheating the brakes, the use ► Insert the key into the ignition switch; the of engine braking is recommended. ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing system recognises the code. vehicle and of the trailer, observing the Side wind ► Unlock the steering column by simultaneously recommended pressures. Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more It has 3 positions: turning the steering wheel and the key. Lighting susceptible to wind when towing. – : inserting and removing the key, 1. Stop In certain cases, you may have to apply steering column locked. ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer significant force to move the steering – : steering column unlocked, ignition and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. Anti-theft protection 2. Ignition wheel (wheels on full lock, for example). on, Diesel preheating, engine running. If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is – 3. Starting. ► With a petrol engine, operate the starter used, the rear parking sensors will be Electronic immobiliser motor by turning the key to position 3 without deactivated automatically to avoid the audible Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key The keys include an electronic engine pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine signal. or the remote control. It would weigh immobiliser system, whose secret code must be starts. Once the engine starts, release the key. down on its shaft in the ignition switch and recognised in order for starting to be possible. could cause a malfunction. With petrol engines, after a cold start, When driving If the system malfunctions, indicated by the display of a message, the engine will not start. preheating the catalytic converter can Cooling Contact a PEUGEOT dealer. Ignition on position cause noticeable engine vibrations for anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant It allows the use of the vehicle's electric the engine running (accelerated idle speed). temperature to increase. The maximum towable equipment or portable devices to be charged. load depends on the gradient and the exterior
114 Driving
Once the state of charge of the battery drops to ► With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position ► To lock the steering column, turn the steering the reserve level, the system switches to energy 2, ignition on, to operate the engine preheating wheel until it locks. 6 economy mode : the power supply is cut off system. To facilitate unlocking of the steering automatically to preserve the remaining battery Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the column, it is recommended that the charge. instrument panel, then operate the starter wheels be returned to the straight ahead motor by turning the key to position 3 without position before switching off the engine. Starting the engine pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine With the parking brake applied: starts. Once the engine starts, release the key. Never switch off the ignition before the ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever In wintry conditions, the warning lamp complete immobilisation of the vehicle. in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. may stay on for a longer period. When With the engine off, the braking and steering ► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not assistance systems are also cut off - risk of selector in mode N or P then fully depress the come on. loss of control of the vehicle! brake pedal. ► Insert the key into the ignition switch; the If the engine does not start straight away, system recognises the code. Check that the parking brake is correctly switch off the ignition. Wait a few ► Unlock the steering column by simultaneously applied, particularly on sloping ground. seconds before operating the starter motor turning the steering wheel and the key. When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in again. If the engine does not start after a few your possession and lock the vehicle. In certain cases, you may have to apply attempts, do not keep trying - risk of significant force to move the steering damaging the starter motor and the engine. wheel (wheels on full lock, for example). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Energy economy mode workshop. After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), ► With a petrol engine, operate the starter for a maximum combined duration of about thirty motor by turning the key to position 3 without In mild conditions, do not leave the minutes, you can still use functions such as the pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine engine at idle to warm up but move off audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps, starts. Once the engine starts, release the key. straight away and drive at moderate speed. windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, With petrol engines, after a cold start, etc. preheating the catalytic converter can Switching off the engine For more information on Energy cause noticeable engine vibrations for economy mode, refer to the ► Immobilise the vehicle. anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with corresponding section. the engine running (accelerated idle speed). ► With the engine at idle, turn the key to position 1. ► Remove the key from the ignition switch.
115 Driving
Key left in Starting while pressing the "START/STOP" button to When the vehicle starts in electric mode, When opening the driver's door, an alert assist unlocking of the steering column. it makes no noise. message is displayed, accompanied by an Pay particular attention to pedestrians and With petrol engines, after a cold start, audible signal, to remind you that the key is cyclists who may not hear the vehicle coming preheating the catalytic converter can still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop). despite the pedestrian horn. cause noticeable engine vibrations for If the key has been left in the ignition switch anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be the engine running (accelerated idle speed). switched off automatically after one hour. Switching off To switch the ignition back on, turn the key ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 If the engine stalls, release the clutch idle. (Ignition on). pedal and fully depress it again, the ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear
engine will restart automatically. lever into neutral. ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select Starting / Switching off the in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal. mode P or N. ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P Starting hybrid vehicles ► Press the "START/STOP" button.. ► Fully depress the brake pedal and press engine with Keyless Entry or N and press the brake pedal. ► For hybrid vehicles, before leaving the on the button. and Starting ► Press the "START/STOP" button while briefly START/STOP vehicle, check that the READY warning lamp is maintaining pressure on the pedal until the ► Keep you foot on the pedal until this switched off. indicator lamp comes on, indicating the The electronic key must be present in the engine starts. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn activation of the hybrid system (confirmed by an passenger compartment. For Diesel engines, when the temperature is the steering wheel to lock the steering column. audible signal). If it is not detected, a message is displayed. below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting will On certain versions with an automatic gearbox By default, the system starts in ELECTRIC Move the electronic key so that the engine only occur once the preheating warning lamp is (EAT6 / EAT8), the steering column does not mode. can be started or switched off. off. lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P. Depending on certain parameters (battery If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key If this warning lamp comes on after charge level or exterior temperature), the system If the vehicle is not immobilised, the not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up pressing the "START/STOP" button: determines whether it is necessary to start the engine will not switch off. switch-off" section. ► Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not petrol engine. press the "START/STOP" button again until the engine is running. It is possible to change the driving mode at any With the engine off, the braking and If one of the starting conditions is not met, a time using the mode selector. steering assistance systems are also cut message is displayed. off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! In some circumstances, a message indicates that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel Never leave your vehicle with the electronic key still inside.
116 Driving
When the vehicle starts in electric mode, Switching on the ignition it makes no noise. 6 Pay particular attention to pedestrians and without starting the engine
cyclists who may not hear the vehicle coming despite the pedestrian horn.
Switching off ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at idle. ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear
lever into neutral. ► Place and hold the remote control against the ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select reader. mode P or N. With the electronic key in the passenger ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever ► Press the "START/STOP" button.. compartment, pressing the “START/STOP” in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. ► For hybrid vehicles, before leaving the button, without pressing any of the pedals, ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, vehicle, check that the READY warning lamp is allows the ignition to be switched on without then fully depress the brake pedal. switched off. starting the engine (turning on the instrument In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn panel and accessories such as the audio system the steering wheel to lock the steering column. and the lighting). On certain versions with an automatic gearbox ► Press this button again to switch off the (EAT6 / EAT8), the steering column does not
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P. ► Press the "START/STOP" button. If the vehicle is not immobilised, the Key not detected The engine starts. engine will not switch off. Back-up starting With the engine off, the braking and A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, steering assistance systems are also cut to enable the engine to be started if the system off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or if the battery in the electronic key is discharged.
Never leave your vehicle with the electronic key still inside.
117 Driving
Back-up switch-off On certain versions with automatic gearbox by the display of the message "Parking brake Never leave a child alone inside the (EAT6 / EAT8), the steering column does not released". vehicle, as they could release the parking lock. The indicator lamp flashes in response to a brake. manual request to apply or release the brake. Electric parking brake In the event of a battery failure, the When the vehicle is parked: on a electric parking brake will not operate. steep slope, heavily loaded or during In automatic mode, this system applies the As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, towing parking brake when the engine is switched off if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels and releases it when the vehicle moves off. the vehicle by engaging a gear. toward the pavement and engage a gear. As a safety measure, with an automatic With an automatic gearbox, turn the wheels gearbox, if the parking brake is not applied, toward the pavement and select mode P.
When towing, the vehicle is approved for immobilise the vehicle by placing the supplied
If the electronic key is not detected or is no chocks against one of the wheels. parking on slopes of up to 12%. longer in the recognition zone, a message Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified appears in the instrument panel when closing a workshop. Manual operation
door or trying to switch off the engine.
► To confirm the instruction to switch off the Manual release engine, press the "START/STOP" button for At any time, with the engine running: With the ignition on or engine running: approximately 5 seconds. ► to apply the parking brake, pull the briefly ► Depress the brake pedal. In the event of a fault with the electronic key, control lever; ► While maintaining pressure on the brake contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► to release it, briefly the control lever push pedal, briefly push the control lever. workshop. while pressing the brake pedal. If you push the control lever without Automatic mode is activated by default. Emergency switch-off pressing the brake pedal, the parking In the event of an emergency only, the engine Indicator lamp Before leaving the vehicle, check that the brake is not released and a message is parking brake is applied: the indicator can be switched off without conditions (even This indicator lamp comes on on the displayed. lamps on the instrument panel and the control when driving). instrument panel and on the control lever lever must be on fixed. ► Press the "START/STOP" button for about to confirm the application of the parking brake, If the parking brake is not applied, there is an Manual application 5 seconds. accompanied by the display of the message audible signal and a message is displayed on With the vehicle stationary: In this case, the steering column locks as soon "Parking brake applied". opening the driver's door. ► Pull briefly on the control lever. as the vehicle stops. The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the The control lever indicator lamp flashes to release of the parking brake, accompanied confirm the application request.
118 Driving
Never leave a child alone inside the Automatic operation It is not applied automatically if the vehicle, as they could release the parking engine stalls or enters STOP mode 6 brake. Automatic release of Stop & Start. First ensure that the engine is running and that When the vehicle is parked: on a the driver's door is properly closed. With automatic operation, it is also steep slope, heavily loaded or during The electric parking brake gradually releases possible to manually apply or release the towing automatically as the vehicle moves off. parking brake using the control lever. With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels With a manual gearbox toward the pavement and engage a gear. ► Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage Special cases With an automatic gearbox, turn the wheels first gear or reverse. toward the pavement and select mode P. ► Depress the accelerator pedal and release Immobilising the vehicle with the When towing, the vehicle is approved for the clutch pedal. engine running parking on slopes of up to 12%. With an automatic gearbox ► Depress the brake pedal. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine running, briefly pull the control lever. Manual operation ► Select mode D, M or R. ► Release the brake pedal and depress the Parking the vehicle with the brake accelerator pedal. Manual release released With the ignition on or engine running: If the brake does not release ► Depress the brake pedal. automatically, check that the front doors In very cold conditions (ice), applying the ► While maintaining pressure on the brake are fully closed. parking brake is not recommended. pedal, briefly push the control lever. To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or place the chocks against one of the wheels. When stationary with the engine running, If you push the control lever without do not depress the accelerator pedal pressing the brake pedal, the parking unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. With an automatic gearbox, mode P is brake is not released and a message is automatically selected when the ignition displayed. is switched off. The wheels are blocked. Automatic application For more information on Free-wheeling, refer Manual application With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake to the corresponding section. With the vehicle stationary: is automatically applied when the engine is . ► Pull briefly on the control lever. switched off With an automatic gearbox, while mode The control lever indicator lamp flashes to N is selected, opening the driver’s door confirm the application request.
119 Driving
triggers an audible signal. It stops when the ► Release the control lever and the brake 6-speed manual gearbox Automatic gearbox (EAT6/ driver's door closes again. pedal. From now on, the parking brake can only be EAT8) Engaging 5th or 6th gear applied and released manually using the control Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox with a push Deactivating automatic ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to lever. selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear engage 5th or 6th gear. operation Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic changes via control paddles located behind the In some situations, for example when it is operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp on the Failure to follow this instruction could steering wheel. extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, instrument panel going off). cause permanent damage to the gearbox breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate (inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear). Gearbox selector positions automatic operation of the system. Emergency braking P. Park
In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, Engaging reverse gear blocked. driver under instruction), a continuous pull on the
R. Reverse gear electric parking brake control lever will brake the N. Neutral vehicle. Braking continues while the control lever For moving the vehicle with the ignition off, or is pulled, and ceases when the control lever is to allow it to free-wheel. released. For more information on Changing to free- The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. during emergency braking. D. Driving in automatic mode ► Start the engine. If emergency braking malfunctions, the message The gearbox manages gear changes ► Use the control lever to apply the parking ► Raise the trigger under the knob and move "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed according to the style of driving, the road brake, if it is released. the gear lever to the left, then forwards. on the instrument panel. profile and the vehicle load. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. If the ABS and DSC systems Only engage reverse gear when the M. Driving in manual mode ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release malfunction, indicated by lighting vehicle is stationary with the engine at The driver changes gear using the steering- direction for between 10 and a maximum of 15 one or both warning lamps on the instrument idle. mounted controls. seconds. panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured. ► Release the control lever. In this event, the driver must keep the vehicle As a safety precaution and to facilitate ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. stable by successively pulling and releasing the starting of the engine, always select ► Pull the control lever in the “Application” control lever, repeating the operation until the neutral and depress the clutch pedal. direction for 2 seconds. vehicle has stopped. This indicator lamp on the instrument panel comes on to confirm deactivation of the automatic functions.
120 Driving
Automatic gearbox (EAT6/ Push selector 6 EAT8) Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox with a push selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear changes via control paddles located behind the steering wheel. Gearbox selector positions P. Park For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are blocked. R. Reverse gear N. Neutral For moving the vehicle with the ignition off, or ► Move the selector by pressing it forwards
to allow it to free-wheel. (N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice, passing the point of resistance if necessary. For more information on Changing to free- A. Button P The push selector returns to its initial position wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. To put the gearbox into Park mode. when released. D. Driving in automatic mode B. Unlock button The gearbox manages gear changes To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or For example, to change from P to R, while according to the style of driving, the road to change to R, with the foot on the brake pressing Unlock, push forward twice without profile and the vehicle load. pedal. crossing the point of resistance or push once crossing the point of resistance: M. Driving in manual mode Press and hold this button before pushing the The driver changes gear using the steering- selector. – In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to N, mounted controls. C. Button M then from N to R. To change from mode D to permanent – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly manual mode. from P to R. D. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D)
Steering-mounted controls In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control paddles allow the driver to change gear manually.
121 Driving
They cannot be used to engage neutral or to "Sport" button Operation Engaging reverse gear select or come out of reverse.
With the engine running, when the programme With the engine running, if it is necessary to ► Slow down until you come to a stop. associated with the button is activated, the press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button ► Depress the brake pedal, then press the gearbox delays changing up for a more dynamic in order to change mode, an alert message is Unlock button. driving style. displayed in the instrument panel. ► While maintaining the presses, select The programme is automatically deactivated Only appropriate attempted changes of mode mode R. when the ignition is switched off. are accepted. Manual mode Activating the Sport programme or the Dynamic With the engine running and the brakes Entering the mode: pack is not recommended in the following released, if R, D or M is selected, the ► With mode D initially selected. situations: vehicle moves off, even without pressing the ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in – Use of one of the special Advanced Grip accelerator pedal. the button comes on. Control modes (other than standard mode). Exiting the mode: – Low fuel level reached. ► Push forwards once to return to D. – Low AdBlue level reached. Never press the accelerator and brake ► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and pedals at the same time - risk of damage or release to shift up or down a gear, respectively. Pressing this button has no effect when to the gearbox! ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the towing and when a trailer is connected. In the event of a battery failure, you must button goes off. Information displayed on place the chocks supplied with the vehicle Switching off the ignition Sport programme the instrument panel tools against one of the wheels to immobilise To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be In mode D, pressing this button activates the vehicle. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox SPORT stationary. the Sport programme. status is displayed on the instrument panel: Changing to free-wheeling P : Park. "S" appears in the instrument panel. Unlocking the gearbox For more information on Changing to free- R : Reverse. Dynamic pack – From mode P: wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. N : Neutral. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate ► Fully depress the brake pedal. SPORT D1...D6/D8 : Automatic mode. the function. ► Press the Unlock button. If you open the driver's door while mode S : Sport programme or Dynamic pack. The orange indicator lamp in the button is on ► While continuing to press the brake pedal N is engaged, an audible signal will : Manual mode. and the button, select another mode. M1...M6/M8 while the Dynamic pack is activated. Unlock sound. It will stop when you close the driver's : Instruction not processed in manual mode. – From neutral , at a speed below 3 mph - For more information on the Dynamic pack, N door again. If the driver's door is opened with the ignition on, refer to the corresponding section. (5 km/h): a message is displayed, prompting you to set the ► Fully depress the brake pedal. gearbox to mode P. ► While continuing to depress the brake Special aspects of automatic mode pedal, select another mode. The gearbox selects the gear that offers optimum performance, taking into account the outside
122 Driving
Engaging reverse gear temperature, the profile of the road, the load on ► Release the brake pedal. the vehicle and the style of driving. ► Accelerate gradually to automatically release 6 ► Slow down until you come to a stop. ► Depress the brake pedal, then press the For maximum acceleration without touching the the electric parking brake. Unlock button. selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick- The vehicle moves off immediately. down). The gearbox changes down automatically ► While maintaining the presses, select In severe wintry conditions (temperature or holds the selected gear until the maximum mode R. below -23°C), it is recommended that the engine speed is reached. Manual mode engine be allowed to run for a few minutes The steering-mounted controls allow the driver before moving off, to ensure correct operation Entering the mode: to temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed and durability of the engine and gearbox. ► With mode D initially selected. and engine speed conditions permit. ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in the button comes on. Special aspects of manual mode With an automatic gearbox, never try to Exiting the mode: The gearbox only changes from one gear to start the engine by pushing the vehicle. ► Push forwards once to return to D. another if the vehicle speed and engine speed or conditions permit. Stopping the vehicle ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the Whatever the state of the gearbox, when the button goes off. Starting the vehicle ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged From mode : Switching off the ignition P automatically and immediately. ► Fully depress the brake pedal. To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged ► Start the engine. stationary. after a delay of 5 seconds (allowing for the ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, process of putting the vehicle into free-wheeling Changing to free-wheeling press the button. Unlock mode). For more information on Changing to free- ► Push once or twice rearwards to select Check that mode P has been engaged and wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. the automatic mode , or forwards to engage D that the electric parking brake was applied reverse R. If you open the driver's door while mode automatically; if not, apply it manually. From neutral N: N is engaged, an audible signal will The corresponding indicator lamps in the ► Fully depress the brake pedal. sound. It will stop when you close the driver's selector and the electric parking brake ► Start the engine. door again. control lever must be on, as well as those in the ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, instrument panel. push rearwards to select the automatic mode D, Special aspects of automatic mode or forwards, while pressing the Unlock button to The gearbox selects the gear that offers optimum engage reverse R. performance, taking into account the outside Then, from D or R:
123 Driving
Gearbox malfunction e-EAT8 electric automatic Push selector N: neutral. : automatic forward gear. This warning lamp comes on, D1 to D8 gearbox (Hybrid) : automatic forward gear with accompanied by an audible signal and the B1 to B8 regenerative braking function activated. display of a message. Automatic 8-speed gearbox with a push selector In all-electric driving, the gear engaged is not Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. and regenerative braking function. indicated. Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), With the exception of manual mode, the The state of the gearbox remains displayed in keeping to the speed limit. “Sport” button and the regenerative braking, the instrument panel for a few seconds after The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D the operation is identical to that of other EAT8 switching off the ignition. is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted gearboxes. control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no For more information on the Operation or the longer available. You may feel a significant jolt Malfunctions of the EAT8 gearbox, refer to the Regenerative braking on engaging reverse gear. This will not damage corresponding sections. The regenerative braking function emulates the gearbox. engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need Gearbox selector positions to depress the brake pedal. When the driver Selector malfunction P. Car park releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows For parking the vehicle: the front wheels down more quickly and recharges the battery. Minor malfunction are blocked. A. Button P ► From mode D/B, moving the push selector This warning lamp comes on, R. Reverse gear To put the gearbox into Park mode. backwards activates/deactivates the function. accompanied by the display of a message N. Neutral B. Unlock button The D on the instrument panel is replaced with and an audible signal. For moving the vehicle with the ignition To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or a B. Drive cautiously and visit a PEUGEOT dealer or off: in certain car washing machines, to change to R, with the foot on the brake The state of the function is not saved when the a qualified workshop. when towing the vehicle, etc. pedal. ignition is switched off. In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps Press and hold this button before pushing the D/B. Automatic forward gear (D) or automatic The driver must always be ready to use may no longer come on, but the gearbox state is selector. forward gear with regenerative braking the brake pedal: in certain situations (e.g. still displayed on the instrument panel. C. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D/B) (B) full battery, extreme temperatures), the Major malfunction The gearbox manages gear changes regenerative braking level may be temporarily This warning lamp comes on, according to the style of driving, the road Displays in the instrument limited and deceleration may be reduced. accompanied by the display of a profile and the vehicle load. With the panel message. regenerative braking function activated, the gearbox also controls braking when When the ignition is switched on, the status of Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away the accelerator pedal is released. the gearbox is displayed in the instrument panel: Hill start assist from traffic, and call a PEUGEOT dealer P: park. This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary or a qualified workshop. R: reverse. (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill
124 Driving
N: neutral. start, while you transfer your foot from the brake On an ascending slope, with the vehicle D1 to D8: automatic forward gear. pedal to the accelerator pedal. stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time 6 B1 to B8: automatic forward gear with This system is only active when: when you release the brake pedal: regenerative braking function activated. – The vehicle is completely stationary, with your – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a In all-electric driving, the gear engaged is not foot on the brake pedal. manual gearbox. indicated. – Certain slope conditions are met. – provided you are in mode D or M with an The state of the gearbox remains displayed in – The driver’s door is closed. automatic gearbox. the instrument panel for a few seconds after Do not leave the vehicle while it is being switching off the ignition. held temporarily by hill start assist. Regenerative braking If someone needs to get out of the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking The regenerative braking function emulates brake manually. After that, ensure that the engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator to depress the brake pedal. When the driver lamp P in the electric parking brake control releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows lever are on fixed. down more quickly and recharges the battery.
► From mode D/B, moving the push selector The hill start assist function cannot be On a descending slope, with the vehicle backwards activates/deactivates the function. deactivated. However, use of the parking stationary and reverse gear engaged, the The D on the instrument panel is replaced with brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its vehicle is held for a short time when you a B. operation. release the brake pedal. The state of the function is not saved when the ignition is switched off. Malfunction The driver must always be ready to use Operation These warning lamps come on in
the brake pedal: in certain situations (e.g. the event of a malfunction. full battery, extreme temperatures), the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified regenerative braking level may be temporarily workshop to have the system checked. limited and deceleration may be reduced. Dynamic pack Hill start assist This pack governs the following elements: – Acoustic ambience of the engine. This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary – Power steering. (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill
125 Driving
– Acceleration. Driving modes The vehicle automatically changes to HYBRID is sufficient and acceleration requirements are – Handling gear changes with the automatic mode. moderate. gearbox. The number and type of driving modes available The lighting of a blue LED under the interior When navigation is activated, the use – Display on the instrument panel of information depend on the vehicle’s engine and equipment. rear view mirror, visible from outside the vehicle, of HYBRID mode is advisable to optimise about the dynamic parameters of the vehicle Driving modes are selected using the following confirms driving in ELECTRIC mode. control: electrical consumption.
("PERSONAL" mode). The lighting of the LED can be Activation/Deactivation deactivated by inserting the tip of a paper SPORT clip type accessory into the hole under the Allows more dynamic driving to take advantage ► Press this button; the orange indicator
SPORT mirror. lamp in the button comes on to confirm of the vehicle's maximum performance. Electric power is used to supplement the petrol activation of the function. Conditions of activation engine as long as there is energy left in the – Adequate battery charge level. Charging If the orange indicator lamp flashes, battery. the vehicle after each drive is therefore activation is not available (e.g. if Park recommended. The mode is 4WD (4-wheel drive) Assist is selected). ELECTRIC available as long as there is power left in the If the indicator lamp continues flashing for a Depending on equipment. battery. mode ("4-wheel drive") improves the long time, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a 4WD – Exterior temperature between 0°C and 45°C. qualified workshop. Pressing the control displays the modes on the vehicle's grip at low and moderate speeds by instrument panel. Manually exiting the mode driving all 4 wheels continuously. – Fully depress the accelerator pedal. When the message disappears, the selected This mode is especially suited to snow-covered – Select another mode. Displays mode is activated and remains indicated on the roads and difficult terrain (mud, sand, etc.) as well as ford crossings, at moderate speed. To show this information on the instrument panel, instrument panel (except NORMAL mode). In case of non-use of the vehicle for a Depending on the driving conditions and the select the “PERSONAL” mode and then the type long period (several months), a restart of battery charge level, mode may be 100% of information required. With hybrid engine the petrol engine may occur even if the 4WD electric. This telemetry information (power output, Each time the ignition is switched on, ELECTRIC battery is charged. turbocharger pressure, torque, mode is selected by default. This mode will be even more effective if longitudinal and lateral acceleration, etc.) is ELECTRIC HYBRID the vehicle is fitted with suitable tyres, such as winter tyres. given for information purposes only. Allows 100% electric driving. The maximum Optimises the fuel consumption of the vehicle by managing the alternating or simultaneous speed is approximately 84 mph (135 km/h). The grip can be improved up to 84 mph (135 operation of the two types of engine, When starting the vehicle, if the conditions do not km/h) using the electric motors; above this according to road conditions and driving style. allow the activation or retention of ELECTRIC speed, the vehicle is driven by the front wheels In HYBRID mode, it is possible to drive in mode, the message “Electric mode currently only. unavailable” is displayed in the instrument panel. 100% electric mode if the battery charge level
126 Driving is sufficient and acceleration requirements are Gear efficiency indicator Stop & Start moderate. 6 (Depending on engine.) The Stop & Start function puts the engine When navigation is activated, the use This system helps reduce fuel consumption by temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during of HYBRID mode is advisable to optimise recommending the most appropriate gear. phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights, electrical consumption. queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically Operation - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to SPORT Depending on the driving situation and the move off again. Allows more dynamic driving to take advantage vehicle's equipment, the system may advise Primarily designed for urban use, the function of the vehicle's maximum performance. skipping one or more gears. is intended to reduce fuel consumption and Electric power is used to supplement the petrol Gear engagement recommendations are only exhaust emissions as well as the noise level engine as long as there is energy left in the optional. In fact, the configuration of the road, when stationary. battery. the traffic density and safety remain determining The function does not affect the functionalities of 4WD (4-wheel drive) factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the vehicle, in particular the braking. the driver remains responsible for deciding Depending on equipment. whether or not to follow the system’s advice. Deactivation/Reactivation 4WD mode ("4-wheel drive") improves the This function cannot be deactivated. The function is activated by default when the vehicle's grip at low and moderate speeds by ignition is switched on. driving all 4 wheels continuously. With an automatic gearbox, the system is This mode is especially suited to snow-covered only active in manual operation. With the button on the dashboard
roads and difficult terrain (mud, sand, etc.) as well as ford crossings, at moderate speed. The information appears in the instrument Depending on the driving conditions and the panel in the form of an arrow and the
battery charge level, 4WD mode may be 100% recommended gear. electric. The system adapts its gear shift This mode will be even more effective if recommendation according to the driving the vehicle is fitted with suitable tyres, conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s requirements (power, acceleration, braking,
such as winter tyres. etc.). ► Press the button. The grip can be improved up to 84 mph (135 The system never suggests: A message in the instrument panel confirms the km/h) using the electric motors; above this – engaging first gear, change of status. speed, the vehicle is driven by the front wheels – engaging reverse. only.
127 Driving
When the function is deactivated, the orange For more information on Driving Time counter Restarting the engine (START mode) indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in standby, recommendations, particularly on flooded A time counter adds up the time spent in standby The engine automatically restarts as soon as the it restarts immediately. roads, refer to the corresponding section. during the journey. It is reset to zero every time driver indicates the intention of moving off again. With the touch screen button the ignition is switched on using the key or the – With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal fully depressed. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch Operation START/STOP button. – With an automatic gearbox: screen menu. Main conditions for operation Special cases: • With the selector in position D or M: with the A message in the instrument panel confirms the – The driver’s door must be closed. The engine will not go into standby if all of the brake pedal released. change of status. – The driver's seat belt must be fastened. conditions for operation are not met and in the • With the selector in position N and the brake When the function is deactivated, if the engine – The state of charge of the battery must be following cases. pedal released: with the selector at D or M. was in standby, it restarts immediately. sufficient. – Steep slope (ascending or descending). • With the selector in position P and the brake Associated indicator lamps – The temperature of the engine must be within – Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, its nominal operating range. Function activated. since the last engine start (with the key or the D or M. – The outside temperature must be between “START/STOP” button). 0°C and 35 °C. Special cases Function deactivated or malfunction. – The electric parking brake is applied or being Putting the engine into standby applied. The engine will restart automatically if all conditions for operation are met again and in the Opening the bonnet (STOP mode) – Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature following cases. Before doing anything under the bonnet, in the passenger compartment. The engine automatically enters standby mode – Vehicle speed exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h) on deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid – Demisting active. as soon as the driver indicates their intention to 2.0 BlueHDi versions with automatic gearbox in any risk of injury caused by the engine In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes stop. mode , or 2 mph (3 km/h) on other versions. restarting automatically. for a few seconds, then goes off. D – With a manual gearbox, at speeds below 2 – The electric parking brake is being applied. After the engine has restarted, STOP mph (3 km/h) on 1.5 BlueHDi versions, or with In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes mode is not available until the vehicle the vehicle stationary on 1.2 PureTech versions, for a few seconds, then goes off. when you place the gear lever in neutral and has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). release the clutch pedal. Malfunctions – With an automatic gearbox, at speeds below During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode Driving on flooded roads In the event of a malfunction, this warning 12 mph (20 km/h) on BlueHDi versions, or with is not available for a few seconds after Before entering into a flooded area, it is lamp flashes for a few moments, then the vehicle stationary on other versions, when coming out of reverse gear or turning the strongly recommended that you deactivate remains on, accompanied by an onscreen you depress the brake pedal or place the gear steering wheel. the Stop & Start system. message. selector in mode . N Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
128 Driving
Restarting the engine (START mode) The vehicle stalls in STOP mode Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly in adverse conditions (heavy load, high 6 The engine automatically restarts as soon as the All of the instrument panel warning lamps come driver indicates the intention of moving off again. on if there is a fault. speed, long journey): – With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal ► Switch off the ignition then start the engine – worsens road-holding. fully depressed. again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. – lengthens braking distances. – With an automatic gearbox: – causes premature wear of the tyres. The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V • With the selector in position D or M: with the – increases energy consumption. battery of specific technology and brake pedal released. specification. • With the selector in position N and the brake The inflation pressures defined for the All work concerning the battery must be pedal released: with the selector at D or M. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a • With the selector in position P and the brake label. qualified workshop. pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, For more information on the Identification D or M. markings, refer to the corresponding section. Special cases Under-inflation detection Checking tyre pressures The engine will restart automatically if all This system automatically checks the pressures This check should be done when the conditions for operation are met again and in the of the tyres while driving. tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or following cases. It compares the information given by the wheel after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at – Vehicle speed exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h) on speed sensors with reference values, which moderate speeds). 2.0 BlueHDi versions with automatic gearbox in must be reinitialised every time the tyre Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures mode D, or 2 mph (3 km/h) on other versions. pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. shown on the label. – The electric parking brake is being applied. The system triggers an alert as soon as it In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or Snow chains for a few seconds, then goes off. more tyres. The system does not have to be Malfunctions Under-inflation detection does not reinitialised after fitting or removing snow replace the need for vigilance on the part chains. In the event of a malfunction, this warning of the driver. lamp flashes for a few moments, then This system does not avoid the need to remains on, accompanied by an onscreen Under-inflation alert regularly check the tyre pressures (including message. This is signalled by the fixed illumination the spare wheel), especially before a long Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT of this warning lamp, accompanied by an journey. dealer or a qualified workshop.
129 Driving
audible signal and, depending on equipment, the vehicle and conform to the values written on Malfunction The systems cannot exceed the limits of the display of a message. the tyre pressure label. laws of physics. ► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive Check the pressures of the four tyres before steering movements and avoid sudden braking. performing the reinitialisation. Driving aids The illumination of these warning lamps ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do The system does not advise if a pressure is You should hold the steering wheel indicates a fault with the system. so. incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. with both hands, always use the interior and A message appears, accompanied by an audible exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the The loss of pressure detected does not signal. feet close to the pedals and take a break always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Monochrome screen C In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the every two hours. Do not rely on just a visual check. With the vehicle stationary, the system is tyres is no longer assured. reinitialised via the “Personalisation- Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT ► Using a compressor, such as the one in configuration” screen menu. dealer or a qualified workshop. Manoeuvring aids the temporary puncture repair kit, check the ► Select the “Define the vehicle parameters” The driver must always check the pressures of the four tyres when cold. menu then Driving assistance. surroundings of the vehicle before and during ► If it is not possible to make this check Driving and manoeuvring ► Select the “Tyre inflation” function then the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. “Reinitialisation”. mirrors. ► In the event of a puncture, use the aids - General ► Select "Yes" to confirm. temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel Reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible signal. recommendations Radar (depending on equipment). The operation of the radar as well as the Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in Touch screen associated functions may be impaired through The alert is kept active until the system is any circumstances, replace the need for the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in reinitialised. With the vehicle stationary, the system is vigilance on the part of the driver. certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy reinitialised via the Driving/Vehicle touch The driver must comply with the Highway rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. screen menu. Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in Reinitialisation If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact ► In this menu, select the “Vehicle settings” all circumstances and must be able to retake The system must be reinitialised after any a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; tab. control of it at all times. The driver must adapt adjustment to the pressure of one or more tyres, certain types of paint could interfere with the ► In the page, select the "Under-inflation the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and and after changing one or more wheels. initialisation" function. operation of the radar. the state of the road.
► Select "Yes" to confirm. It is the driver's responsibility to constantly The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display of check the traffic, to assess the relative a message and an audible signal. distances and speeds of other vehicles and to Before reinitialising the system, make anticipate their movements before indicating
sure that the pressures of the four tyres and changing lane. are correct for the conditions of use of the
130 Driving
The systems cannot exceed the limits of the Driving aids camera Obstacles may appear further away than they laws of physics. This camera and its associated functions actually are. 6 may be impaired or not work if the windscreen Driving aids area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, Sensors You should hold the steering wheel frosty, covered with snow, damaged or The operation of the sensors as well as with both hands, always use the interior and masked by a sticker. the associated functions may be disturbed exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the On versions with camera alone, this message by sound interference such as that emitted feet close to the pedals and take a break indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, every two hours. "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of user guide". snow or dead leaves on the road or in the In humid and cold weather, demist the Manoeuvring aids event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. windscreen regularly. The driver must always check the When reverse gear is engaged, an audible Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, surroundings of the vehicle before and during signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the may be dirty. (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, mirrors. A front or rear impact to the vehicle can reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, upset the sensors’ settings, which is not alternating shade and light) can also impair always detected by the system: distance Radar detection performance. measurements may be distorted. The operation of the radar as well as the In the event of a windscreen replacement, The sensors do not systematically detect associated functions may be impaired through contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in workshop to recalibrate the camera; or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy otherwise, the operation of the associated Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. driving aids may be disrupted. spots may not be detected or may no longer If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact be detected during the manoeuvre. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound certain types of paint could interfere with the Other cameras The images from the camera(s) waves: pedestrians may not be detected. operation of the radar. displayed on the touch screen or on the
instrument panel may be distorted by the Maintenance relief. Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and In the presence of areas in shade, or in the field of vision of the cameras regularly. conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
lighting, the image may be darkened and with lower contrast.
131 Driving
When washing your vehicle at high pressure, By default, some speed settings are already Speed Limit Recognition For the system to operate correctly when direct the spray from at least 30 cm away memorised. you change country, the units for speed in from the radar, sensors and cameras. and Recommendation the instrument panel must be those for the As a safety measure, the driver must only country you are driving in. change speed settings when stationary. Refer to the General recommendations on the Mats use of driving and manoeuvring aids. The use of mats not approved by The automatic reading of road signs is a PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of Changing a speed setting driving aid system and does not always the speed limiter or cruise control. Speed settings can be activated, display speed limits correctly. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: deactivated, selected and changed in the The speed limit signs present on the road ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. always take priority over the display by the ► never fit one mat on top of another. system. "MEM" button The system is designed to detect signs that
Units of speed conform to the Vienna Convention on road Ensure that the units of speed displayed signs. This system displays the maximum authorised on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are speed in the instrument panel, according to those for the country you are driving in. Specific speed limits, such as those for the speed limits in the country in which you are If this is not the case, when the vehicle is heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. driving, using: stationary, set the display to the required The display of the speed limit in the – Speed limit signs detected by the camera. units of speed so that it complies with what is instrument panel is updated as you pass – Speed limit details from the navigation system authorised locally. a speed limit sign intended for cars (light
mapping. In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer vehicles). With this button, you can select a memorised or a qualified workshop. You should update your navigation speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the mapping regularly in order to receive programmable cruise control. accurate speed limit information from the Activation / Deactivation For more information on the Memorising speeds Speed limiter system. By default, the system is automatically activated or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding at every engine start. This function, used only for the speed limiter section. It is set via the vehicle The units for the speed limit (mph or and programmable cruise control, lets you configuration menu. km/h) depend on the country you are save speed settings that will subsequently be driving in. proposed for the purpose of configuring these This should be taken into account so that you two systems. observe the speed limit. You can memorise multiple speed settings for each of the two systems.
132 Driving
For the system to operate correctly when Information displayed on you change country, the units for speed in 6 the instrument panel must be those for the the instrument panel
country you are driving in. For a suggested maximum speed, the first time The automatic reading of road signs is a that the vehicle exceeds it by more than 3 mph driving aid system and does not always (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 mph (95 km/h)), the speed is display speed limits correctly. displayed flashing for 10 seconds (depending on The speed limit signs present on the road version). always take priority over the display by the system. Operating limits The system is designed to detect signs that The system does not take account of reduced conform to the Vienna Convention on road speed limits, especially those imposed in the
signs. following cases: 1. Detected speed limit indication – Poor weather (rain, snow). Specific speed limits, such as those for or – Atmospheric pollution. heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. 2. End of speed limit indication – Towing. The display of the speed limit in the – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel instrument panel is updated as you pass or snow chains fitted. a speed limit sign intended for cars (light – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture vehicles). repair kit.
– Young drivers. The system is active but is not detecting speed The system may not display the speed limit if it Activation / Deactivation limit information. does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset By default, the system is automatically activated period and in the following situations: at every engine start. – Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard, It is set via the vehicle damaged or bent. configuration menu. – Obsolete or incorrect maps.
On detecting speed limit information, the system displays the value.
133 Driving
Recommendation Information displayed on the Speed limiter instrument panel
Refer to the General recommendations on the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. This system prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
3. Speed limit indication driver (speed setting). In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and 4. Speed memorisation prompt The speed limiter is switched on manually. Recommendation, the driver can select the 5. Current speed setting The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed The speed setting remains in the system limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or memory when the ignition is switched off. cruise control memorisation button. Memorising the speed ► Press button to save the suggested
2once For more information on the Speed speed value. Steering mounted control
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive A message is displayed, confirming the request.
cruise control, refer to the corresponding sections.
► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. Steering-mounted controls The speed limiter/cruise control information is displayed. Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed setting, the system displays the value and "MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you to save it as the new speed setting.
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF (position 0) (9 km/h) between the speed setting and ► Press button 2again to confirm and save the 1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection 2. Reduce the speed setting the speed displayed by the Speed Limit new speed setting. 2. Memorise the speed setting 3. Increase the speed setting Recognition and Recommendation, the After a predetermined period, the screen returns 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed " " symbol is not displayed. MEM to the normal display. setting previously stored Depending on the road conditions, several speeds may be displayed.
134 Driving
Speed limiter 5. Depending on version: Switching on / pausing 6 Display of speed thresholds recorded using Refer to the General recommendations on the Memorising speeds use of driving and manoeuvring aids. or This system prevents the vehicle from Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit exceeding the speed programmed by the Recognition and Recommendation (MEM driver (speed setting). display) ► Turn knob 1 to the "LIMIT" position to select The speed limiter is switched on manually. speed limiter mode; the function is paused. The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). For more information on Memorising speeds The speed setting remains in the system or on the Speed Limit Recognition and memory when the ignition is switched off. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding sections.
Steering mounted control
Information displayed on ► If the speed setting is suitable (last speed the instrument panel setting programmed in the system), press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. ► Pressing button 4 again temporarily interrupts the function (pause).
When the speed setting remains below the vehicle's speed for a prolonged period of time, an audible warning is emitted.
6. Speed limiter on/pause Adjusting the limit speed 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF (position 0) 7. Speed limiter mode selected setting 2. Reduce the speed setting 8. Programmed speed value You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in 3. Increase the speed setting 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit order to set the speed. 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed recognition and recommendation system To modify the limit speed setting based on the setting previously stored (depending on version) vehicle’s current speed: ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
135 Driving
► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the ► Release the accelerator pedal to return to Malfunction Exceeding the programmed speed value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h). below the programmed speed. setting To change the limit speed setting using When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not You can temporarily exceed the speed memorised speeds, via the touch screen: due to action by the driver (in case of a steep setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the ► Press button 5 to display the memorised slope, for example), an audible signal triggers programmed speed flashes).
speed settings. immediately. To return to the speed setting, release the ► Press the touch screen button for the desired accelerator pedal (when the set speed is On a steep descent or in the event of Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then speed setting. reached again, the displayed speed stops sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction. The selection screen closes after a few flashing). not be able to prevent the vehicle from Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT moments. exceeding the speed setting. dealer or a qualified workshop. This setting becomes the new limit speed. Brake if necessary to control the speed of Operating limits To modify the cruise speed setting based on the your vehicle. Never use the system in the following speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition Cruise control - particular situations: and Recommendation, as shown on the recommendations – In an urban area with the risk of instrument panel: pedestrians crossing the road. ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed For the safety of everyone, only use the – In heavy traffic (except versions with the to confirm the memorisation request. cruise control where the driving Stop & Go function).
► Press button 5 again to save the suggested conditions allow running at a constant speed – On winding or steep roads. speed. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the and keeping an adequate safety distance. – On slippery or flooded roads. The speed is immediately shown on the programmed setting, the speed limiter functions Remain vigilant when the cruise control is – In poor weather conditions. instrument panel as the new speed setting. again: the display of the speed setting becomes activated. If you hold one of the speed setting – Driving on a speed circuit. fixed again. modification buttons, a very rapid change in – Driving on a rolling road. Temporarily exceeding the the speed of your vehicle may occur. – When using snow chains, non-slip covers speed setting Switching off When descending a steep hill, the cruise or studded tyres. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: control system cannot prevent the vehicle ► Press the accelerator pedal down fully. the display of information on the speed limiter from exceeding the set speed. Brake if disappears. necessary to control the speed of your Cruise control vehicle. On steep climbs or when towing, the set Refer to the General recommendations on the use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to
speed may not be reached or maintained. Cruise control - particular recommendations. The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and This system automatically keeps the the displayed speed setting flashes. vehicle’s speed at the cruise value
136 Driving
Exceeding the programmed speed programmed by the driver (speed setting), 2. Activation of cruise control at the current setting without using the accelerator pedal. 6 speed / decrease speed setting You can temporarily exceed the speed Cruise control is switched on manually. 3. Activation of cruise control at the current setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph speed / increase speed setting programmed speed flashes). (40 km/h). 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with To return to the speed setting, release the With a manual gearbox, it requires the the speed setting previously stored accelerator pedal (when the set speed is engagement of third gear or higher. 5. Depending on version: reached again, the displayed speed stops With an automatic gearbox, it requires the Display of speed thresholds recorded using flashing). engagement of mode D or of second gear or Memorising speeds higher in mode M. or Operating limits Cruise control remains active after Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit Never use the system in the following changing gear on engines fitted with a Recognition and Recommendation (MEM situations: manual gearbox and Stop & Start. display) – In an urban area with the risk of For more information on Memorising speeds pedestrians crossing the road. Switching off the ignition cancels any or on the Speed Limit Recognition and – In heavy traffic (except versions with the speed setting. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding Stop & Go function). sections. – On winding or steep roads. – On slippery or flooded roads. Steering mounted control Information displayed on – In poor weather conditions. – Driving on a speed circuit. the instrument panel – Driving on a rolling road. – When using snow chains, non-slip covers or studded tyres.
Cruise control
Refer to the General recommendations on the use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to 6. Cruise control pause/resume Cruise control - particular recommendations. 7. Cruise control mode selection 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position 0) This system automatically keeps the 8. Speed setting value vehicle’s speed at the cruise value
137 Driving
9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit Operation of the cruise control can also The selection screen closes after a few Drive Assist Plus recognition and recommendation system be paused temporarily: moments. Only available on versions with electric (depending on version) – by pressing the brake pedal. This setting becomes the new cruise speed. – automatically, if the electronic stability To modify the cruise speed setting using the automatic gearbox (Hybrid). control (ESC) system is triggered. speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition This system automatically adjusts the speed and Switching on/pausing and Recommendation shown on the instrument corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise
panel: Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction Changing the cruise speed ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed with the Lane Positioning Assist. setting to confirm the memorisation request. These two functions must be activated and in operation. The cruise control must be active. ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested This system is especially suitable for driving on To change the cruise speed setting, based on speed. ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position motorways and main roads. the vehicle’s current speed: The speed is immediately shown on the to select cruise control mode; the function is For more information on Adaptive Cruise ► In +/- 1 mph (1.6 km/h) steps, briefly press instrument panel as the new speed setting. paused. Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to button 2 or 3 as often as necessary. the corresponding sections. ► Continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (8 km/h), Switching off press and hold button 2 or 3. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: The system assists the driver by acting the cruise control information disappears from on the steering, acceleration and braking, Pressing and holding button or 2 the screen. within the limits of the laws of physics and the 3 results in a rapid change in the speed capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road ► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control of your vehicle. and save a speed setting when the vehicle has Malfunction infrastructure elements or vehicles present on
reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current the road may not be properly seen or may be As a precaution, we recommend setting speed is saved as the speed setting. poorly interpreted by the camera and radar, a cruise speed similar to the vehicle’s ► Release the accelerator pedal. resulting in an unexpected change in current speed, to avoid any sudden direction, a lack of steering correction and/or
acceleration or deceleration. inappropriate management of acceleration or Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then braking. To change the cruise speed setting using fixed) in the event of a cruise control system memorised speed settings and from the touch
malfunction. screen: ► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT ► Press button 5 to display the memorised Adaptive Cruise Control function. dealer or a qualified workshop. speed settings. ► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of Refer to the General recommendations on the ► Press the touch screen button for the desired the cruise control (ON). use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to speed setting. Cruise control - particular recommendations.
138 Driving
Drive Assist Plus This system automatically maintains the speed If the driver operates a direction indicator of your vehicle at a value which you set (speed to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise 6 Only available on versions with electric setting), while keeping a safe distance from the control allows the vehicle to temporarily automatic gearbox (Hybrid). vehicle in front (target vehicle), and which has approach the vehicle in front to assist the This system automatically adjusts the speed and been set beforehand by the driver. The system overtaking manoeuvre, without ever corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise automatically manages the acceleration and exceeding the speed setting. Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction deceleration of the vehicle. with the Lane Positioning Assist. With the Stop function, the system manages Some vehicles present on the road may These two functions must be activated and in the braking until the vehicle comes to a complete not be properly seen or may be poorly operation. stop. interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a This system is especially suitable for driving on With the Stop & Go function, the system lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment motorways and main roads. manages the braking until the vehicle comes to a of the distances and lead to the vehicle For more information on Adaptive Cruise complete stop and the restarting of the vehicle. inappropriately accelerating or braking. Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to the corresponding sections. The brake lamps come on if the vehicle is slowed down by the system. Steering mounted control The system assists the driver by acting It can be dangerous to drive if the brake on the steering, acceleration and braking, lamps are not in perfect working order. within the limits of the laws of physics and the capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road infrastructure elements or vehicles present on the road may not be properly seen or may be poorly interpreted by the camera and radar,
resulting in an unexpected change in To do so, it has a camera located at the top of direction, a lack of steering correction and/or the windscreen and a radar located in the front inappropriate management of acceleration or bumper. braking. Primarily designed for driving on main 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position0) roads and motorways, this system only 2. Activation of cruise control at the current Adaptive Cruise Control works with moving vehicles driving in the speed / decrease speed setting same direction as your vehicle. 3. Activation of cruise control at the current Refer to the General recommendations on the speed / increase speed setting use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control - particular recommendations.
139 Driving
4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with ► Press button 2 or 3: the current speed control is paused. The driver should depress the To prevent sudden acceleration or the speed setting previously stored becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph accelerator pedal to move off, then, when above deceleration of the vehicle, select a Confirmation of the restarting of the vehicle (30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately 19 mph (30 km/h), reactivate the system by speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's after automatic stop (versions with Stop & Go activated (green display). pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. current speed. function) ► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the With an Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid), 5. Depending on version: speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held following braking that has brought the vehicle to Changing the inter-vehicle distance Display of speed thresholds recorded using pressed). a complete stop, if the traffic conditions do not ► Press 6 to display the distance setting allow the vehicle to begin moving again within Memorising speeds Pressing and holding button 2 or thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then 3 seconds of stopping, press button 4 or the or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed press again to select a threshold. accelerator pedal to move off. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit of the vehicle. After a few seconds, the option is accepted and Recognition and Recommendation (MEM If the driver takes no action after the vehicle will be memorised when the ignition is switched has been stopped, the electric parking brake is display) Pausing / resumption of cruise control off. 6. Display and adjustment of the distance applied automatically after about 5 minutes. ► Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To Temporarily exceeding the speed setting setting to the vehicle in front pause cruise control, it is also possible to: Cruise control remains active after ► Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Distance • shift from mode D to N; changing gear, regardless of the gearbox monitoring and cruise control are deactivated Use • depress the clutch pedal for more than 10 type. while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control Activating the system (pause) seconds; suspended" is displayed. • press the electric parking brake control. When the driver attempts to reactivate ► With the engine running, turn the thumbwheel Deactivating the system ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise cruise control, after the function has been downwards to the position. Cruise ► Turn the thumbwheel upwards to the 1 CRUISE control may have been paused automatically: paused, the message "Activation not possible, 1 OFF control is ready to operate (grey display). position. • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19 unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if Switching on cruise control and setting mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox. reactivation is not possible (safety conditions the speed • when the speed of the engine goes below not met). Displays in the instrument With a manual gearbox, your speed must be 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox. panel between 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). • by triggering of the ESC system. Changing the programmed speed setting The following information can be seen in the With an automatic gearbox, mode D or M must With a manual gearbox, the driver should with the Speed Limit Recognition and instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode.
be selected and your speed must be between 19 depress the accelerator pedal to move off, then, Recommendation function and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). when above 19 mph (30 km/h), reactivate the ► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by With an Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid), system by pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. the function on the instrument panel, then press your speed must be between 0 and 112 mph (0 With an automatic gearbox, following braking again to confirm. and 180 km/h). that has brought the vehicle to a complete stop, the system holds the vehicle stationary; cruise
140 Driving
To prevent sudden acceleration or "Cruise control paused" or "Cruise control deceleration of the vehicle, select a suspended" following a brief acceleration 6 speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's by the driver. current speed. "Cruise control active", no vehicle detected. Changing the inter-vehicle distance "Cruise control paused", vehicle detected. ► Press 6 to display the distance setting thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then "Cruise control active", vehicle detected. press again to select a threshold. 7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) After a few seconds, the option is accepted and 8. Cruise control active (colour not in grey) "Take back control" (orange). will be memorised when the ignition is switched 9. Value of the speed setting off. 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► Brake or accelerate, depending on the Recognition and Recommendation context. Temporarily exceeding the speed setting 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with "Take back control" (red). ► Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Distance automatic gearbox) monitoring and cruise control are deactivated ► Take back control of the vehicle while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control immediately: the system cannot manage the suspended" is displayed. current driving situation. Deactivating the system "Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable". The system refuses to ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF position. 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting activate cruise control, as the necessary 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the conditions are not fulfilled. Displays in the instrument system Stop function panel "Cruise control paused" (for a few The following information can be seen in the Messages and alerts seconds). instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode. To benefit from the following information on the The system has brought the vehicle to a instrument panel, select the "DRIVING" display complete stop and is holding it immobilised: mode. cruise control is paused. The driver must accelerate to move off again, The display of these messages or alerts then reactivate cruise control. is not sequential.
141 Driving
Stop & Go function Malfunction "To move off again, press the If the cruise control malfunctions, accelerator pedal or press dashes are displayed instead of the II button” (button 4). the cruise control speed setting.
The system has brought the vehicle to a complete stop. – Vehicles crossing your lane. – When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your If this warning lamp comes on, Within 3 seconds, the vehicle gradually and – Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. vehicle and the one in front. accompanied by an alert message and an automatically begins moving again. Situations in which the driver must pause the audible signal, this confirms the malfunction. Pay particular attention: After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or cruise control system: Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT press button 4 to move off again. – When motorcycles are present and dealer or a qualified workshop. when there are vehicles staggered across the While the vehicle is immobilised, the traffic lane. following recommendations apply: – When entering a tunnel or crossing a Lane positioning assist – The driver should not leave the vehicle. bridge. Refer to the General recommendations on the – Do not open the boot. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. – Do not drop off or pick up passengers. If any of the following malfunctions – Do not engage reverse gear. occurs, do not use the system: – Vehicles in a tight bend. – Following an impact on the windscreen When moving off again, watch out for – When approaching a roundabout. close to the camera or on the front bumper.
cyclists, pedestrians and animals, as – Brake lamps not working. they may not be detected properly.
If the vehicle has undergone any of the Only available on versions with electric Operating limits following modifications, do not use the automatic gearbox (Hybrid). system: Using a camera located at the top of the Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog – Carrying long objects on roof bars. windscreen, the system identifies lane markings or moderate rainfall. – When following a narrow vehicle. – Towing. and steers the vehicle inside this lane, keeping it Certain situations cannot be managed by the Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. – Use of the "space-saver" type spare wheel in the lateral position chosen by the driver. system and require driver intervention. Situations in which the driver is prompted to (depending on version). This function is primarily suitable for driving on Cases of non-detection by the system: immediately resume control: – Front end of the vehicle modified (for motorways and main roads. – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle example by adding long-range headlamps or – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, in front of you. painting the front bumper). Conditions for operation etc.). – Adaptive Cruise Control active.
142 Driving
Malfunction – Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides. (orange colour) – ESC system operational. System malfunction. 6 If the cruise control malfunctions, – ASR/CDS systems activated. If the driver no longer wishes to use the system dashes are displayed instead of – No trailer detected. for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the the cruise control speed setting. – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. button again. If this warning lamp comes on, – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the accompanied by an alert message and an – Direction indicators not activated. symbol disappears from the instrument panel. audible signal, this confirms the malfunction. The system status is saved when the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT Activation/Deactivation ignition is switched off. dealer or a qualified workshop.
Cruise control Lane positioning assist The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. Refer to the General recommendations on the When cruise control is activated, the symbol is use of driving and manoeuvring aids. displayed in green: by small steering actions,
the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane. This position is not necessarily the centre of the ► With the Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop & lane. Go function activated, press this button. The driver can feel movements in the steering The action is confirmed by:
wheel. – The indicator lamp in the button lighting up Only available on versions with electric The driver can change the position of the vehicle green. automatic gearbox (Hybrid). at any time, by turning the steering wheel, which – The following symbol being displayed on the Using a camera located at the top of the suspends the function. The driver positions the instrument panel. windscreen, the system identifies lane markings vehicle where they wish to in the lane. When The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel and steers the vehicle inside this lane, keeping it the driver feels that the vehicle’s position is depends on the operating status of the system: in the lateral position chosen by the driver. appropriate, they maintain it until the function (grey colour) This function is primarily suitable for driving on is reactivated. The system regains control by One or more operating conditions is not motorways and main roads. regulating on the new defined position. met; the system is paused. (green colour) Conditions for operation All operating conditions are met; the – Adaptive Cruise Control active. system is active.
143 Driving
Pausing/Suspending the triggers a series of gradual alerts and then will reactivate itself once the operating conditions system deactivates itself if there is no response from are met again. the driver. In response to action by the driver: The driver must act promptly if they suspension believe that the traffic conditions or the If the function is suspended due to the – Activation of the direction indicators. state of the road surface require their prolonged release of the force holding – Travelling outside the lane limits. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to the steering wheel, you must reactivate it by – Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or temporarily suspend system operation. Any pressing the button again. dynamic action on the steering wheel. action on the brake pedal that results in cruise – Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause control being paused will also cause the Automatic pause until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator system to be paused. – Triggering of the ESC. pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is – Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane limit depressed). If the system detects that the driver is not markings. In this case, the Active lane departure – Pausing of the cruise control. holding the wheel firmly enough, it warning function can take over, and the system – Deactivation of the DSC/ASR systems. Driving situations and related alerts The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments thumbwheel
Off CRUISE Cruise control paused; lane positioning assist not active.
(grey) (grey)
Off CRUISE Cruise control active; lane positioning assist not active.
(green) (grey)
144 Driving
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments 6 thumbwheel
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active, operates normally (correction is executed at the steering
wheel). (green) (green)
Green CRUISE 70 Drive Assist Plus paused.
(grey) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (green)/(grey) (grey)
Green OFF or LIMIT Cruise control not active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (grey) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus suspended: cruise control and lane positioning assist are suspended.
(green)/(grey) (grey)
Messages Driving situations "Activate cruise control to use the lane positioning assist system" Activation of lane positioning assist while cruise control is not active. "Unsuitable conditions, Activation on stand-by" Activation of lane positioning assist while not all conditions are met. "Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or without applying any force.
145 Driving
Messages Driving situations "Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist. "Retake control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.
Operating limits The system must not be activated in the following situations: Active Safety Brake The Lane Keeping Assist system may – Driving with a "space-saver" type spare with Distance Alert and issue an alert when the vehicle is wheel. Intelligent emergency
travelling in a long straight lane on a smooth – When towing, especially with an road surface even if the driver is holding the unconnected or unapproved trailer. braking assistance The vehicle has a camera located at the top of – Poor weather conditions. steering wheel properly. Refer to the General recommendations on the the windscreen and, depending on version, a – Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of use of driving and manoeuvring aids. radar located in the front bumper. The system may fail to operate or may produce aquaplaning, snow, ice). unsuitable corrections to the steering in the – Driving on racing circuits. This system does not avoid the need for following situations: – Driving on a rolling road. vigilance on the part of the driver. – Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, This system is designed to assist the driver
snowfall, rain, fog). and improve road safety. This system: – Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, Malfunction It is the driver's responsibility to continuously – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of low sun, reflections on a wet road surface, A system malfunction is indicated monitor the state of the traffic, observing the collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian. leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). by the Service warning lamp driving regulations. – reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a – Windscreen area in front of the camera being coming on and this (orange) symbol, collision or limit its severity. dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, accompanied by an alert message and an As soon as the system detects a This system is comprised of three functions: damaged or masked by a sticker. audible signal. potential obstacle, it prepares the braking – Distance Alert. – Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow, Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT circuit in case automatic braking is needed. – Intelligent emergency braking assistance. mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). dealer or a qualified workshop. This may cause a slight noise and a slight – Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency – Travelling in a tight bend. sensation of deceleration. braking).
– Winding roads. – Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. Deactivation / Activation By default, the system is automatically activated at every engine start.
146 Driving
It is set via the vehicle It can be dangerous to drive if the brake configuration menu. lamps are not in perfect working order. 6 Deactivation of the system is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp, It is possible that warnings are not given, accompanied by the display of a message. are given too late or seem unjustified. The driver must always stay in control of the Operating conditions and vehicle and be prepared to react at any time limits to avoid an accident. Vehicle moving forward.
ESC system in working order. After an impact, the function The vehicle has a camera located at the top of DSC/ASR systems activated. automatically stops operating. Contact a the windscreen and, depending on version, a Seat belts fastened for all passengers. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to radar located in the front bumper. Stabilised speed on unwinding roads. have the system checked. In the following cases, deactivating the system This system does not avoid the need for via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: vigilance on the part of the driver. – Towing a trailer. Distance Alert This system is designed to assist the driver – Carrying long objects on roof bars. It warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of and improve road safety. – Vehicles with snow chains fitted. collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian It is the driver's responsibility to continuously – Before using an automatic car wash, with the present in their traffic lane. monitor the state of the traffic, observing the engine running. driving regulations. Modifying the alert trigger threshold – Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in a workshop. This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity As soon as the system detects a – Towed vehicle, engine running. with which the function warns of the risk of potential obstacle, it prepares the braking – Damaged front bumper (version with radar). collision. circuit in case automatic braking is needed. – Following an impact to the windscreen close to The threshold is set via the vehicle This may cause a slight noise and a slight the detection camera. configuration menu. sensation of deceleration. ► Select one of the three pre-defined The system is automatically deactivated thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close". once the use of a different diameter The last threshold selected is memorised when Deactivation / Activation "space-saver" type spare wheel is detected, the ignition is switched off. By default, the system is automatically activated or if a fault with the two lateral brake lamps is at every engine start. detected.
147 Driving
Operation This assistance will only be provided if the driver – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph Malfunction presses the brake pedal. (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected. Depending on the degree of risk of collision In the event of a fault with the system, you – The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and detected by the system and the alert threshold are alerted by the fixed illumination of this chosen by the driver, several different levels Active Safety Brake 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with
warning lamp, accompanied by the display of a camera alone) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions of alert may be triggered and displayed in the message and an audible signal. with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified is detected. They take account of the vehicle dynamics, the workshop to have the system checked. speed of your vehicle and the one in front, the This warning lamp flashes (for about environmental conditions and the operation of 10 seconds) once the function is acting on the vehicle (cornering, actions on the pedals, the vehicle's brakes. Distraction detection etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment. With an automatic gearbox, in the event of Refer to the General recommendations on the Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, automatic emergency braking until the vehicle use of driving and manoeuvring aids. signalling that the vehicle in front is very comes to a complete stop, keep the brake Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least close. pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from every 2 hours. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. starting off again. Depending on version, the function comprises Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic either the "Driver Attention Alert" system alone signalling that a collision is imminent. emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert by The message "Brake!" is displayed. complete stop, the engine may stall. camera" system.
Where the speed of your vehicle is too The driver can maintain control of the These systems are in no way designed
high approaching another vehicle, the vehicle at any time by sharply turning the to keep the driver awake or to prevent This function, also called automatic emergency first level of alert may not be displayed: the steering wheel and/or pressing the the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. braking, intervenes following the alerts if the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. accelerator pedal. It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling driver does not react quickly enough and does Important: the level 1 alert is never displayed tired. not operate the vehicle's brakes. for a stationary obstacle or when the "Close" Operation of the function may be felt by It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a trigger threshold has been selected. slight vibration in the brake pedal. collision where the driver fails to react. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the Activation / Deactivation It is set via the vehicle Operation automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 Intelligent emergency seconds. configuration menu. The system operates under the following The state of the system stays in the memory braking assistance conditions: If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid a when the ignition is switched off. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph collision, this system will supplement the braking, (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. within the limits of the laws of physics.
148 Driving Malfunction Driver Attention Alert 6 In the event of a fault with the system, you The system triggers an alert as soon as it are alerted by the fixed illumination of this detects that the driver has not taken a warning lamp, accompanied by the display of a break after two hours of driving at a speed above message and an audible signal. 40 mph (65 km/h). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified This alert is issued via the display of a message workshop to have the system checked. encouraging the driver to take a break, accompanied by an audible signal. Distraction detection If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert
is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. Refer to the General recommendations on the The system resets itself if one of the following Using a camera placed at the top of the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. conditions is met: windscreen, the system assesses the Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least – With the engine running, the vehicle has been driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by every 2 hours. stationary for more than 15 minutes. identifying variations in trajectory compared to Depending on version, the function comprises – The ignition has been switched off for a few the lane markings. either the "Driver Attention Alert" system alone minutes. This system is particularly suited to fast roads or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert by – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). camera" system. door is opened. At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle “Take care!” message, accompanied by an to keep the driver awake or to prevent drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the audible signal. the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. system goes into standby. After three first-level alerts, the system triggers It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling The driving time is counted again once the a further alert with the message "Dangerous tired. speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). driving: take a break", accompanied by a more pronounced audible signal. Activation / Deactivation Driver Attention Alert by In certain driving conditions (poor road surface or strong winds), the system may It is set via the vehicle camera give alerts independent of the driver's level of configuration menu. Depending on version, the "Driver Attention Alert" vigilance. The state of the system stays in the memory may be combined with the "Driver Attention Alert when the ignition is switched off. by camera".
149 Driving
The following situations may interfere Activation/Deactivation Using a camera located at the top of the Operation with the operation of the system or windscreen to identify lane markings on the road, This function cannot be deactivated on versions Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle prevent it from working: the system corrects the trajectory of the vehicle without a touch screen. involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, while alerting the driver if it detects a risk of This function is set via the Driving / detected, it makes the correction to the trajectory mud) or multiple (roadworks); unintentionally crossing a line. Vehicle touch screen menu. required to return the vehicle to its initial path. – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings This system is particularly useful on motorways The status of the system stays in the memory The driver will notice a turning movement of the not detected); and main roads.
when switching off the ignition. steering wheel. – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. This warning lamp flashes during Detection trajectory correction. If an unexpected change of direction is The driver can prevent the correction by Lane Departure Warning detected, this warning lamp flashes in the
keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during instrument panel accompanied by an audible System an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). signal. Refer to the The correction is interrupted if the direction General recommendations on the No warning is transmitted while the direction Conditions for operation . indicators are operated. use of driving and manoeuvring aids indicator is activated and for approximately 20 – Vehicle speed between 43 and 112 mph (70 This system, using a camera which recognises seconds after the direction indicator is switched and 180 km/h). solid or broken lines, detects the involuntary off. – Traffic lane with one or more (continuous or crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on broken) ground markings. Driving situations and related alerts the ground. Malfunction – Steering wheel held in both hands. To receive all the necessary information on the instrument panel, first select the "DRIVING" display mode. If the driver's attention drops and the speed – Direction indicators not activated. In the event of a malfunction, this warning The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h), the system – ESC system activated and operational. lamp comes on on the instrument panel, These alerts are not displayed sequentially. triggers a warning if there is an unexpected accompanied by the display of a message and The system helps the driver only if there change of direction. Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments an audible signal. is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally This system is particularly useful on motorways message Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It and main roads. OFF Function deactivated. workshop. does not manage the safe driving distance,
vehicle speed or brakes. The driver must hold the steering wheel Active Lane Keeping (grey) with both hands in a way that allows control Assistance to be maintained in circumstances where
Refer to the General recommendations on the the system is not able to intervene (if lane use of driving and manoeuvring aids. markings disappear, for example).
150 Driving
Operation However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring System system activated, if the driver starts changing 6 Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle lanes and another vehicle is detected in the involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct detected, it makes the correction to the trajectory the trajectory of the vehicle even though the required to return the vehicle to its initial path. direction indicators are on. The driver will notice a turning movement of the For more information on the steering wheel. Blind Spot , refer to the corresponding This warning lamp flashes during Monitoring System section.
trajectory correction. While the direction indicators are on and for If the system detects that the driver is not The driver can prevent the correction by a few seconds after switching them off, the holding the wheel firmly enough during keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during system considers that any change of trajectory an automatic correction of trajectory, it an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). is voluntary and no correction is triggered during interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered The correction is interrupted if the direction this period. to encourage the driver to take back control of indicators are operated. the vehicle.
Driving situations and related alerts To receive all the necessary information on the instrument panel, first select the "DRIVING" display mode. The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. These alerts are not displayed sequentially.
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments message
OFF Function deactivated.
(grey)
151 Driving
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments message
ON System active, conditions not met: – speed below 43 mph (70 km/h),
– no lane marking recognised, (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC system triggered, – "sport" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space-
saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)
ON Lane marking detection. Speed above 43 mph (70 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the Operating limits risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line).
The system goes into standby automatically in
the following cases: (orange)/(green) – ESC deactivated or operation triggered. – Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h) or greater than 112 mph (180 km/h), – Electrical connection of a trailer. – Use of a"space-saver" spare wheel detected (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of the system is recommended). – Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on the brake or accelerator pedal. – Driving where there are no lane markings. – Activation of the direction indicators.
152 Driving
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments 6 message
ON – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system detects that the driver has not held the steering wheel for a few
seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to (orange)/(green) the driver.
"Take control of the – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines vehicle." that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line will be crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must provide additional trajectory adjustment. The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple corrections are performed in quick succession. The warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver responds. This message may also be displayed if you have your hands on the steering wheel.
Operating limits – Crossing the inside line on a bend. Risk of undesirable operation – Driving in a tight corner. The system goes into standby automatically in We recommend deactivating the system in the – Inactivity by the driver detected during the following cases: following driving situations: correction. – ESC deactivated or operation triggered. – Driving on damaged, unstable or very slippery – Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h) or greater The following situations may interfere (ice) road surfaces, than 112 mph (180 km/h), with the operation of the system or – Poor weather conditions. – Electrical connection of a trailer. prevent it from working: – Driving on a speed circuit. – Use of a"space-saver" spare wheel detected – Insufficient contrast between the road – Driving on a rolling road. (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of surface and the side of the road (e.g. shade). the system is recommended). – Lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud) Activation / Deactivation – Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on or multiple (roadworks, etc.), This function is set via the Driving / the brake or accelerator pedal. – Running close to the vehicle in front (the Vehicle touch screen menu. – Driving where there are no lane markings. lane markings may not be detected). The state of the system stays in the memory – Activation of the direction indicators. – Roads that are narrow, winding. when switching off the ignition.
153 Driving
Malfunction – The speed of your vehicle must be between 7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h). In the event of a system – When overtaking a vehicle, the speed malfunction, these warning lamps difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). come on on the instrument panel, accompanied – When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed by an onscreen message and an audible signal. difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h). Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT – Traffic is flowing normally. dealer or a qualified workshop. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp – Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of that appears in the door mirror on the side in time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in Blind Spot Monitoring question: the blind spot. System – immediately, when being overtaken; – You are driving on a straight or slightly curved – after a delay of about one second, when road. Refer to the General recommendations on the overtaking a vehicle slowly. – Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan,
use of driving and manoeuvring aids. etc.
Activation / Deactivation No alert is triggered in the following conditions: It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch Operating limits – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked screen menu. vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). When the function is activated, this – Oncoming traffic. warning lamp comes on in the instrument – Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner. panel. – When overtaking or being overtaken by a very When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) that is detected comes on in each mirror to indicate that the in the rear blind spot but is also present in the system is activated. driver’s front field of vision. This system includes sensors, placed on the The state of the system stays in the memory – When overtaking quickly. sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of when switching off the ignition. – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or a the potentially dangerous presence of another The system is automatically deactivated stationary object. vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot when towing with a towing device – If the Park Assist function is activated. areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the approved by PEUGEOT. driver's field of vision). Malfunction
Conditions for operation In the event of a malfunction, this – All vehicles are moving in the same direction warning lamp flashes for a few and in adjacent lanes. moments in the instrument panel, accompanied
154 Driving
by the Service warning lamp coming on and the These two functions must be activated and in display of a message. operation. 6 Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 workshop to have the system checked. and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h). These functions are especially suitable for The system may suffer temporary driving on motorways and main roads. interference in certain weather conditions For more information on the Active Lane (rain, hail, etc.). Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot In particular, driving on a wet surface or Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding moving from a dry area to a wet area can sections. cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle). Parking sensors In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
Refer to the General recommendations on the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. No alert is triggered in the following conditions: use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Take care not to cover the warning zone in – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked the door mirrors or the detection zones on the vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels – Oncoming traffic. or other objects; they may hamper correct – Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner. operation of the system. – When overtaking or being overtaken by a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) that is detected in the rear blind spot but is also present in the driver’s front field of vision. Active Blind Spot Using sensors located in the bumper, this – When overtaking quickly. Monitoring System system signals the proximity of obstacles – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in front and behind are confused with a lorry or a mirror on the side in question, a correction of their field of detection. stationary object. trajectory will be felt if you attempt to cross – If the Park Assist function is activated. a lane marking with the direction indicator Rear parking sensors Malfunction activated, to help you avoid a collision. The system is switched on by engaging reverse This system is the combination of the Active gear, which is confirmed by an audible signal. In the event of a malfunction, this Lane Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot The system is switched off when disengaging warning lamp flashes for a few Monitoring System. reverse gear. moments in the instrument panel, accompanied
155 Driving
Audible assistance Visual assistance The sound emitted by the speaker (front Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified or rear) locates the obstacle relative to workshop to have the system checked. the vehicle, whether in front of or behind it on its path. Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 Refer to the General recommendations on the
Deactivation / Activation use of driving and manoeuvring aids. It is set via the vehicle
configuration menu. The system signals the presence of obstacles The state of the system stays in the memory within the sensors’ detection zone. when the ignition is switched off. The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of The rear parking sensors system will be which increases as the vehicle approaches the deactivated automatically if a trailer or
obstacle. bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device This supplements the audible signal by When the distance between the vehicle and installed in accordance with the displaying bars on the screen that represent the the obstacle becomes less than about thirty manufacturer's recommendations. distance between the obstacle and the vehicle centimetres, the audible signal becomes
(white: more distant, orange: close, red: very The parking sensors are deactivated while the continuous. close). Park Assist function is measuring a space. With the engine running, these systems allow The sound emitted by the speaker (right or When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" For more information on the Park Assist, refer views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is symbol is displayed on the screen. to the corresponding section. be displayed on the touch screen using one located. camera for the Visiopark 1 and two cameras for Adjusting the audible signal Front parking sensors Operating limits Visiopark 2. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing front parking sensors are triggered when an affecting distance measurements. this button opens the window for adjusting the obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the volume of the audible signal. vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). Malfunction Front parking sensor operation is suspended if In the event of a malfunction when shifting the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in to reverse, this warning lamp comes on forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected on the instrument panel, accompanied by the or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). display of a message and an audible signal (short beep).
156 Driving
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified • "Zoom view". workshop to have the system checked. • "AUTO view". 6 The display is immediately updated with the type
of view selected.
Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 The state of the function is not saved when the Refer to the General recommendations on the ignition is switched off. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Principle of operation
The screen is divided into two parts with a contextual view and a view from above the
vehicle in its close surroundings.
The parking sensors supplement the information Using one or two cameras, the close With the engine running, these systems allow on the view from above the vehicle. surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to Various contextual views may be displayed: manoeuvring at low speed. be displayed on the touch screen using one – Standard view. An image from above your vehicle in its close camera for the Visiopark 1 and two cameras for – 180° view. surroundings is reconstructed (represented Visiopark 2. – Zoom view. between the brackets) in real time and as the AUTO mode is activated by default. manoeuvre progresses. In this mode, the system chooses to display the It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when best view (standard or zoom). parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle You can change the type of view at any time to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the during a manoeuvre. vehicle remains stationary for too long. ► Press the button in the bottom left-hand With Visiopark 2, the image is created using corner of the touch screen. both cameras, when going forward and when ► Select the type of view: reversing. • "Standard view". When the function is activated, it is possible • "180° view". that the view from above is not displayed. If
157 Driving
the system is activated when the vehicle has AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than already moved, the view from above can be fully vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are. displayed. changes according to the position of the steering It is important to monitor the sides of the wheel. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the Visiopark 1 The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm mirrors. from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 Parking sensors also provide additional Rear vision represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. information about the area around the vehicle. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. 180° view
Zoom view
This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view changes from the rear view (standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is approached at the level of the red line (less than
30 cm) during a manoeuvre. To activate the camera, located on the tailgate, engage reverse and keep the speed of the Standard view vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). The system is deactivated: – Automatically, at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), The camera records the vehicle's surroundings – Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. during the manoeuvre in order to create a – Upon changing out of reverse gear (the image view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be remains displayed for 7 seconds). The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left parking space, making it possible to see the This view is available with AUTO mode or in the corner of the touch screen. approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. view selection menu. This view is not recommended for carrying out a
complete manoeuvre. The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. screen.
158 Driving
Obstacles may appear further away than This view is only available via the view selection – by pressing the white arrow in the upper-left they actually are. menu. corner of the touch screen. 6 It is important to monitor the sides of the If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the Visiopark 2 the towball, the area behind the vehicle mirrors. The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted in on the view from above goes dark. Parking sensors also provide additional the grille, and a camera at the rear, located close The surroundings are reconstructed by the information about the area around the vehicle. to the tailgate opening control. front camera only. Using these cameras, the system displays the 180° view vehicle's near surroundings on the touch screen, The rear vision views are similar to those for the
offering views from the rear of the vehicle (rear Visiopark 1. vision) when reverse gear is engaged and views For more information on the Visiopark 1, refer to from the front of the vehicle (front vision) when the corresponding section. the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged. Front and rear vision Rear vision
With the engine running and the speed The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a The system activates automatically when below 12 mph (20 km/h), the system is parking space, making it possible to see the reverse gear is engaged. activated via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. The system is deactivated: menu: This view is not recommended for carrying out a – automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h). ► Select "Panoramic visual aid". complete manoeuvre. – when shifting out of reverse (the rear view AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. image is replaced by the front view image after vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a 7 seconds).
159 Driving
gear engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is Standard view Zoom view 180° view engaged. The system is deactivated: – Automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h) (the image disappears temporarily from 12 mph (20 km/h)). – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left corner of the touch screen.
AUTO mode
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed on The camera records the vehicle's surroundings the screen. during the manoeuvre in order to create a The orange lines 1 represent the width of your view from above the front of the vehicle in its
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
This mode is activated by default. changes according to the position of the steering manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. Using sensors in the front bumper, the automatic wheel. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking view changes from the front view (standard) to The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm view selection menu. space in forward gear, making it possible to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is from the front bumper; the two orange lines 3 see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and Obstacles may appear further away than approached during a manoeuvre. and 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. cyclists. they actually are. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the This view is not recommended for carrying out a It is important to check the sides of the view selection menu. complete manoeuvre. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right mirrors. C. The parking sensors also supplement the This view is available only from the view information on the vehicle's surroundings. selection menu. Park Assist Refer to the General recommendations on the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
160 Driving
180° view This system provides active parking assistance: STOP mode, activation of Park Assist restarts it detects a parking space then operates the the engine. 6 steering system to park in this space. With a manual gearbox, the driver manages the The Park Assist system takes control of accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch. the steering for a maximum of 4 With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the manoeuvring cycles. It is deactivated after driver manages the accelerator, brakes and these 4 cycles. If the vehicle is not positioned gears. correctly, take back control to complete the During phases of entry into and exit from a manoeuvre. parking space, the system provides visual and audible information to the driver in order to make The sequence of manoeuvres and the the manoeuvres safe. Several forward and driving instructions are displayed in the reverse manoeuvres may be required. instrument panel. At any time, the driver can take back control by The assistance is activated: the display holding the steering wheel.
of this symbol and a speed limit indicate that the steering manoeuvres are
controlled by the system: do not touch the The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking steering wheel. space in forward gear, making it possible to The assistance is deactivated: the see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and display of this symbol indicates that the cyclists. steering manoeuvres are no longer controlled This view is not recommended for carrying out a by the system: take over the steering. complete manoeuvre. It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right The Park Assist system provides assistance for Activation of Park Assist deactivates the C. the following manoeuvres: Blind Spot Monitoring System. This view is available only from the view A. Entry into a "parallel" parking space selection menu. B. Exit from a "parallel" parking space The Parking sensors function is not C. Entry into a "bay" parking space available during parking space measurement. It intervenes later when Park Assist The Park Assist system cannot operate manoeuvring to warn that the vehicle is Refer to the General recommendations on the with the engine switched off. approaching an obstacle: the audible signal use of driving and manoeuvring aids. When Park Assist is activated, it prevents Stop & Start from going into STOP mode. In
161 Driving
becomes continuous when the obstacle is During manoeuvring phases, the steering ► Engage reverse gear, release the When several successive spaces are less than 30 centimetres away. wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold steering wheel and move without found, the vehicle will be directed If the Parking sensors function has the steering wheel or put your hands between exceeding the speed of 5 mph (7 km/h). towards the last one. been deactivated, it will be automatically the spokes of the steering wheel. The assisted parking manoeuvre is in reactivated during the assisted manoeuvring Beware of any object likely to block the progress. ► Move forwards slowly until a message phases. manoeuvre (e.g. loose clothing, scarves, ties) ► Without exceeding 5 mph (7 km/h), is displayed, accompanied by an audible - risk of injury! 7 move forwards and backwards, aided by signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. ► Engage reverse gear, release the During parking and exit from parking the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, steering wheel and move without manoeuvres, the Visiopark 1 - Visiopark until the end of the manoeuvre is indicated. Assistance with "parallel" exceeding the speed of 5 mph (7 km/h). 2 functions may come into operation. They The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed The assisted parking manoeuvre is in allow better monitoring of the surroundings of parking manoeuvres by a message and an audible signal. progress. the vehicle, by displaying additional ► When parking, select "Park Assist" in The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake ► Without exceeding 5 mph (7 km/h), information in the touch screen. the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu control. 7 follow the instructions and the warnings For more information on the Visiopark to activate the function. from the "Parking sensors" system, until the end 1 - Visiopark 2 functions, refer to the ► Limit the vehicle speed to a maximum Assistance with "bay" of the manoeuvre is indicated. corresponding section. of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select “Enter parking manoeuvres The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed parallel parking space” on the touch screen. ► When parking, select “Park Assist” in by a message and an audible signal. In some circumstances, the sensors may To enter a parking space, the system the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake not detect small obstacles located in their does not identify spaces that are clearly to activate the function. control. blind spots. smaller or larger than the vehicle. ► Limit the vehicle speed to a maximum Any object exceeding the size of the vehicle of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select “Enter During a "bay" parking manoeuvre, the (e.g. roof ladder, towball) is not taken ► Operate the direction indicator on the bay parking space” on the touch screen. Park Assist system is automatically into account by the Park Assist during a parking side chosen to activate the ► Operate the direction indicator on the deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is manoeuvre. measurement function. The vehicle should drive parking side chosen to activate the within 50 cm of an obstacle. at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from measurement function. The vehicle should drive Always check the surroundings of the the row of parked vehicles. at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from Assistance with "parallel" ► Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20 the row of parked vehicles. vehicle before starting a manoeuvre. 20 If the lateral distance between the vehicle and km/h) following the instructions until the ► Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20 parking exit manoeuvres the space is too great, the system may not be system finds an available space. 20 km/h) following the instructions until the ► To leave a "parallel" parking space, switch able to measure the space. ► Move forwards slowly until a message system finds an available space. the engine on. is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
162 Driving
When several successive spaces are ► With the vehicle stationary, select – after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during a found, the vehicle will be directed "Park Assist" in the Driving/Vehicle manoeuvre. 6 towards the last one. touch screen menu to activate the function. – if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is ► Press "Exit parking slot" on the touch triggered. ► Move forwards slowly until a message screen. – if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the is displayed, accompanied by an audible ► Operate the direction indicator for the authorised limit. signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. exit side chosen. – when the driver interrupts the rotation of the ► Engage reverse gear, release the ► Engage reverse or forward gear steering wheel. steering wheel and move without and release the steering wheel. – after 4 manoeuvring cycles. exceeding the speed of 5 mph (7 km/h). The assisted parking manoeuvre is in – if one of the front wheels encounters an The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. obstacle. progress. ► Without exceeding 3 mph (5 km/h), Deactivation is confirmed by a message and an ► Without exceeding 5 mph (7 km/h), 5 7 move forwards and backwards, aided by audible signal. follow the instructions and the warnings the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, The driver should then take back control of the from the "Parking sensors" system, until the end until the end of the manoeuvre is indicated. vehicle's steering. of the manoeuvre is indicated. The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's If the system is deactivated during a The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed front wheels are clear of the parking space. manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate by a message and an audible signal. The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed it to repeat the measurement. The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake by a message and an audible signal. control. The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake During a "bay" parking manoeuvre, the control. Deactivation Park Assist system is automatically The system is automatically deactivated: deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is Deactivation – when towing a trailer, connected electrically; within 50 cm of an obstacle. The system is deactivated via the Driving / – if the driver's door is opened; Vehicle touch screen menu. – if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph The system is automatically deactivated: (70 km/h). Assistance with "parallel" – when the ignition is switched off. To switch the system off for a prolonged period, parking exit manoeuvres – if the engine stalls. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► To leave a "parallel" parking space, switch – if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. workshop. the engine on. – on opening the driver's door. – if no manoeuvre is performed within 5 minutes of selecting the type of manoeuvre.
163 Driving
Malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs during use, indicated by this warning lamp coming on, it causes the function to deactivate. In the event of a malfunction, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In the event of a power steering malfunction, this warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by a warning message. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
164
PEUGEOT & TOTAL PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE!
For over 20 years, the PEUGEOT TOTAL partnership has set new performance standards in achieving success in the toughest conditions, with victories in the Le Mans 24 Hours, the World Rally Championship and the Dakar Rally. To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams chose TOTAL QUARTZ, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most extreme conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ INEO FIRST is a very high-performance lubricant developed jointly by the Peugeot and Total R&D teams. Specially formulated for the engines in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating and an audible signal. When it first comes on,
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use about 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank.
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp more than 50 % full. appears every time the ignition is switched on, Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid accompanied by an onscreen message and containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle an audible signal. When driving, this message respectively. under shelter (heated garage). and audible signal are repeated with increasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. Travelling abroad You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s running out of fuel. and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. For more information on Running out of fuel 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section. respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, Stop & Start occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct Never refuel with the engine in STOP conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine.
mode; you must switch off the ignition. For all additional information, consult a dealer.
Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling Refuelling standard. Additions of fuel must be of at least 10 litres, in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel Fuel tank capacity: Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, approximately 53 litres (Diesel by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk or petrol) or 42 litres (Hybrid). normal, resulting from the sealing of the fuel of damage to the engine and fuel system). system. Fuel tank capacity: To refuel in complete safety: approximately 56 litres. The only fuel additives authorised for use ► You must switch off the engine. are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) or B715000 (Diesel) standards. Reserve level: approximately 6 litres. Low fuel level Diesel at low temperature When the low fuel level is reached, this At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the warning lamp comes on on the instrument formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel panel, accompanied by an onscreen message
166 Practical information
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the When a petrol filler nozzle is inserted into the vehicle, you must have the fuel tank fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into 7 drained and filled with the correct fuel before contact with the flap. The system remains closed starting the engine. and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a filler nozzle. device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. It remains possible to use a fuel jerrycan For petrol engines, you must use unleaded to fill the tank. fuel. The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded Travelling abroad petrol nozzles only. As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence Misfuel prevention (Diesel) of the misfuel prevention device may make (Depending on country of sale.) refuelling impossible. This mechanical device prevents filling the tank Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to ► With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear- of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle central part of the filler flap to open it. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention is suitable for the distribution equipment of the ► Take care to select the pump that delivers the device appears when the filler cap is removed. countries visited. correct fuel type for the vehicle's engine (see a reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). Operation
► Turn the filler cap to the left. ► Remove the filler cap and hang it on its Hybrid system carrier (on the filler flap). ► Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as Electrical system far as possible before starting to refuel (risk of The electrical system of the hybrid system is blowback). identified by orange cables and its elements are ► Fill the tank. marked with this symbol:
Do not continue past the third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause malfunctions. ► Refit the filler cap. ► Turn it to the right. The hybrid engine uses a voltage of between 240 V and 400 V. This system
► Push the filler flap to close it. may be hot during and after switching off the
167 Practical information
ignition. Observe the warning messages on Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch Never allow water or dust to enter the the labels in the vehicle, especially in the flap. off the ignition. connector or charging nozzle - risk of Any work on or modification to the vehicle's Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified electrocution or fire! electrical system (battery, connectors, orange workshop without delay. Never connect / disconnect the charging cables and components visible from inside or nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of outside) is strictly prohibited due to the risk of In the event of exposure to a fire electrocution! serious burns or electrical shock that can lead Immediately exit and evacuate all to death. passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt Traction battery In the event of a problem, always contact a to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution! The Li-ion (Lithium-ion) traction battery stores PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You must immediately contact the emergency the electrical energy of the vehicle. It is located services, informing them that the incident under the rear seats. involves a hybrid vehicle. The range of the battery varies depending on the type of driving, the route, the use of When washing thermal comfort equipment and the ageing of its Before washing the vehicle, always components. check that the charging flap is closed correctly. Battery ageing depends on several Never wash the vehicle while the battery is parameters, such as climatic conditions, on charge. mileage or charging frequency.
This label is intended solely for use by High-pressure washing In case of damage of the battery firefighters and maintenance services in To avoid damaging electrical It is strictly forbidden to carry out repairs the event of any work on the vehicle. components, it is expressly prohibited to use on the vehicle yourself. No other person must touch the device shown high-pressure washing to clean the front Do not touch liquids coming from the battery on this label. compartment or the vehicle underbody. and, in the event of skin contact with these Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar products, wash abundantly with water and In the event of an accident or impact when washing the bodywork. contact a doctor as soon as possible. The electrical system or the battery may be seriously damaged in the event of an accident or impact involving the vehicle Charging flap underbody. The charging flap is located on the rear left-hand side of the vehicle.
168 Practical information
In case of impact, even light, against the charging flap, do not use it. 7 Do not remove or modify the charging connector - risk of fire!
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Status of light Meaning guides Fixed white Welcome lighting when flap Charging cable is opened. The battery can be charged using several types Fixed blue Deferred charge. of cables. The charging cable supplied with the vehicle is 1. Deferred charge activation button Flashing green Charging. compatible with the electrical installations of the 2. Nozzle locking indicator lamp Fixed green Charging finished. country of sale. If you are travelling abroad, refer Red: nozzle positioned correctly and locked to the following table to check the compatibility Fixed red Malfunction. in the connector. of local electrical installations with the charging 3. Charging connector cable. 4. Light guides Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain the appropriate charging cable(s).
Cable type Compatibility Specifications Mode 2 charging cable with integrated control Conventional electrical socket. Vehicle can be recharged overnight (6.5 hours to
unit 7 hours). Charge limited to a maximum of 8 A.
“Green Up” type socket. Vehicle can be recharged in half a day (3.5 hours to 4 hours). Charge limited to a maximum of 14 A.
169 Practical information
Cable type Compatibility Specifications Mode 3 charging cable Wallbox accelerated charging unit Vehicle can be recharged in 1.5 hours to 1.75 hours (with 6.6 kW charger). Charge limited to a maximum of 32 A.
Charging times are given for Refer to the charging unit user manual for the Fixed green: charging complete. information purposes only; they may operating instructions. FAULT vary according to different factors such as the Red: anomaly; charging not permitted exterior temperature or the quality of the or must be stopped immediately. Check that electrical network. If the exterior temperature Control unit everything is connected correctly and that the
is below -10°C, it is recommended to connect electrical system is not faulty. the vehicle as soon as possible as the If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a charging time may increase significantly. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Upon plugging the charging cable into a Mode 2 charging cable with integrated domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come control unit on briefly. It is essential to avoid damaging the cable If no indicator lamps come on, check the and to keep it intact. domestic socket's circuit-breaker. In the event of damage, do not use it and – If the circuit breaker has tripped, contact a contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified professional to check that your electrical system
workshop to replace it. is suitable and carry out any necessary repairs. POWER – If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, avoid using the charging cable and contact a Wallbox accelerated charging unit Green: electrical connection established; PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. (mode 3) charging can begin. Do not disassemble or modify the charging CHARGE Recommendations on the control unit label unit - risk of electrocution and/or fire! Flashing green: charging in progress or temperature pre-conditioning activated.
170 Practical information
10. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a put into standby mode, this information can be displayed again by unlocking the vehicle or 7 means of stopping charging. 11. Do not force the connector if it is locked into opening a door. the vehicle. The charging progress can also be 12. Immediately stop charging, by locking and monitored using the MyPeugeot then unlocking the vehicle using the remote application. control key, if the charging cable or wall For more information on Remote features, socket feel burning hot to the touch. please refer to the corresponding section. 13. This charging cable includes components 1. Refer to the handbook before use. liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks. 2. Incorrect use of this charging cable may Do not expose to flammable vapours. result in fire, property damage and serious Precautions 14. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT injury or death by electrocution! Hybrid vehicles have been developed in vehicles. accordance with the recommendations for 3. Always use a correctly earthed power 15. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or socket, protected by a 30 mA residual maximum electromagnetic field limits established unplug it) with wet hands. current device. by the ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection - 1998 4. Always use an electrical socket protected by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the Guidelines). electrical circuit’s current rating. Charging the traction If you have a pacemaker or equivalent, check with a doctor about the precautions 5. The weight of the control unit must not be battery (Hybrid) borne by the electrical socket, plug and to be taken and respected or with the For a full charge, follow the charging procedure cables. manufacturer of the implanted electro-medical without interrupting it, until it stops automatically. device that its operation is guaranteed in an 6. Never use this charging cable if it is Charging can be immediate or deferred. defective or in any way damaged. environment that complies with the ICNIRP The deferred charge is set via the touch recommendations. 7. Never attempt to repair or open this screen or the MyPeugeot application. charging cable. It contains no repairable If in doubt parts - replace the charging cable if it is For safety reasons, the engine will not During charging, do not remain inside or damaged. start if the charging cable is connected to near the vehicle, near the charging cable or 8. Never immerse this charging cable in water. the vehicle connector. A warning is displayed the charging unit, even for a short time. 9. Never use this charging cable with an in the instrument panel. extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a Charging progress is visible in the instrument Before charging conversion adaptor or on a damaged Depending on the context: electrical socket. panel. After the instrument panel has been
171 Practical information
► Have a professional check that the ► Open the charging flap by pressing the push If this is not the case, charging has not Before disconnecting the nozzle from the electrical system to be used complies with button and make sure that there are no foreign started; restart the procedure ensuring that all charging connector: applicable standards and is compatible with bodies on the charging connector. connections are made properly. ► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then the vehicle. The light guides in the flap light up in white. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to unlock it. ► Have a professional electrician install Domestic charging (mode 2) indicate that the nozzle is locked. ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it.
a dedicated domestic power socket or Accelerated charging (mode 3) The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. compatible with the vehicle. ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging Use the charging cable supplied with the nozzle. vehicle. Domestic charging (mode 2)
The end of charging is confirmed by the fixed (During charging) lighting of the green CHARGE indicator lamp on Never work under the bonnet: the control unit and by the fixed lighting of the – Some areas remain very hot, even an hour ► Follow the instructions for use of the green light guides in the flap. after charging ends - risk of burns! accelerated charging unit (Wallbox). ► After disconnection, remove the protective – The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts ► Remove the protective cover from the cover from the nozzle and close the charging or strangulation! charging nozzle. flap.
► Insert the nozzle in the charging connector. ► Disconnect the control unit's charging cable After charging ► First, connect the charging cable from the The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing from the domestic socket. Check that the charging flap is closed. control unit to the domestic socket. of the green light guides in the flap. Accelerated charging (mode 3) Do not leave the cable connected to the When the connection is made, all of the indicator If this is not the case, charging has not domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit lamps on the control unit light up, then only the started; restart the procedure ensuring that all The end of charging is confirmed by the or electrocution in the event of contact with or POWER indicator lamp remains on in green. connections are made properly. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) and by the immersion in water! ► Remove the protective cover from the The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to fixed lighting of the green light guides in the flap. charging nozzle. indicate that the nozzle is locked. ► After disconnection, replace the nozzle on the ► Insert the nozzle in the charging connector. charging unit and close the charging flap. Charging procedure The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing Disconnection
of the green light guides in the flap and the Deferred charging Connection flashing of the CHARGE indicator lamp in green By default, charging begins when the nozzle ► Before charging, check that the gear selector on the control unit. is connected. Deferred charging can be is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise programmed. charging is impossible.
172 Practical information
Before disconnecting the nozzle from the Settings installation be performed by a PEUGEOT charging connector: dealer or a qualified workshop. 7 ► In the Hybrid touch screen menu, ► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then select the Charge tab. If not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, it must unlock it. ► Set the charging start time. still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it. ► Press OK. manufacturer's instructions. The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to The setting is saved in the system. Important: with a motorised tailgate and its confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. You can also programme the deferred "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function, if a ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging charging function using a smartphone, via towing device is fitted outside the PEUGEOT nozzle. the MyPeugeot application. dealer network, it is essential to visit a Domestic charging (mode 2) For more information on Remotely operable PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to recalibrate the detection system - risk of The end of charging is confirmed by the fixed features, refer to the corresponding section. "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function failure. lighting of the green CHARGE indicator lamp on Activation Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions the control unit and by the fixed lighting of the ► Connect the vehicle to the desired charging are automatically deactivated if an approved green light guides in the flap. equipment. towing system is used. ► After disconnection, remove the protective ► Press this button in the flap within one cover from the nozzle and close the charging minute to activate the system (confirmed Observe the maximum authorised flap. by the light guides coming on in blue). ► Disconnect the control unit's charging cable towable weight, indicated on the vehicle's from the domestic socket. registration certificate, the manufacturer's Towing device label as well as in the Technical data section Accelerated charging (mode 3) of this guide. Distribution of loads The end of charging is confirmed by the Complying with the maximum authorised ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) and by the nose weight (towball) also includes the heaviest items are as close as possible to the fixed lighting of the green light guides in the flap. use of accessories (bicycle carriers, tow axle, and the nose weight approaches the ► After disconnection, replace the nozzle on the boxes, etc.). charging unit and close the charging flap. maximum permitted without exceeding it. Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing Deferred charging engine performance. The maximum load which Observe the legislation in force in the can be towed must be reduced by 10% per country in which you are driving. By default, charging begins when the nozzle 1,000 metres of altitude. is connected. Deferred charging can be programmed. Use towing devices and their genuine wiring harnesses approved by PEUGEOT. It is recommended that the
173 Practical information
Vehicle equipped with motorised 4. Safety eye Before each use After use tailgate with "Hands-Free Tailgate 5. Detachable towball Verify that the towball is correctly fitted, When travelling without a trailer or Access" function 6. Locking/unlocking wheel checking the follow points: load carrier, remove the towball and fit the To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate 7. Security key lock – The green mark on the wheel is in line with protective plug into the carrier, to provide when using the towing device: 8. Label to note the key references the green mark on the towball. clear visibility of the number plate and/or its
– deactivate this function in advance in your – The wheel is in contact with the towball lighting. vehicle's configuration menu, (position A). – or move the electronic key away from the – The security key lock is closed and the recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. key removed; the wheel can no longer be Fitting the towball
operated. – The towball must not be able to move in Towing device with quickly its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with your hand. detachable towball If the towball is not locked, the trailer can become detached - risk of an accident! Presentation
This genuine towing device can be fitted and During use removed with no need for tools. A. Locked position (the green marks are Never release the locking system with a opposite each other); the wheel is in contact trailer or load carrier on the towball.
with the towball (no gap). Never exceed the maximum authorised B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite weight for the vehicle - the Gross Train ► Below the rear bumper, remove the protective the green mark); the wheel is no longer Weight or GTW. plug 2 from the carrier 1. in contact with the towball (gap of around Always comply with the maximum authorised ► Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier 5 mm). load on the towing device: if it is exceeded, 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position this device may become detached from the automatically.
Trailers with LED lamps are not vehicle - risk of an accident! compatible with the wiring harness of this Before driving, check the headlamp height device. adjustment and check that the lamps on the trailer operate correctly.
To ensure complete safety while driving For more information on 1. Carrier Headlamp height with a , refer to the , refer to the corresponding 2. Protective plug Towing device adjustment corresponding section. section. 3. Connection socket
174 Practical information
After use When travelling without a trailer or 7 load carrier, remove the towball and fit the protective plug into the carrier, to provide clear visibility of the number plate and/or its lighting.
Fitting the towball
► The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- ► Remove the protective cover from the clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear! towball. ► Attach the trailer to the towball. ► Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety eye 4 on the carrier. ► Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a quarter turn to connect it to the connection socket 3 on the carrier.
Removing the towball ► Below the rear bumper, remove the protective ► Grasp the trailer plug, perform a quarter turn plug 2 from the carrier 1. and pull to disconnect it from the connection ► Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier
socket 3 on the carrier. 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position ► Detach the cable on the trailer from the safety automatically. ► Check that the mechanism has correctly locked into place (position A). eye 4 on the carrier. ► Close the lock 7 using the key. ► Detach the trailer from the towball. ► Remove the key. The key cannot be removed ► Refit the protective cover to the towball. while the lock is open. ► Remove the cap from the lock and press it ► Clip the cap onto the lock. onto the head of the key.
175 Practical information
Roof bars Fitting directly to the roof
As a safety measure and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for the vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof bars.
Fitting on longitudinal bars ► Insert the key into the lock 7. ► Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1. ► Open the lock using the key. ► Stow the towball in its bag away from knocks
and dirt. You must only attach the transverse bars to the four fixing points located on the roof frame. Maintenance These points are concealed by the vehicle doors Correct operation is only possible if the towball when the doors are closed. and its carrier are kept clean. The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure inserted into the opening of each fixing point. jet wash, the towball must be removed and the The transverse bars must be fixed at the protective plug fitted to the carrier. engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. Maximum load distributed over the transverse roof bars, for a loading height Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier): location, close to the carrier or in the 80 kg. boot. As this value may change, please verify the ► Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified maximum load quoted in the guide supplied the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in workshop for any work on the towball system. with the roof bars. a clockwise direction; do not release the wheel. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed ► Extract the towball from the bottom of its of the vehicle to the profile of the road to carrier 1. avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings ► Release the wheel; it automatically stops in on the vehicle. the unlocked position (position B).
176 Practical information
Fitting directly to the roof Be sure to refer to national legislation in order The snow chains must be fitted only to to comply with the regulations for transporting the front wheels. They must never be 7 objects that are longer than the vehicle. fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.
Recommendations Take account of the legislation specific to Distribute the load uniformly, taking care each country on the use of snow chains to avoid overloading one of the sides. and the maximum authorised speed. Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof. Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type Secure the load securely. of wheel fitted to the vehicle: Drive gently: the vehicle will be more Original tyre size Maximum link size susceptible to the effects of side winds and its
215/65 R17 9 mm stability may be affected. You must only attach the transverse bars to Regularly check the security and tight 225/55 R18 9 mm the four fixing points located on the roof frame. fastening of the roof bars, at least before each 205/55 R19 9 mm These points are concealed by the vehicle doors trip. when the doors are closed. Remove the roof bars once they are no longer 235/50 R19 Not suitable for The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be needed. chains inserted into the opening of each fixing point. For more information on snow chains, contact a Maximum load distributed over the Sunroof PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. transverse roof bars, for a loading height Check that the load does not pass below not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier): the roof bars so that it does not impede the Installation tips 80 kg. movements of the sunroof - risk of major ► To fit the chains during a journey, stop the As this value may change, please verify the damage! vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. maximum load quoted in the guide supplied ► Apply the parking brake and position any with the roof bars. wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed Snow chains movement of the vehicle. of the vehicle to the profile of the road to ► Fit the chains following the instructions In wintry conditions, snow chains improve avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings provided by the manufacturer. traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle on the vehicle. ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, when braking. without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h).
177 Practical information
► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow Fitting ► Insert a finger into the notch in the upper part chains are correctly tightened. of the screen. ► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. It is strongly recommended that before Repeat these operations for the other screen. you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface. Energy economy mode Avoid driving with snow chains on roads This system manages the duration of use of
that have been cleared of snow to avoid certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road For fitting / removing, it is recommended level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy
that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a After switching off the engine, you can still wheels, check that no part of the chain or its qualified workshop. ► Hold the corresponding screen in front of the use functions such as the audio and telematic fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. lower grille of the bumper. system, the wipers and the dipped beam Before any operation, ensure that the ► First insert the two lower fixing brackets into headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined Hybrid vehicles engine is off and the cooling fan has the bumper. duration of approximately 40 minutes. The use of snow chains is only stopped. ► Tilt the screen upwards until the three upper authorised on the front wheels. fixing brackets click into the bumper. Selecting the mode It is essential to remove them when: ► Check that the unit is firmly held by pressing A confirmation message is displayed when – the exterior temperature exceeds around the edges. energy economy mode is entered, and the active Very cold climate screen 10°C. Repeat these operations for the other screen. functions are placed on standby. (Depending on country of sale.) – towing. If a telephone call is in progress at the – the speed is above 75 mph (120 km/h). Removing
This removable protective screen prevents the time, it will be maintained for around 10 accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan. minutes via the audio system’s hands-free It consists of two elements to be attached to the system. front bumper.
Exiting the mode These functions are automatically reactivated the next time the vehicle is used. To restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: – For less than 10 minutes, to use the equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
178 Practical information
► Insert a finger into the notch in the upper part – For more than 10 minutes, to use the risk of injury resulting from an automatic of the screen. equipment for approximately 30 minutes. change to START mode. 7 ► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. Let the engine run for the specified duration to Repeat these operations for the other screen. ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or Energy economy mode continuously restarting the engine. A flat battery prevents the engine from This system manages the duration of use of Hybrid vehicles starting. certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient Before any work is carried out under the For more information on the , level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. 12 V battery bonnet, it is essential to switch off the ignition refer to the corresponding section. After switching off the engine, you can still and check that the READY indicator lamp is use functions such as the audio and telematic off in the instrument panel - risk of serious system, the wipers and the dipped beam injury! headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined Load reduction mode duration of approximately 40 minutes. This system manages the use of certain The location of the interior bonnet functions according to the level of charge release lever prevents the bonnet being Selecting the mode remaining in the battery. opened when the left-hand front door is A confirmation message is displayed when When the vehicle is being driven, the load closed. energy economy mode is entered, and the active reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions are placed on standby. functions, such as the air conditioning and the When the engine is hot, handle the heated rear screen. If a telephone call is in progress at the exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay The deactivated functions are reactivated time, it will be maintained for around 10 with care (risk of burns), using the protected automatically as soon as conditions permit. minutes via the audio system’s hands-free area. system. When the bonnet is open, take care not to Bonnet damage the safety catch. Do not open the bonnet under very windy Exiting the mode Stop & Start conditions. These functions are automatically reactivated the Before doing anything under the bonnet, next time the vehicle is used. you must switch off the ignition to avoid any Cooling of the engine when stopped To restore the use of these functions The engine cooling fan may start after immediately, start the engine and let it run: the engine has been switched off. – For less than 10 minutes, to use the equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
179 Practical information
Take care with objects or clothing that The locations of the following elements may 8. Engine oil filler cap could be caught in the blades of the fan! vary: 9. Engine oil dipstick – Air filter. 10. Priming pump* – Engine oil dipstick. 11. Degassing screw* Opening – Engine oil filler cap.
– Priming pump. The Diesel fuel system operates under – Degassing screw. very high pressure.
Petrol engine All work on this circuit must be carried out
only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. Checking levels Closing Check all of the following levels regularly in
► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the accordance with the manufacturer's service
► Open the left-hand front door. support slot. schedule. Top them up if required, unless ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the ► Clip the stay in its housing. Diesel engine otherwise indicated.
bottom of the door frame, towards you. ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end If a level drops significantly, have the
of its travel. corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT ► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked dealer or a qualified workshop. correctly. The fluids must comply with the Because of the presence of electrical manufacturer's requirements and with equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly the vehicle's engine.
recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited. 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir Take care when working under the 2. Engine coolant reservoir bonnet, as certain areas of the engine 3. Brake fluid reservoir may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the Engine compartment 4. Battery / Fuses cooling fan could start at any time (even with
5. Remote earth point (-) the ignition off). ► Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the The engine represented is an example given for 6. Fusebox bonnet. illustration purposes only.
7. Air filter * Depending on engine.
180 Practical information
8. Engine oil filler cap Used products Checking using the dipstick 7 9. Engine oil dipstick For the location of the dipstick, please refer Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or 10. Priming pump* to the illustration of the corresponding engine fluids with the skin. 11. Degassing screw* compartment. Most of these fluids are harmful to health and ► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and The Diesel fuel system operates under very corrosive. pull it out completely. very high pressure. ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, All work on this circuit must be carried out Do not discard used oil or fluids into lint-free cloth. only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified sewers or onto the ground. workshop. Empty used oil into the containers reserved for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Checking levels
Check all of the following levels regularly in Engine oil accordance with the manufacturer's service The level is checked, with the engine ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down, schedule. Top them up if required, unless having been switched off for at least 30 then pull it out again to visually check the oil otherwise indicated. minutes and on level ground, either using the oil level: the correct level is between marks A (max) If a level drops significantly, have the level indicator in the instrument panel when the and B (min). corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped Do not start the engine if the level is: dealer or a qualified workshop. with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or It is normal to top up the oil level between two a qualified workshop. The fluids must comply with the services (or oil changes). It is recommended – below mark B: top up the engine oil manufacturer's requirements and with that you check the level, and top up if necessary, immediately. the vehicle's engine. every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Oil grade Take care when working under the In order to maintain the reliability of the Before topping up or changing the engine bonnet, as certain areas of the engine engine and emissions control system, oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the never use additives in the engine oil. and complies with the recommendations in cooling fan could start at any time (even with the service schedule supplied with the vehicle the ignition off).
* Depending on engine.
181 Practical information
(or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and Clean the cap before removing it to refill. – 2.2 litres for other versions. For more information on the Indicators and in qualified workshops). Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate container. Fluid specification the corresponding section. the contractual warranty in the event of The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in engine failure. mixture. accordance with regulations, you must top up the Engine coolant In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid AdBlue tank. It is normal to top up this fluid between containing an agent to prevent freezing must For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), Topping up the engine oil level two services. be used which is appropriate for the prevailing and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please The check and top-up must only be done with conditions, in order to protect the elements of the the corresponding section. refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine the engine cold. system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). compartment illustration. A low level presents a risk of serious damage to ► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills the engine. Filling with pure water is prohibited under Checks all circumstances (risk of freezing, on engine components (risk of fire). The level of this fluid should be close to the Unless otherwise indicated, check these limestone deposits, etc.). ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. components in accordance with the again using the dipstick. If the level is close to or below the "MIN” mark, it manufacturer's service schedule and according ► Top up the level if necessary. is essential to top up. Diesel fuel additive (Diesel to your engine. ► After checking the level, carefully screw the When the engine is hot, the temperature of this Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in fluid is regulated by the fan. with particle filter) dealer or a qualified workshop. its tube. As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at On reaching the minimum level in the Only use products recommended by least one hour after switching off the engine particle filter additive tank, this warning Within 30 minutes of adding oil, the oil PEUGEOT or products of equivalent before carrying out any work. lamp comes on fixed, accompanied by an level indication in the instrument panel quality and specification. In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need audible warning and a message warning that the when the ignition is switched on is not valid. In order to optimise the operation of to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around additive level is too low. components as important as those in the the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers Brake fluid allow the pressure to drop. Topping up very specific products. The level of this fluid should be close to Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap This additive must be topped up without delay by the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake and top up to the required level. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. pad wear. AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 12 V battery To know how often the brake fluid should be Screenwash fluid The battery does not require any An alert is triggered when the reserve level is replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing Top up to the required level when maintenance. reached. schedule. necessary. However, check regularly that the terminals Capacity of the tank: are correctly tightened (versions without quick – 5.3 litres for "very cold climate" versions.
182 Practical information
For more information on the Indicators and in release terminals) and that the connections are Oil filter particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to clean. 7 Change the oil filter each time the engine the corresponding section. For more information on the precautions oil is changed. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in to take before any work on the 12 V accordance with regulations, you must top up the battery, refer to the corresponding section. Particle filter (Diesel) AdBlue tank. The start of saturation of the particle filter For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), is signalled by the temporary illumination and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to Versions equipped with Stop & Start are of this warning lamp, accompanied by a the corresponding section. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. message warning of the risk of the filter clogging Its replacement should be carried out only by up. Checks a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at Unless otherwise indicated, check these least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp components in accordance with the Passenger compartment goes off. manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine. filter If the warning lamp stays on, this Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT Depending on the environment and the indicates a low Diesel additive level. dealer or a qualified workshop. use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, For more information on Checking levels, city driving), change it twice as often, if refer to the corresponding section. Only use products recommended by necessary. PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and specification. A clogged passenger compartment filter Following prolonged operation of the In order to optimise the operation of can adversely affect air conditioning vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you components as important as those in the system performance and generate may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers undesirable odours. emission of water vapour at the exhaust on very specific products. acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment. Air filter 12 V battery Depending on the environment and the New vehicle The battery does not require any use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, The first particle filter regeneration maintenance. city driving), change it twice as often, if operations may be accompanied by a However, check regularly that the terminals necessary. "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. are correctly tightened (versions without quick
183 Practical information
Manual gearbox be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and less than 1.6 mm; it is imperative to replace the AdBlue® (BlueHDi)
defrost them. tyres. The gearbox does not require any Using different size wheels and tyres from those maintenance (no oil change). Brake disc wear specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel Automatic gearbox rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer For information on checking brake disc reading and have an adverse effect on road The gearbox does not require any wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a holding. maintenance (no oil change). qualified workshop. Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles can cause the ESC to mistime. Electric parking brake Wheels and tyres This system does not require any routine The inflation pressure of all tyres, Shock absorbers
servicing. However, in the event of a including the spare wheel, must be It is not easy for drivers to detect when problem, do not hesitate to have the system To respect the environment and ensure checked on "cold” tyres. shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure the shock absorbers have a major impact on workshop. adversely affecting the performance or fuel label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven road-holding and braking performance. consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT For more information on the Electric for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles For your safety and driving comfort, it is has taken the decision to equip its vehicles parking brake, refer to the (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add important to have them regularly checked by a with a system that associates SCR (Selective corresponding section. 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. label. Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter Timing and accessory kits (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. Brake pads Under-inflation increases fuel consumption. Non-compliant tyre Timing and accessory kits are used from Brake wear depends on the style of SCR system pressure causes premature wear on tyres and the time the engine is started until it is driving, particularly in the case of vehicles Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains urea, has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road switched off. It is normal for them to wear over used in town, over short distances. It may be a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen holding - risk of an accident! time. oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are necessary to have the condition of the brakes A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage harmless to health and the environment. checked, even between vehicle services. Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the The AdBlue® is contained in Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the braking and road holding performance of the recommended replacement frequency, stated in a special holding about 17 litres. brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is tank Its capacity allows a driving range of are worn. condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and reached first. approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), highly After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. dependent on your driving style. wintry conditions, ice can form on the When the wear indicators no longer appear set An alert system is triggered automatically once brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is the reserve level is reached: you can then drive
184 Practical information
AdBlue® (BlueHDi) for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the Supply of AdBlue®
tank is empty and the vehicle disabled. ® 7 It is recommended that the AdBlue be topped For more information on the Warning up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating and indicator lamps and the associated that the reserve level has been reached. alerts, or the , refer to the Indicators In order to ensure that the SCR system corresponding sections. operates correctly: – Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO ® Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a 22241 standard. system required by regulations prevents – Never transfer AdBlue® to another starting of the engine. container: it would lose its purity.
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of – Never dilute AdBlue® with water. To respect the environment and ensure emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without the Euro 6 standard: the vehicle becomes AdBlue® can be obtained from a PEUGEOT adversely affecting the performance or fuel polluting. dealer or a qualified workshop. consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT In the event of a confirmed fault with the SCR You can also visit a service station has taken the decision to equip its vehicles system, you must go to a PEUGEOT dealer equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially with a system that associates SCR (Selective or a qualified workshop as soon as possible: designed for passenger vehicles. Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter after travelling a distance of 685 miles (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. (1,100 km), a system will be triggered automatically to prevent engine starting. Storage recommendations SCR system In either case, a range indicator gives the AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains urea, distance that can be travelled before the above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen vehicle is immobilised. cool area and protected from direct sunlight. oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for harmless to health and the environment. Freezing of the AdBlue® at least a year. The AdBlue® is contained in a special AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has tank holding about 17 litres. around -11°C. completely thawed out in the ambient air. Its capacity allows a driving range of The SCR system includes a heater for the Never store AdBlue® containers in your approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), highly AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving vehicle. dependent on your driving style. in very cold conditions. An alert system is triggered automatically once the reserve level is reached: you can then drive
185 Practical information
Precautions for use Never put the AdBlue® into the Diesel The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is fuel tank. 5 litres or more. non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when kept in a cool place). If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are If the AdBlue® tank is completely empty In the event of contact with the skin, wash the any spillages on the bodywork, rinse – which is confirmed by the message affected area with soap and running water. In the immediately with cold water or wipe with a "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse damp cloth. essential to add at least 5 litres. the eyes with large amounts of water or with an If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek sponge and hot water. medical attention if you feel a persistent burning Free-wheeling sensation or irritation. Important: in the event of a top-up after In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth a breakdown because of a lack of to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling with clean water and then drink plenty of water. it is essential to wait around 5 AdBlue, road, in an automatic car wash, or being In certain conditions (high temperature, for minutes before switching on the ignition, transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot without opening the driver’s door, The procedure varies according to the type of be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia unlocking the vehicle, introducing the key gearbox and parking brake. vapours have an irritant effect on mucous into the ignition switch, or introducing the
membranes (eyes, nose and throat). key of the “Keyless Entry and Starting” ► Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank anti- With a manual gearbox and Store AdBlue® out of the reach of system into the passenger compartment. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 clockwise and remove it. electric parking brake
children, in its original container. ► With a container of AdBlue®: after checking seconds before starting the engine. / the expiry date, read the instructions on the Procedure ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key label carefully before pouring the contents of the Release procedure Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that from the switch to switch off the engine. container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. or ► With an AdBlue® pump: introduce the nozzle ► With the engine running and while depressing In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature ► With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the and fill the tank until the nozzle automatically the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the "START/STOP" button to switch off the engine. cuts out. neutral position.
of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the ® ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off AdBlue may be frozen and so cannot be poured In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank: into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area the ignition. – Add between 10 and 13 litres using ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried AdBlue® containers. out. ignition again. – Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the out, if you are refilling at a service station. control lever to release the parking brake.
186 Practical information
The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the Keyless Entry and Starting 5 litres or more. ignition. You must not depress the brake pedal 7 Reverting to normal operation while switching the ignition on or off. If you do, ® the engine will start, requiring you to restart If the AdBlue tank is completely empty ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the the procedure. – which is confirmed by the message engine. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is essential to add at least 5 litres. With an automatic gearbox Advice on care and and electric parking brake maintenance Free-wheeling / In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle General recommendations to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling Release procedure Observe the following recommendations to avoid road, in an automatic car wash, or being ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine damaging your vehicle. transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). running, select mode N and switch off the The procedure varies according to the type of ignition. Exterior gearbox and parking brake. Within 5 seconds: Never use a high-pressure jet wash in ► Switch on the ignition again. the engine compartment, due to the risk ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the With a manual gearbox and of damaging electrical components. push selector forwards or backwards to confirm electric parking brake Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunshine or mode N. extremely cold conditions. / ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the control lever to release the parking brake. Release procedure ► Release the brake pedal, switch off the When washing the vehicle at an automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure ► With the engine running and while depressing ignition. If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the to lock the doors and, depending on version, the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the remove the electronic key and deactivate the neutral position. gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to restart the procedure. “hands-free” function (“Hands-Free Tailgate ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off Access”). the ignition. Reverting to normal operation When using a pressure washer, hold the ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle ignition again. engine. (particularly when cleaning areas containing ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the chipped paint, sensors or seals). control lever to release the parking brake.
187 Practical information
Promptly clean up any stains containing Bodywork Never select the programme with hot wax Leather chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint finish. Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect High-gloss paint Never use high-pressure lances equipped care is essential for its durability. secretions, pollen and tar). with brushes - risk of scratching paint! Do not use abrasive products or It must be protected and nourished using a If justified by the environment, clean the Never apply glossy polish or preservatives to solvents, petrol or oil to clean the specific leather product, to keep it supple and vehicle more frequently to remove salty the bodywork or alloy wheels; these products bodywork. preserve its original appearance. deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial irreversibly reveal glossy or spotted areas. Never use an abrasive sponge to clean estates) and mud (in wet or cold areas). Do not clean leather using unsuitable stubborn stains. Risk of scratching the These substances can be highly corrosive. cleaning agents such as solvents, paintwork! Choose high-pressure wash, or at least Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detergents, petrol or pure alcohol. Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to high-flow water jet. workshop if you require advice on removing When cleaning items partly made from plastic or rubber parts. Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water. stubborn stains requiring special products Only a clean microfibre cloth is recommended leather, take care not to damage the other (such as tar or insect removers). for wiping the vehicle; pass it over the vehicle materials with the specific leather product. Use a soft sponge and soapy water or a Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed without rubbing. pH neutral product. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Carefully wipe off any fuel spilt on the Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids, Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean workshop. bodywork using a soft cloth, then allow to dry. quickly mop up any surplus. microfibre cloth. Clean off minor marks (for example, finger Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. Interior marks), using a maintenance product to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has Comply with the instructions for use stated on recommended by PEUGEOT. been dampened with demineralised water the product. When washing the vehicle, never use a and thoroughly wrung out. water hose or high-pressure washer to Decals Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened clean the interior. Textured paint (Depending on version) with soapy water or a pH-neutral product. Liquids carried in cups or other open This type of paint reacts under the effect of Dry with a soft, dry cloth. containers can spill, presenting a risk of light, through variations in appearance and Do not use a high pressure washer to damage if they come into contact with the finish that highlight the lines and contours of the clean the vehicle. Risk of damaging or controls in the dashboard and centre console. vehicle. Its varnish is enriched with particles that detaching the decals! Take care! remain visible and create a unique satin effect with relief. Its slightly granular texture gives it a Use a high-flow hose at a temperature surprising touch. between 25°C and 40°C. Never attempt to clean without water. Sweep the jet of water across the surface to Never clean your vehicle in an automatic be cleaned, perpendicular to it. roller-brush car wash. Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.
188 Practical information Leather 7 Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular care is essential for its durability. It must be protected and nourished using a specific leather product, to keep it supple and preserve its original appearance.
Do not clean leather using unsuitable cleaning agents such as solvents, detergents, petrol or pure alcohol. When cleaning items partly made from leather, take care not to damage the other materials with the specific leather product.
Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids, quickly mop up any surplus. Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has been dampened with demineralised water and thoroughly wrung out. Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened with soapy water or a pH-neutral product. Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
189 In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Assembling and placing the For more information on Refuelling and 2.0 HDi engines on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), please ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, As a safety precaution, before leaving your triangle refer to the corresponding section. unclip the cover to access the priming pump. vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch ► Loosen the degassing bolt. on the hazard warning lamps and put on your For non-BlueHDi versions, the fuel system ► Operate the priming pump until fuel high visibility vest. components are located in the engine appears in the transparent tube. compartment, possibly under the removable ► Retighten the degassing bolt. Storage compartment cover.
► Operate the starter motor until the engine For more information on the Engine starts (if the engine does not start at the first compartment, in particular the location attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying of these components under the bonnet, again). please refer to the corresponding section. ► If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again, then 1.5 BlueHDi engines
the starter motor. For versions supplied with a triangle as original ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the ► Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then equipment, refer to the illustration above. engine). close the bonnet. For other versions, refer to the assembly ► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the instructions provided with the triangle. ignition.
Tool kit ► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. There is a compartment in the interior trim of the as required by local legislation. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. tailgate to store a warning triangle. do not keep trying, but restart the procedure. Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment: ► After opening the tailgate, release the cover – Temporary puncture repair kit. 2.0 BlueHDi engines by turning the screw a quarter turn to the left. Running out of fuel – Spare wheel. (Diesel) ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine). Accessing the tools With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be ► Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the primed if you run out of fuel. ignition. Before starting to prime the system, it is ► Repeat the operation 10 times. essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. fuel tank. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
190 In the event of a breakdown
2.0 HDi engines With spare wheel 8 ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, unclip the cover to access the priming pump. ► Loosen the degassing bolt. ► Operate the priming pump until fuel appears in the transparent tube. ► Retighten the degassing bolt. ► Operate the starter motor until the engine starts (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying
again). The tool kit is stored in the boot, under the floor.
► If the engine does not start after a few To access it: attempts, operate the priming pump again, then ► Open the boot. ► Unclip the storage box by pulling it upwards. the starter motor. ► Place the adjustable boot floor in the high ► Unclip the two fixings to open its cover. ► Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then position. close the bonnet. ► Raise the floor past the two retractable stops. Accessing the tools ► Place the floor on these two stops to hold it Tool kit up.
Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. With temporary puncture repair kit
Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment: – Temporary puncture repair kit. – Spare wheel. Accessing the tools
Some of the tools are stored beneath the floor
against the boot sill. The left-hand box contains the wheelbrace and its extension piece. The right-hand box contains the wheel chocks
► Unclip the two fixings to open its cover. and the towing eye.
191 In the event of a breakdown
To access it: With spare wheel List of tools
► Open the boot. ► Fold the concertina panels. ► Install the third row seats. ► Unclip the required tools from the boot sill trim.
With temporary puncture repair kit
The tool box is installed at the centre of the 1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle (depending spare wheel beneath the vehicle. on equipment) It contains the jack and the wheel bolt cover 2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in removal tool. the glove box) (depending on equipment) ► First, access the spare wheel. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special ‘security’ bolts.
For further information on the Spare wheel, 3. Removable towing eye Model without storage box please refer to the corresponding section. This kit, stored in a bag, is installed behind the ► Press the tab to unlock the cover. For more information on Towing the vehicle second row left-hand seat. ► While keeping the tab pressed in, slide the and using the removable towing eye, refer to the ► Fold the seat backrest onto the cushion to cover to the middle and remove it. corresponding section. access the bag. Model with storage box With temporary puncture repair kit This kit is installed in the storage box, located in Kit 1
front of the second row left-hand seat. ► Open the storage box cover to access the kit.
192 In the event of a breakdown
With spare wheel These tools are specific to the vehicle and may vary according to the level of 8 equipment. Do not use them for any other purpose.
The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Kit 2 Do not use any jack other than the one supplied with the vehicle. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain the one that was intended by the manufacturer.
The jack meets European standards, as 5. Wheelbrace defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ For removing the wheel trim and the wheel CE. bolts. The jack does not require any maintenance. 6. Jack with integrated handle To raise the vehicle. 4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant 7. Wheel bolt cap removal tool (depending on and a speed limit sticker equipment) Temporary puncture For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on repair kit the tyre pressure. alloy wheels.
For more information about the Temporary 8. Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding explanatory videos.
section. Made up of a compressor and a sealant Wheelbrace extension cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary For slackening/tightening the spare wheel repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the carrier winch cable nut. nearest garage. For more information on the Spare wheel, refer It is designed to repair most punctures located to the corresponding section. on the tyre tread.
193 In the event of a breakdown
Repair procedure Connecting kit 2
Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. nail, screw) which have penetrated into
the tyre. ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be ► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic repaired, and place it in a clean area. and apply the parking brake. ► Follow the safety instructions (hazard warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility
jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. ► Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it ► Switch the ignition off. in the notch provided on the compressor. Connecting kit 1 ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean area.
► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. ► Connect the pipe from the bottle of sealant to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly. ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the bottle of sealant. Repairing the tyre ► Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O". ► Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten the compressor. firmly. ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the
vehicle's 12 V socket. ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the bottle of sealant.
194 In the event of a breakdown
Only the 12 V sockets located at the under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect front of the vehicle and in the boot can the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk 8 be used to power the compressor. of blowback). The 12 V socket located at the back of the If after approximately 7 minutes, the centre console is not suitable for this purpose. pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; ► Affix the speed limit sticker. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance. ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles ► Move the switch to position "O". (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between ► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the The speed limit sticker must be affixed from the vehicle's 12 V socket. puncture. inside the vehicle in the area close to the ► Remove the kit. ► Stop to check the repair and the tyre driver, to remind them that a wheel is in ► Refit the cap on the valve. pressure using the kit. temporary use. ► Remove and store the bottle of sealant. With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, The sealant product is harmful if The tyre inflation pressures are given on do not exceed a speed of 50 mph swallowed and causes irritation to the this label. (80 km/h) and do not drive more than eyes. 125 miles (200 km). Keep this product out of the reach of children. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the workshop to have the tyre changed. bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle in ► Switch the ignition on. standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer Checking/adjusting tyre or an authorised waste disposal site. pressures Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of The compressor can be used, without injecting sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the a qualified workshop. tyre pressures.
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep
it in a clean place. ► Switch on the compressor by moving the ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected firmly.
195 In the event of a breakdown
► Check that the compressor switch is in ► Refit the cap on the valve. To access the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool Putting the wheel back in place position "O". kit section. Should the pressure of one or more tyres ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise Depending on version, the spare wheel the compressor. the under-inflation detection system. may be a standard size steel or alloy ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the For more information on Tyre under-inflation wheel. vehicle's 12 V socket. detection, refer to the corresponding section. In some countries, it is a ‘space saver’ wheel. ► Switch the ignition on.
Only the 12 V sockets located at the Removing the wheel front of the vehicle and in the boot can Spare wheel be used to power the compressor. The 12V socket located at the back of the Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
centre console is not suitable for this purpose. explanatory videos. ► Put the wheel back in its housing. The tyre inflation pressures are given on ► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. Accessing the spare wheel ► Position the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in the
this label. middle of the wheel.
► Start the compressor by placing the switch at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value ► Slacken the central nut. shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To ► Remove the fixing parts (nut and bolt). deflate: press the black button located on the ► Raise the spare wheel towards you from the compressor pipe, near the valve connection. rear. ► Take the wheel out of the boot. If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, the tyre is damaged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance. ► Tighten fully until the central nut clicks, to retain the wheel correctly.
► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under the ► Return the tool box to the middle of the wheel switch in position "O". floor. and clip it in place. ► Remove the kit and stow it.
196 In the event of a breakdown
Putting the wheel back in place Accessing the spare wheel Removing the spare wheel
8
► Put the wheel back in its housing. ► Fold back the concertina panel and install ► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. the third row seat, on the left-hand side (if your ► Position the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in the vehicle is equipped with it). middle of the wheel. ► Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to release The spare wheel is held by a winch system the spare wheel fixing winch nut. underneath the rear of the vehicle. ► With extension piece 8 placed on the end Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel of wheelbrace 5, "tighten" the nut to unreel the may be fixed underneath the vehicle. winch cable until the spare wheel is flat on the ground. Unreel as much as necessary in order to access the wheel easily.
► Tighten fully until the central nut clicks, to retain the wheel correctly. ► Return the tool box to the middle of the wheel and clip it in place.
197 In the event of a breakdown
Storing the tools Putting the winch and spare wheel back in place
► Remove the wheel/box unit through the back
of the vehicle.
► Straighten the spare wheel to access the tool ► Replace the appropriate tools in the box and box (A). close the cover again. ► Place the appropriate tools in the box and ► Place the tool box on the ground. close the cover again. ► Insert the connecting piece into the tool box ► Place the tool box on the ground. hole (B - C). When the spare wheel is fitted in place of ► Reel in the winch by loosening the winch a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch control nut with wheelbrace 5 and extension and tool box must be placed beneath the piece 8: once the cable is completely reeled in, vehicle again before restarting. you should no longer feel any resistance.
► Store the rest of the tools in the storage areas in the boot sill trim.
The punctured wheel cannot be stored
beneath the vehicle. ► Detach the connecting piece from the cover It must be stored in the boot. Use a cover to of the tool box (B - C). protect the interior of the boot. ► Pass the connecting piece through the wheel hub to release it (D).
198 In the event of a breakdown
► Straighten the wheel. Parking the vehicle ► Pass the connecting piece through the wheel Immobilise the vehicle where it does 8 hub (A). not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed to be in automatic ► Raise the wheel/box unit underneath the mode, and switch off the ignition. vehicle, by "loosening" the winch control nut with Check for the fixed illumination of the parking wheelbrace and extension piece . 5 8 brake warning lamps in the instrument panel. ► Tighten it fully. When the cable is completely The occupants must get out of the vehicle ► Insert the connecting piece into the tool box reeled in, turning the nut no longer encounters and wait where they are safe. hole (B - C). resistance. If necessary, place a chock under the wheel ► Centre and position the spare wheel on the ► Check that the wheel is properly flattened tool box (D). diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.
against the floor. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a Removing a wheel jack; use an axle stand.
Wheel with wheel trim When removing the wheel, first remove the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture using the wheelbrace. When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel trim, starting by placing its aperture in line with the valve and then pushing it into place all round its edge with the palm of your hand.
► Insert the centering guide into the wheel hub.
► Place the wheel/box unit beneath the rear of the vehicle.
199 In the event of a breakdown
► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into Fitting a wheel contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted ► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of into the central part of the head of the jack. the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). ► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient ► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to space between the wheel and the ground to slacken the security bolt. admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
► Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only. Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may Fitting a steel or ‘space-saver’ type slip or collapse - risk of injury! spare wheel If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheels, Take care to position the jack strictly at the washers do not make contact with the one of the jacking points A or B under the steel or ‘space-saver’ type spare wheel. The vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is wheel is secured by the conical surface of centred under the contact area of the vehicle. each bolt. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the
vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of
injury!
► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the front A or rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
► Fit the wheel on the hub. ► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. ► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean ► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the place. wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. ► Remove the wheel. ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
200 In the event of a breakdown
After changing a wheel Changing a bulb Store the punctured wheel in the boot or, 8 depending on version, remove the central cover In some weather conditions (e.g. low first to store it beneath the floor in place of the temperature or humidity), misting on the spare wheel. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating: ► Lower the vehicle again fully. – Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive ► Fold jack 6 and remove it. With a "space-saver" type spare wheel cloth, nor with detergent or solvent Deactivate certain driving aid functions products. (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, – Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH etc.). neutral product. Do not exceed the maximum authorised – When using a high-pressure washer on speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). persistent marks, do not keep the lance Driving with more than one “space-saver” directed towards the headlamps, lamps or type spare wheel is prohibited. their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals. Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to have Changing a bulb must only be done with the tightness of the bolts and the pressure of ► Tighten the security bolt using the the ignition off and after the headlamp / the spare wheel checked. wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. lamp has been switched off for several Have the punctured tyre examined. After ► Tighten the other bolts using the minutes - risk of serious burns! inspection, the technician will advise you on wheelbrace 5 only. Do not touch the bulb directly with your whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must ► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts fingers; use a lint-free cloth. be replaced. (depending on equipment). It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet ► Store the tools. (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the headlamp.
201 In the event of a breakdown
Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb Front lamps Model with halogen headlamps Halogen bulbs (Hx) of the same type and specification. To avoid To ensure good quality lighting, check lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs. Model with Full that the bulb is correctly positioned in its LED technology headlamps housing. Refitting the lamp units Perform the operations in the reverse Direction indicators order to dismantling. Rapid flashing of a direction indicator lamp (left or right) indicates that one of Light-emitting diode (LED) the bulbs on the corresponding side has headlamps and lamps failed.
Depending on version, the affected types of headlamps / lamps are: – Full LED technology headlamps. 1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (LED) – Direction indicator side repeaters. 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7)
– Side spotlamps. 3. Main beam headlamps (HB3) 4. Direction indicators (PWY24W) – Third brake lamp. 1. Direction indicators 2. Dipped beam/main beam headlamps 5. Foglamps (H11) ► Turn the connector a quarter turn For the replacement of this type of bulb, 3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps anti-clockwise. you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or 4. Foglamps Opening the bonnet / Accessing the ► Pull the bulb connector. a qualified workshop. bulbs ► Remove the bulb and replace it. Do not touch the "Full LED" technology With the engine warm, proceed with caution - headlamps - risk of electrocution! risk of burns! Amber coloured bulbs must be replaced Take care with objects or clothing that could by bulbs with identical specifications and be caught in the blades of the cooling fan - colour. risk of strangulation!
202 In the event of a breakdown
Halogen bulbs (Hx) Dipped beam headlamps Foglamps To ensure good quality lighting, check 8 that the bulb is correctly positioned in its housing.
Direction indicators
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator lamp (left or right) indicates that one of the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed. ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab.
► Pull the connector rearwards to disconnect it. ► Pull the bulb rearwards to extract it. ► Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in the ► Replace the bulb. trim. ► Pull and lever to unclip the foglamp trim. Main beam headlamps ► With a Torx screwdriver, remove the two
► Turn the connector a quarter turn module fixing screws. ► Remove the module from its housing. anti-clockwise. ► Pull the bulb connector. ► Remove the bulb and replace it.
Amber coloured bulbs must be replaced by bulbs with identical specifications and colour.
► Remove the protective cover by pulling the
tab. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and ► Disconnect the bulb holder connector. remove it. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and ► Remove the bulb and replace it. remove it. ► Replace the unit.
203 In the event of a breakdown
To replace this type of bulb, you can also Direction indicators (on the wings) contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Rear lamps
► From the outside, carefully remove the lamp
by pulling it to the rear, then up. ► Disconnect the lamp connector. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn using a universal pair of pliers, if necessary, and pull it out.
► Remove the bulb and replace it. ► Open the tailgate, then unclip the access cover on the side in question. Reversing lamps (on the tailgate) ► Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm box spanner. 1. Brake lamps (LED) ► To avoid losing the nut in the wing trim if it 2. Sidelamps/daytime running lamps (LED) drops, first place a cloth below it. 3. Direction indicators (WY16W amber) ► Manually unscrew and remove the lamp 4. Reversing lamps (W16W) fixing nut. 5. Foglamps (P21W) ► Disengage the retaining clip, while slightly pushing the lamp back.
204 In the event of a breakdown
► Open the tailgate, then insert a flat Foglamps (P21W) ► Pull out the bulb and replace it. screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the access 8 cover on the side in question. ► Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm box Changing a fuse spanner. ► Manually unscrew and remove the lamp Accessing the tools fixing nut. The extraction tweezers are located behind the ► Disengage the retaining clip, while slightly fusebox cover. pushing the lamp back. Depending on version: These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear bumper. ► Pass your hand under the bumper. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it. ► Turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it.
To change the bulb within a few minutes of switching off the ignition, take care not to touch the exhaust - risk of burns!
Number plate lamps (W5W)
► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then ► From the outside, carefully remove the lamp right. by pulling it to the rear. ► Remove the cover completely. ► Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing ► Take the tweezers from their housing. on each side. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it.
► Remove the bulb and replace it. To facilitate removal, perform this procedure with the tailgate half-open. ► Insert a thin screwdriver into the slot in the lens. ► Push it outwards to unclip it. ► Remove the lens.
205 In the event of a breakdown
If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for Version 1 (Full) the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle Box 1 dealer or a qualified workshop. or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions The fuse allocation tables and the and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not F1 3 A Keyless Entry and Starting. corresponding diagrams are available installed in accordance with specifications, in from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified F2 5 A Multifunction screen. particular when the combined power workshop. consumption of all of the additional equipment F5 5 A Reversing camera - Parking sensors. connected exceeds 10 milliamperes. F7 10 A Hi-Fi amplifier. The replacement of a fuse not shown in the allocation tables may cause a serious F8 20 A Rear wiper.
malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a ► Open the glove box. Fuses in the dashboard F10 30 A Locks. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Press on the central handle of the fusebox The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard (left-hand side). F11 30 A Locks.
cover. ► Lower the cover completely. To access the fuses, follow the same procedure F17 10 A Boot 12 V accessory socket. as described for accessing the fuse replacement ► Take the tweezers from their housing. F18 5 A Emergency and assistance calls. tools. Changing a fuse F22 3 A Glove box lighting.
Before changing a fuse: F26 3 A Seat belts not fastened warning lamps display. Good Failed ► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. F27 3 A Rain/sunshine sensor. ► Stop all power consumption. ► Immobilise the vehicle and switch the ignition F31 5 A Airbags.
off. F33 15 A Front 12 V accessory socket. ► Identify the defective fuse using the current Tweezers F35 5 A Instrument panel. allocation tables and diagrams. To replace a fuse, it is essential to: Installing electrical accessories F36 20 A Audio system - Touch screen - CD player - Audio/navigation system. Your vehicle's electrical system is ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse Box 2 from its housing and check the condition of its designed to operate with standard or optional filament. equipment. Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions Before installing other electrical equipment ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of F17 10 A Memorising driving positions. the same rating (same colour); use of a different or accessories on your vehicle, contact a rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
206 In the event of a breakdown Version 1 (Full) 8 Box 1 Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F1 3 A Keyless Entry and Starting. F2 5 A Multifunction screen. F5 5 A Reversing camera - Parking sensors. F7 10 A Hi-Fi amplifier. F8 20 A Rear wiper. F10 30 A Locks. F11 30 A Locks. F17 10 A Boot 12 V accessory socket. F18 5 A Emergency and assistance calls. F22 3 A Glove box lighting. F26 3 A Seat belts not fastened warning lamps display. F27 3 A Rain/sunshine sensor. F31 5 A Airbags. F33 15 A Front 12 V accessory socket. F35 5 A Instrument panel. F36 20 A Audio system - Touch screen - CD player - Audio/navigation system. Box 2 Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F17 10 A Memorising driving positions.
207 In the event of a breakdown
Version 2 (Eco) Accessing the fuses
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F4 15 A Horn. F5 20 A Windscreen wash pump. F6 20 A Rear screenwash pump. F7 10 A 12 V accessory socket. F8 20 A Rear wiper. F10 30 A Locks.
F11 30 A Locks. Alarm siren. F14 5 A Version 1 (Full) F17 5 A Instrument panel. Box 1 F22 3 A Rain/sunshine sensor. Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F24 5 A Reversing camera - Parking sensors. F14 15 A Screenwash pump. F25 5 A Airbags. F15 5 A Power steering. F27 5 A Alarm. F20 25 A Screenwash pump. F28 5 A Emergency and assistance calls. F22 15 A Horn. F29 20 A Audio system - Touch screen - CD player - Audio/navigation system. F23 15 A Right-hand main beam headlamp. F32 15 A Cigarette lighter. F24 15 A Left-hand main beam headlamp. F36 5 A Glove box lighting. Box 2 Engine compartment fuses Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions The fusebox is placed in the engine F8 30 A Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue) compartment near the battery. F12 15 A Automatic gearbox. F14 5 A Automatic gearbox.
208 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses ► Release the two latches A. ► Remove the cover. 8 ► Replace the fuse. ► When you have finished, close the cover carefully, then engage the two latches A to ensure that the fusebox is properly sealed.
Version 1 (Full) Box 1 Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F14 15 A Screenwash pump. F15 5 A Power steering. F20 25 A Screenwash pump. F22 15 A Horn. F23 15 A Right-hand main beam headlamp. F24 15 A Left-hand main beam headlamp. Box 2 Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F8 30 A Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue) F12 15 A Automatic gearbox. F14 5 A Automatic gearbox.
209 In the event of a breakdown
Version 2 (Eco)
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F16 25 A Front foglamps. F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp. F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
12 V battery Access to the battery Starting using another The battery is located under the bonnet.
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery battery or charging a discharged battery. If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be started using a backup battery (either external or Lead-acid starter batteries from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a battery booster. These batteries contain harmful substances (sulphuric acid and lead). Never start the engine by connecting a They must be disposed of in accordance battery charger. with regulations and must never under any Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. circumstances be discarded with household Check beforehand that the backup battery waste. has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity Take used remote control batteries and at least equal to that of the discharged
vehicle batteries to a special collection point. battery. For access to the (+) terminal: The two vehicles must not be in contact with ► Unlock the bonnet by activating the internal each other. Protect your eyes and face before release lever, then the external safety catch. Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment handling the battery. ► Raise the bonnet. on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, All operations on the battery must be carried (+) Positive terminal. lighting, etc.). out in a well ventilated area and away from It has a quick-release clamp. Make sure that the jump leads are well away naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid (-) Negative terminal. from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt, any risk of explosion or fire. As the battery's negative terminal is not etc.). Wash your hands afterwards. accessible, a remote earth point is placed near Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the the battery. engine is running.
210 In the event of a breakdown
► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Follow the instructions provided by the the vehicle has one. manufacturer of the charger. 8 ► Allow the engine to run for at least Never reverse polarities. 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. It is not necessary to disconnect the Driving immediately without having battery. reached a sufficient level of charge may ► Switch off the ignition. affect some of the vehicle's functionalities. ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, lighting, wipers, etc.). With an automatic gearbox, never try to
start the engine by pushing the vehicle. ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. ► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of Charging the battery using a flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the battery charger (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the For optimum service life of the battery, it is booster. essential to maintain an adequate state of ► Connect one end of the green or black cable charge. to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of In some circumstances, it may be necessary to the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting charge the battery:
vehicle). – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; ► Switch off charger B before connecting ► Connect the other end of the green or black – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any cable to the earth point C. several weeks. dangerous sparks. ► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good leave it running for a few minutes. workshop. condition. ► Operate the starter on the broken down To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle and let the engine run. use only a charger compatible with vehicle has one. If the engine does not start immediately, switch lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: off the ignition and wait a few moments before 12 V. • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal trying again. of battery A, ► Wait for it to return to idle. • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C ► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order. on the vehicle.
211 In the event of a breakdown
► At the end of the charging operation, switch Before disconnecting the battery: Reconnecting the (+) terminal approximately 15 minutes before starting the
off charger B before disconnecting the cables ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, engine. from battery A. roof). ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio If minor problems nevertheless persist following system, wipers, lighting, etc.). this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes. qualified workshop. At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect Referring to the relevant section, reset certain 24v 12v the (+) terminal. equipment: – Remote control key or electronic key If this label is present, use only a 12 V Quick-release terminal clamp (depending on version). – Sunroof and electric sun blind. charger to avoid causing irreversible Disconnecting the (+) terminal – Electric windows.
damage to the electrical components related to the Stop & Start system. – Date and time. ► Raise lever A fully. – Preset radio stations. ► Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk After reconnection of the battery, the ► Push clamp B fully down. of explosion! “Collision risk detection system fault” ► Lower lever A to lock clamp B. If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a message is displayed on the instrument panel ► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop when the ignition is switched on. This cover on the (+) terminal. who will verify that the internal components operation is perfectly normal. The message have not been damaged and that the case Do not force the lever as locking will be will disappear while driving. has not cracked, which would mean a risk of impossible if the clamp is not positioned toxic and corrosive acid leaking. correctly; start the procedure again. The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the ► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover Some functions, including Stop & Start, first engine start. on the (+) terminal. After reconnection are not available if the battery is not In this case, the system will only be available ► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. After reconnecting the battery, turn on the sufficiently charged. again after a continuous period with the ► Remove clamp B by lifting it off. ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the vehicle immobilised, the duration of which engine, to enable the electronic systems to depends on the exterior temperature and the initialise. Disconnecting the battery state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 In order to maintain an adequate state of charge For right-hand drive versions, when the hours). for starting the engine, it is recommended that total distance recorder has reached the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is 62 miles (100 km), you must wait taken out of service for a long period.
212 In the event of a breakdown
approximately 15 minutes before starting the Accessories batteries engine. 8 (Hybrid) If minor problems nevertheless persist following The hybrid system has two accessory batteries: this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a one at the front and one at the rear of the qualified workshop. vehicle. Referring to the relevant section, reset certain equipment: The batteries contain harmful – Remote control key or electronic key substances (sulphuric acid and lead). (depending on version). They must be disposed of in accordance
– Sunroof and electric sun blind. with regulations and must not, in any – Electric windows. circumstances, be discarded with household For access to the (+) terminal: – Date and time. waste. ► Release the bonnet by operating the internal – Preset radio stations. Take used remote control batteries and release lever, then the external safety catch. vehicle batteries to a special collection point. ► Raise the bonnet. After reconnection of the battery, the (+) Positive terminal with a quick-release “Collision risk detection system fault” terminal. message is displayed on the instrument panel Protect your eyes and face before (-) Negative terminal. when the ignition is switched on. This handling batteries. As the battery's negative terminal is not operation is perfectly normal. The message All operations on the batteries must be carried accessible, a remote earth point is placed near will disappear while driving. out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to the battery. avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Rear The Stop & Start system may not be Wash your hands afterwards. operational during the trip following the The rear battery is located in the boot. For the replacement of batteries, contact a first engine start. To reach the battery: PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period with the vehicle immobilised, the duration of which Accessing the batteries depends on the exterior temperature and the Front state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours). The front battery is located under the bonnet.
► Lift the boot floor.
213 In the event of a breakdown
(+) Positive terminal, protected by a red plastic has not cracked, which would mean a risk of cover. toxic and corrosive acid leaking. (-) Negative terminal with a black quick-release connector. Disconnection / Charging the front battery reconnection of the using a battery charger batteries For optimum service life of the front battery, it Procedure for disconnecting / reconnecting the is essential to maintain an adequate state of batteries in the event of long-term immobilisation
charge. of the vehicle. In some circumstances, it may be necessary to Before disconnecting the batteries: ► Disconnect the (+) terminal of the front charge the front battery: ► Switch off charger B before connecting ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, battery by disconnecting the red quick-release – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any roof). clamp: – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for dangerous sparks. ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio • Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. several weeks. ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good system, wipers, lighting, etc.), • Remove clamp B by lifting it off. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified condition. ► Switch off the ignition and wait for the READY workshop. ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the indicator lamp to go out. Reconnection ► Observe a waiting time of 4 minutes. To charge the vehicle's front battery vehicle has one. Never reverse the order of the ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: yourself, use only a charger compatible Disconnection reconnection steps - risk of irreversible with lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal damage! of 12 V. of battery A,
Never reverse the order of the • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C disconnection steps - risk of irreversible on the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the damage! ► At the end of the charging operation, switch manufacturer of the charger. off charger before disconnecting the cables ► Disconnect the terminal of the rear battery Never reverse polarities. B (-) from battery A. using the black quick-release connector.
It is not necessary to disconnect the Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk battery. of explosion! If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a ► Switch off the ignition. PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio who will verify that the internal components
system, lighting, wipers, etc.). have not been damaged and that the case
214 In the event of a breakdown
► Connect the (+) terminal of the front battery Towing the vehicle by connecting the red quick-release clamp: 8 • Raise lever A fully. Procedure for having your vehicle towed or • Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. for towing another vehicle using a removable • Push clamp B fully down. mechanical device. • Lower lever A to lock clamp B. General recommendations ► Connect the (-) terminal to the rear battery Observe the legislation in force in the using the black quick-release terminal connector. country where you are driving. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is After reconnection higher than that of the towed vehicle.
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the The driver must remain at the wheel of the ► Disconnect the (+) terminal of the front ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving battery by disconnecting the red quick-release engine, to enable the electronic systems to licence. clamp: initialise. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on • Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. the ground, always use an approved towing • Remove clamp B by lifting it off. For right-hand drive versions, when the total distance recorder has reached arm; rope and straps are prohibited. Reconnection 62 miles (100 km), you must wait The towing vehicle must move off gently. approximately 15 minutes before starting the When the vehicle is towed with its engine Never reverse the order of the engine. off, there is no longer braking and steering reconnection steps - risk of irreversible assistance. damage! If minor problems nevertheless persist following
this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a A professional towing service must be qualified workshop. called if: Referring to the relevant section, reset certain – Broken down on a motorway or main road. equipment: – Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, – Remote control key or electronic key unlock the steering, or release the parking (depending on version). brake. – Sunroof and electric sun blind. – Not possible to tow a vehicle with an – Electric windows. automatic gearbox, with the engine running. – Date and time. – Towing with only two wheels on the ground. – Preset radio stations. – Four-wheel drive vehicle. – No approved towbar available.
215 In the event of a breakdown
Hybrid vehicles Accessing the tools Before any intervention, with the ignition on, depress the brake pedal and select mode N, then switch off the hybrid system READY( indicator lamp off). Always call on professionals for recovery of the vehicle on a flatbed lorry or trailer.
Use the towing eye only to free the vehicle where it is stuck, or to secure it for recovery on a flatbed lorry or trailer.
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion / Manual
Internal combustion / Automatic
Hybrid 2WD
Hybrid 4WD
2WD: 2-wheel drive. 4WD: 4-wheel drive. In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).
216 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the tools Depending on version, the towing eye is stored either in the interior trim of the boot sill, left-hand 8 side, or in a bag behind the left-hand rear seat. The towing eye is stored in a tool box, under the
boot floor.
For more information on accessing the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section. Towing your vehicle To access the front screw thread:
Model with halogen headlamps ► Press the indicated zone until the cover is
unclipped.
► Unclip the cover by pressing at its top left- Model with Full LED technology headlamps hand corner. ► Press and hold the top right-hand corner,
then slide your finger to the left until the cover unclips. To be towed:
► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Install the towbar. ► Put the gearbox into neutral.
217 In the event of a breakdown
Failure to observe this instruction could ► Install the towbar. result in damage to certain components ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both (braking, transmission, etc.) and to the vehicles. absence of braking assistance the next time ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a the engine is started. short distance.
Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle with the driving wheels on the ground and the engine off.
► Unlock the steering and release the parking brake. ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its left-hand ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both section. ► Pull the cover downwards.
vehicles. ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a short distance.
Towing another vehicle To access the rear screw thread:
► Press the top left-hand corner of the cover, then press the bumper to the right of the cover until it unclips. To tow: ► Screw the towing eye in fully.
218 Technical data
Engine technical data and The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the 9 towed loads towball. When exterior temperatures are high, the Engines vehicle performance may be limited in The engine characteristics are given in the order to protect the engine. When the exterior vehicle's registration document, as well as in temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the sales brochures. towed weight. The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle conditions defined in European legislation can adversely affect its road holding. (Directive 1999/99/EC). Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed dealer or a qualified workshop. a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the local legislation in force). Weights and towed loads The weights and towed loads relating to the vehicle are indicated on the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also indicated on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW (Gross Train Weight) values and the towable loads listed are valid for a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. The towable load must be reduced by steps of 10% for each additional 1,000 metres.
219 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Petrol
Engines 1.2 PureTech 130 S&S 1.2 PureTech 130 S&S 1.2 PureTech 130 S&S Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8 EAT6 (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) Codes EB2ADTS MB6 STT EB2ADTS ATN8 STT EB2DTSM AT6III STT Model codes HNSM/C HNSM/S HNSU/C HNSU/S HNWW/C HNWW/S MR... Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008 3008 5008 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199 1,199 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,400 1,280 1,150 950 1,200 1,000 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 690 690 690 750 670 690 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72 80 72 80 72
220 Technical data
Engines 1.6 THP 150 1.6 THP 165 1.6 PureTech 180 S&S 9 Gearboxes EAT6 EAT6 EAT8 (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) Codes EP6FDTMD AT6III EP6FDTM AT6III EP6FADTXD ATN8 STT Model codes 5GXV/C 5GXV/S 5GYV/C 5GYV/S 5GFR/C 5GFR/S M4... 5GXW/C 5GXW/S 5GYW/C 5GYW/S Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008 3008 5008 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598 1,598 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 121.4 133 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 600 600 1,500 1,400 on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,550* 1,350* Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 600 600 750 750 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72 80 72 80 72
* For Australia only.
221 Technical data Engines and towed loads – BlueHDi Diesel
Engines 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S 1.5 BlueHDi 130 S&S Gearboxes BVM6 EAT6 EAT8 (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) Codes DV5RC ML6O STT DV5RC AT6III STT DV5RC ATN8 STT Model codes YHZJ/C YHZJ/S YHZX/C YHZX/S YHZR/C YHZR/S MC... Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008 3008 5008 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 1,499 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,500 1,300 600 600 1,300 1,200 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 750 600 600 750 750 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72 80 72 80 72
222 Technical data
Engines 2.0 BlueHDi 180 S&S 9 Gearboxes EAT8 (Auto. 8-speed) Codes DW10FC AMN8 STT Model codes EHZR/C EHZR/S MJ... Body styles 3008 5008 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 130 Fuel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 2,000 1,800 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 750 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72
223 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Diesel Engine and towed loads - Hybrid
Engines 2.0 HDi 150 2.0 HDi 150 HYBRID 225 e-EAT8 HYBRID4 300 e-EAT8 Gearboxes BVM6 EAT6 Codes EP6FADTXHPD EP6FADTXHPA (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) Model codes 5GQU/C 5GBU/C Codes DW10FD ML6C DW10FD AM6III M4... Model codes AHXG/C AHXG/S AHXV/C AHXV/S Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,310 1,250 MJ... AHXL/C on a 10% or 12% gradient Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008 Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 750 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,997 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) - 64 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 110 Petrol engines PureTech 180 PureTech 200 Fuel Diesel Diesel Gearboxes Electric automatic 8-speed Electric automatic 8-speed Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 600 600 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598 on a 10% or 12% gradient Max. power: EC standard (kW) 132 147 Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 600 600 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 70 72 70 72 Electric motor(s) Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Max. power: EC standard (kW) 80 Front: 80 Rear: 80 Battery Technology Lithium-Ion Voltage (Volts AC) 240-400 240-400 Max. consumption (kWh) 13.2 13.2 Combined power (kW) 165 220
224 Technical data Engine and towed loads - Hybrid 9 HYBRID 225 e-EAT8 HYBRID4 300 e-EAT8 Codes EP6FADTXHPD EP6FADTXHPA Model codes 5GQU/C 5GBU/C M4... Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,310 1,250 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 750 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) - 64 Petrol engines PureTech 180 PureTech 200 Gearboxes Electric automatic 8-speed Electric automatic 8-speed Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 132 147 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Electric motor(s) Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Max. power: EC standard (kW) 80 Front: 80 Rear: 80 Battery Technology Lithium-Ion Voltage (Volts AC) 240-400 240-400 Max. consumption (kWh) 13.2 13.2 Combined power (kW) 165 220
225 Technical data
Dimensions (mm) 5008
These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle. 3008
Identification markings Various visible markings for the identification and research of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under the bonnet. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the dashboard. Engraved on a label, visible through the windscreen. C. Manufacturer's label. Affixed to the right-hand door.
Bears the following information: – Manufacturer’s name. – European whole vehicle type approval number.
226 Technical data
– Vehicle Identification number (VIN). – Gross vehicle weight (GVW). 9 – Gross train weight (GTW). – Maximum weight on the front axle. – Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres/paint code label. Affixed to the driver's door.
Bears the following information about the tyres: – Tyre pressures, unladen and laden. – Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions Identification markings and type as well as the load and speed indices. Various visible markings for the identification and – Spare tyre pressure. research of your vehicle. Also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed indices than those indicated on the label, without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under the bonnet. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the dashboard. Engraved on a label, visible through the windscreen. C. Manufacturer's label. Affixed to the right-hand door. Bears the following information: – Manufacturer’s name. – European whole vehicle type approval number.
227 Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system To avoid discharging the battery, the Short press: select the preset radio station. Steering mounted controls
audio system may switch off after a few Long press: preset a radio station. minutes if the engine is not running. Radio: Automatic step by step search up/down Steering mounted controls - for radio stations. Type 1 Media: First steps Select previous/next CD, USB, streaming track. Press: On/Off. Scroll in a list. Rotate: adjust volume. Radio: Radio: Short press: change audio source (radio; Select the previous / next preset radio Manual step by step search up/down for USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; station.
radio stations. streaming). Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Select previous/next MP3 folder. The different functions and settings Long press: display the Telephone menu (if a list. Media: described vary according to the version telephone is connected). Media: Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/playlist and configuration of your vehicle. Adjust audio settings: Select the previous / next track. on the USB device. Front/rear fader; left/right balance; bass/ Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Scroll in a list. treble; loudness; audio ambience. list. As a safety measure and because it Cancel the current operation. Activate/Deactivate automatic volume Radio: requires sustained attention by the driver, Go up one level (menu or folder). adjustment (based on the vehicle’s speed). Short press: display the list of radio the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone Access the main menu. stations. with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your Radio : Short press: display the list of radio Long press: update the list. audio system must be done with the vehicle Activate/Deactivate TA function (traffic stations. Media: stationary and the ignition on. announcements). Long press: update the list. Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: select type of announcement. Media : Long press: display the available sorting options. Your audio system is coded in such a Selection of FM/DAB/AM wavebands. Short press: display the list of folders. Other than telephone call: way that it will only operate in your Long press: display the available sorting options. Short press: changing audio source vehicle. Select the screen display mode, between: (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; All work on the system must be carried out Date; Audio functions; Trip computer; streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" exclusively by a dealer or qualified workshop, Telephone. menu is open. to avoid any risk of electrocution, fire or Confirm or display contextual menu. Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. mechanical faults. In the event of a telephone call: Buttons 1 to 6. Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call.
228 Bluetooth® audio system
Steering mounted controls During a telephone call: In the event of a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone Short press: accept the call. 10 menu. Long press: reject the call. Steering mounted controls - Long press: end the call. During a telephone call: Type 1 Confirm a selection. Short press: open the contextual telephone menu.
Increase volume. Long press: end the call. Start voice recognition on your Radio: Decrease volume. smartphone via the system. Select the previous / next preset radio Radio: station. Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio Select the previous / next item in a menu or a pressing the increase and decrease stations. list. volume buttons. Long press: update the list. Media: Media: Select the previous / next track. Short press: display the list of folders. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Steering mounted controls - Long press: display the available sorting options. list. Type 2 Radio: Radio: Select the previous / next preset radio Short press: display the list of radio station. stations. Access to the main menu. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Long press: update the list. list. Media: Increase volume. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Select the previous / next track. Long press: display the available sorting options. Mute / Restore the sound. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Other than telephone call: list. Short press: changing audio source Decrease volume. Press the thumbwheel: confirm. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" Other than telephone call: menu is open. Short press: changing audio source Menus Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; Depending on version. In the event of a telephone call: streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" "Multimedia": Media settings, Radio Short press: accept the call. menu is open. settings. Long press: reject the call. Long press: open the "Telephone" menu.
229 Bluetooth® audio system
"Telephone": Call, Directory Press this button to display the list of Long procedure Press the TA button to activate or management, Telephone management, stations received locally. Press the MENU button. deactivate traffic messages. Hang up. To update this list, press for more than two "Trip computer". seconds. The sound is cut while updating. Select "Audio functions". Receiving INFO messages The INFO function gives priority to TA "Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning log, RDS Press . OK alert messages. To be active, this etc. The external environment (hills, function needs good reception of a radio "Connections": Manage connections, Select the " " buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, FM waveband preferences station that transmits this type of message. search for devices. function. etc.) may block reception, including in RDS When a message is transmitted, the current "Personalisation-configuration": Define Press . mode. This is a normal effect of the way in OK audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is the vehicle parameters, Choice of which radio waves are transmitted and does interrupted automatically to receive the INFO language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Select " ". not indicate any failure of the audio Frequency tracking (RDS) message. Normal play of the media Date and time adjustment. equipment. previously playing is resumed at the end of Press the "MENU" button. Press , RDS is displayed on the OK the message. screen. If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol Move from one menu to another. Make a long press on this button to appears struck out in the screen. Play TA messages display the list of categories. Enter a menu. Select or deselect categories. The RDS, if activated, enables you to The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To continue listening to the same station by Activate or deactivate the reception of the operate, this function needs good reception of automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. corresponding messages. Radio However, in certain conditions, coverage of a radio station that carries this type of an RDS station may not be assured message. When a traffic report is transmitted, Display TEXT INFOS Selecting a station throughout the entire country as radio stations the current audio source (Radio, CD, etc.) is Press the SOURCE button repeatedly do not cover 100% of the territory. This interrupted automatically to play the TA Radio text is information transmitted by and select the radio. explains the loss of reception of the station message. Normal play of the media the radio station related to the station's Press this button to select a waveband during a journey. previously playing is resumed at the end of current programme or song. (FM / AM / DAB). the message. When the radio station is displayed in the Press one of the buttons for an automatic Short procedure screen, press to display the search for radio stations. Take care when increasing the volume OK contextual menu. Press one of the buttons to carry out a In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to activate while listening to TA messages. The Select " " and manual search up / down for radio or deactivate RDS directly. volume may prove too high on return to the RadioText (TXT) display confirm to save. frequencies. original audio source. OK
230 Bluetooth® audio system
Press the TA button to activate or DAB (Digital Audio When changing region, updating the list deactivate traffic messages. of preset radio stations is recommended. 10
Broadcasting) radio Receiving INFO messages Terrestrial Digital Radio The INFO function gives priority to TA Depending on version alert messages. To be active, this If the current DAB radio station is not
function needs good reception of a radio available on FM, "DAB FM" is struck out. station that transmits this type of message. Full list of radio stations and "multiplexes".
When a message is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is interrupted automatically to receive the INFO Terrestrial digital radio message. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of Digital radio provides a superior audio the message. quality and also additional categories of traffic announcements (TA INFO). Make a long press on this button to The different "multiplex / ensemble” services display the list of categories. offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical Select or deselect categories. order. 1 Options display: if active but not available, the Activate or deactivate the reception of the display will be struck out. Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, etc.) corresponding messages. 2 Display showing the name of the current station. Change of station within the same Display TEXT INFOS 3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. "multiplex / ensemble". Short press: select the preset radio station. Starting of a search for the previous / next Radio text is information transmitted by Long press: memorise a radio station. "multiplex / ensemble". the radio station related to the station's 4 Display showing the name of the “multiplex” Long press: selection of the categories of current programme or song. service being used. news desired among Transport, News, 5 RadioText (TXT) display for the current radio Entertainment and Special Flash (available When the radio station is displayed in the station. depending on the station). screen, press OK to display the 6 Represents the signal strength for the band contextual menu. being listened to. Select "RadioText (TXT) display" and confirmOK to save.
231 Bluetooth® audio system
When the radio station is displayed in the If the "DAB" station you are listening to is When the USB port is used, the portable Select by "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / screen , press "OK" to display the not available on FM ("DAB/FM" option device charges automatically. "Playlist". contextual menu. struck out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is Depending on availability and type of device (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto not on, the sound will be cut when the digital used. Play mode tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information signal is too weak. Press OK to select the desired on the station, etc.) The play modes available are: classification, then press OK again to – Normal: the tracks are played in order, confirm. Media depending on the classification of the selected DAB / FM station tracking files. Playing files – Random: the tracks in an album or folder are "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of Make a short press on this button to USB port played in a random order. the country. display the chosen classification. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB – Random on all media: all of the tracks saved When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM Navigate in the list using the left / right port or connect the USB device to the in the media are played in random order. auto tracking" allows you to continue and up / down buttons. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). – Repeat: the tracks played are only those from listening to the same station, by automatically Confirm the selection by pressing OK. The system changes automatically to "USB" the current album or folder. switching to the corresponding analogue FM source. Press this button to display the contextual station (if it exists). Press one of these buttons to go to the menu for the Media function. When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is active, To protect the system, do not use a USB previous / next track in the list. Press this button to select the chosen the DAB station will be selected automatically. hub. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast play mode. forward or rewind. Press the button. Press this button to confirm. Press one of these buttons to go to the MENU Any additional devices connected to the previous / next " " / " " / system must comply with the standard Folder Artist Select "Multimedia" and confirm. The choice made is displayed at the top of the "Genre" / "Playlist"* in the list. applicable to the product and/or the standard screen. IEC 60950-1. Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and Input AUX socket (AUX) Choosing a track to play confirm. The system builds playlists (in temporary Depending on equipment Press one of these buttons to go to the memory); this operation can take from a Connect a portable device (MP3 player, If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is previous / next track. few seconds to several minutes at the first etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds Press one of these buttons to go to the connection. audio cable (not supplied). when the system switches to the analogue previous / next folder. Reduce the number of non-music files and the FM station sometimes with a change in Any additional devices connected to the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. volume. File classification system must comply with the standard Playlists are updated every time a new USB Make a long press on this button to memory stick is connected. display the different classifications. * Depending on availability and the type of device used.
232 Bluetooth® audio system
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / applicable to the product and/or the standard Press the LIST button to display the list of "Playlist". IEC 60950-1. tracks on the CD. 10 Depending on availability and type of device Press and hold one of these buttons for used. Press the SOURCE button several times fast forward or rewind. Press OK to select the desired in succession and select "AUX". classification, then press OK again to First adjust the volume on your portable device Playing an MP3 compilation (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your confirm. Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. audio system. Controls are managed via the The audio equipment searches for all of the portable device. Playing files music tracks, which may take anything between Make a short press on this button to Do not connect the same device to both a few seconds and several tens of seconds, display the chosen classification. the auxiliary jack socket and the USB before play begins. Navigate in the list using the left / right port at the same time. On a single disc, the CD player can read and up / down buttons. up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 Confirm the selection by pressing OK. CD player directory levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of Press one of these buttons to go to the Insert circular compact discs only. two levels to reduce the access time before previous / next track in the list. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs the CD is played. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may The folder structure is not observed during forward or rewind. cause faults which are no reflection on the playback. Press one of these buttons to go to the quality of the original player. All of the files are displayed on a single level. previous / next "Folder" / "Artist" / Insert a CD in the player, play begins "Genre" / "Playlist"* in the list. automatically. To play a disc which has already been Input AUX socket (AUX) External CD players connected via the inserted, press the SOURCE button USB port are not recognised by the several times in succession and select "CD". Depending on equipment system. Press one of the buttons to select a folder Connect a portable device (MP3 player, on the CD. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an To play a disc which has already been Press one of the buttons to select a track audio cable (not supplied). inserted, press the SOURCE button on the CD. several times in succession and select " ". Any additional devices connected to the CD Press the LIST button to display the list of Press one of the buttons to select a track system must comply with the standard directories of the MP3 compilation. on the CD.
* Depending on availability and the type of device used.
233 Bluetooth® audio system
Press and hold one of these buttons for Information and advice In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the The services available depend on the fast forward or rewind. Joliet standard is recommended. network, the SIM card and the The CD player can play files with “.mp3”, “.wma”, To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. ® “.wav” and “.aac” file extensions, with a bit rate of Bluetooth audio streaming Check the instructions for your telephone and 32 to 320 Kbps. Use only USB memory sticks formatted Streaming allows music files on the telephone to with your service provider for the services to It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA TAG). FAT 32 (File Allocation Table). which you have access. be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. No other file types (“.mp”4, etc.) can be read. Connect the telephone. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 It is recommended that you use genuine (Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone" standard. Apple® USB cables for correct operation. Procedure from the telephone section). The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and Select the name of the system in the list Activate the streaming source by pressing 48 kHz. of devices detected. SOURCE. Via the USB port, the system can play audio files In certain cases, play of the audio files must be Telephone with the extension ".mp3”, “.wma”, “.wav”, “.cbr”, Procedure from the system initiated from the keypad. “.vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. ® Press the MENU button. Audio files can be selected using the buttons on No other file types (“.mp4”, etc.) can be read. Pairing a Bluetooth the audio system control panel and the steering Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 telephone Select "Connections". mounted controls. The contextual information standard. can be displayed in the screen. As a safety measure and because they The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and Confirm withOK. If the telephone supports the function. The audio 48 kHz. require prolonged attention on the part of quality depends on the quality of transmission by the driver, the operations for pairing of the File names should have fewer than 20 Select "Search for a device". the telephone. characters, avoiding special characters (e.g. Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must ® « ? ; ù) so as to avoid any reading or display Confirm withOK. Connecting Apple players problems. be carried out with the vehicle stationary Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using and the ignition on. In order to be able to play a burned CDR or A window is displayed with a search in progress a suitable cable (not supplied). CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or message. Play starts automatically. Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. Activate the telephone's Bluetooth In the list of devices detected, select a telephone Control is via the audio system. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not function and ensure that it is "visible to to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a The classifications available are those of the be played correctly. all" (telephone configuration). time. portable device connected (artists / albums / It is recommended that the same burning genres / playlists). standard be always used on an individual disc, Completing the pairing The version of software in the audio system may with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) for not be compatible with the generation of your the best acoustic quality. To complete the pairing, whichever Apple® player. procedure is used (from the telephone or
234 Bluetooth® audio system
The services available depend on the from the system), ensure that the code is the Press OK to confirm. network, the SIM card and the same in the system and in the telephone. 10 compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Select "Bluetooth Connections Check the instructions for your telephone and If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not management" and confirm. The list of with your service provider for the services to restricted. paired telephones is displayed. which you have access. A message appears in the screen confirming the Press OK to confirm. pairing. Indicates that a device is connected. Procedure from the telephone Information and advice Select the name of the system in the list The "Telephone" menu gives access to the of devices detected. following functions in particular: "Directory", if A number indicates the profile of the your telephone equipment is fully compatible, connection with the system: Procedure from the system "Call log", "View paired devices". – 1 for media or 1 for telephone. Press the MENU button. Depending on the type of telephone, you may be – 2 for media and telephone. asked to accept or confirm access by the system Indicates connection of the audio Select "Connections". to each of these functions. steaming profile. Go to the Brand's website for more Indicates connection of the hands-free Confirm withOK. information (compatibility, more help, telephone profile. etc.). Select a telephone. Select "Search for a device". Press OK to confirm. Confirm withOK. Managing connections Then select and confirm: A window is displayed with a search in progress The telephone connection automatically message. includes hands free operation and audio – "Connect telephone" / "Disconnect In the list of devices detected, select a telephone streaming. telephone" : to connect / disconnect the to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a The ability of the system to connect to just telephone or the hands-free kit only. time. one profile depends on the telephone. Both profiles may connect by default. – "Connect media player" / "Disconnect Completing the pairing media player" : to connect / disconnect Press the MENU button. streaming only. To complete the pairing, whichever – "Connect telephone + media player" / procedure is used (from the telephone or Select "Connections". "Disconnect telephone + media player" : to
235 Bluetooth® audio system
connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free Press this button for more than two Confirm withOK. Interactive voice response kit and streaming). seconds for access to your directory, then From the contextual menu, select "DTMF – "Delete connection": to delete the pairing. navigate using the thumb wheel. tones" and confirm to use the digital Microphone off When you delete a pairing in the system, keypad to navigate in the interactive voice Ending a call (so that the caller cannot hear) remember to delete it from your response menu. In the " " menu. In the contextual menu: telephone as well. Telephone Confirm withOK. Select "End call". Press OK to confirm. Confirm withOK to end the call. – select "Micro OFF" to switch off the During a call, press one of these buttons microphone. Consultation call for more than two seconds. – deselect "Micro OFF" to switch the From the contextual menu, select microphone on. " " and validate to return to a call Receiving a call The system accesses the telephone's Switch Confirm withOK. left on hold. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a contacts directory, depending on its Confirm with superimposed display in the screen. compatibility, and while it is connected via OK. Select the "YES" tab in the screen using Bluetooth. Telephone mode the buttons. Confirm withOK. In the contextual menu: Directory With certain telephones connected by To access the directory, press and hold Bluetooth you can send a contact to the Press this button at the steering mounted – select "Telephone mode" to transfer the SRC/TEL. directory of the audio system. controls to accept the call. call to the telephone (for example, to leave the Select "Directory" to see the list of Contacts imported in this way are saved in a vehicle while continuing a conversation). contacts. permanent directory visible to all, whatever Making a call – deselect "Telephone mode" to transfer the Confirm withOK. the telephone connected. call to the vehicle. In the "Telephone" menu. The menu for the directory is not accessible if Confirm with Select " ". OK. To modify the contacts saved in the Call it is empty. Select "Dial". system, press MENU then select If the contact has been cut off, when you Or "Telephone" and confirm. reconnect on returning to the vehicle, Select "Directory". Managing calls Select "Directory management" and confirm. the Bluetooth connection will be restored Or During a call, press to display the You can: OK automatically and sound returned to the Select "Calls list". contextual menu. – "Consult an entry", system (depending on the compatibility of the Confirm withOK. – "Delete an entry", End call telephone). – "Delete all entries". In some cases, the Telephone mode must be In the contextual menu, select " " The system accesses the telephone's Hang up activated from the telephone. to end the call. contacts directory, depending on its
236 Bluetooth® audio system
Interactive voice response compatibility, and while it is connected via With the engine off, the audio system Bluetooth. switches off after a few minutes of use. 10 From the contextual menu, select "DTMF tones" and confirm to use the digital With certain telephones connected by When the engine is switched off, the audio keypad to navigate in the interactive voice Bluetooth you can send a contact to the system operating time depends on the state of response menu. directory of the audio system. charge of the battery. Confirm withOK. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a The switch-off is normal: the audio system permanent directory visible to all, whatever the switches to economy mode and switches off to telephone connected. avoid discharging the vehicle's battery. Consultation call The menu for the directory is not accessible if it ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the From the contextual menu, select is empty. charge of the battery. "Switch" and validate to return to a call The message "the audio system is left on hold. Voice recognition overheated" is displayed onscreen. Confirm withOK. This function allows you to use your To protect the installation if the ambient smartphone's voice recognition via the system. temperature is too high, the audio system To start voice recognition, depending on the type switches to an automatic thermal protection Directory of steering mounted controls: mode, in which the volume may be decreased or To access the directory, press and hold Make a long press on the end of the lighting the CD player stopped. SRC/TEL. control stalk. ► Switch the audio system off for a few minutes Select "Directory" to see the list of OR to allow the system to cool. contacts. Press this button. Confirm withOK. Radio There is a difference in sound quality Voice recognition requires the use of a between the different audio sources (radio, To modify the contacts saved in the compatible smartphone first connected to CD, etc.). system, press MENU then select the vehicle by Bluetooth. "Telephone" and confirm. For optimal listening quality, the audio settings Select "Directory management" and confirm. (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) You can: can be adjusted to different audio sources, – "Consult an entry", Frequently asked resulting in audible differences when switching – "Delete an entry", questions between sources (radio, CD, etc.). – " ". ► Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Delete all entries The following information groups together the The system accesses the telephone's Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are appropriate answers to the most frequently asked questions contacts directory, depending on its to the sources being listened to. We recommend concerning your audio system. setting the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re
237 Bluetooth® audio system
balance and Le-Ri balance) to the middle The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for ► Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot position, setting the musical ambience to "None", example when going through an automatic car be played if it is too badly damaged. setting loudness correction to "Active" in CD wash or in an underground car park). ► Check the content in the case of a burned mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. CD: read the recommendations in the "Audio" The preset stations do not function (no The sound intermittently cuts out for 1 or 2 section. sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). seconds in radio mode. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not The wrong waveband is selected. During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS be played by the audio system. ► Press the BAND button to return to the searches for another frequency giving better The CD audio quality is is poor. waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the reception of the station. The CD is scratched or of poor quality. stations are preset. ► Switch off the RDS function if the ► Insert good quality CDs and store them in Traffic announcement (TA) is shown but I phenomenon occurs too frequently and always suitable conditions. receive no traffic information. on the same route. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are The radio station is not part of the regional traffic unsuitable. information network. Media ► Return bass and treble settings to 0, without ► Tune to a radio station that broadcasts traffic The Bluetooth connection is cut. selecting an ambience. information. The battery in the peripheral device may not be I am unable to play the music files on my The reception quality of the tuned radio sufficiently charged. smartphone via the USB port. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Charge the battery in the peripheral device. Depending on the smartphone, access by the presets are inoperative (no sound, 87.5 MHz The message "USB device error" is displayed audio system to music on the smartphone may is displayed, etc.). in the screen. have to be approved on the latter. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s The USB stick has not been recognised, or may ► Manually activate the MTP profile on the transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the be corrupted. smartphone (USB settings menu). geographical area. ► Reformat the USB memory stick. ► Activate the RDS function to allow the system The CD is systematically ejected or is not Telephone to check for a more powerful transmitter in the played. I am unable to access my voicemail. area. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Few telephones or service providers allow the The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, not contain audio files or contains audio files of a use of this function. basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, format not recognised by the audio system. ► Call your voicemail, via the telephone menu, including in RDS mode. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system using the number provided by your operator. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not recognised by the audio system. I am unable to access my directory of not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ► Check that the CD is inserted in the player contacts. the right way up. ► Check the compatibility of your telephone.
238 Bluetooth® audio system
You did not grant access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. 10 ► Accept or confirm access by the system to the contacts on your telephone. I am unable to continue a conversation when getting into my vehicle. Handset mode is activated. ► Deselect handset mode to transfer the call to the vehicle. I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating systems) have their own specificities in the pairing procedure and some telephones are not compatible. ► Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the telephone pairing from the system and the system pairing from the telephone, in order to view the compatibility of the telephones.
239 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
PEUGEOT Connect applications interrupt their display while the At all times it is possible to display the rolling vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three Radio – Changing the system settings and fingers. configuration. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the The system is protected in such a way screen, it is possible to switch between pages that it will only operate in the vehicle. either by tapping the tab for the desired page, or The Energy Economy Mode message is by using a finger, sliding the pages to the left or displayed when the system is about to enter to the right. the corresponding mode. Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or to confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or The system’s Open Source Software confirm. (OSS) source codes are available at the following addresses: The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ type. Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional telephone product. The functions and settings described First steps Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands. vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes configuration. the sound. Certain information is displayed permanently in With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. the upper bar of the touch screen: For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using – Air conditioning status information (depending require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons on version), and direct access to the the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). corresponding menu. with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the – Radio Media and Telephone menu status on: touch screen for access to the menus, then information. – Pairing the smartphone with the system in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. – Privacy status information. Bluetooth mode. Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Access to the touch screen and digital – Using the smartphone. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen instrument panel settings. – Connection to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM for access to the menus, then press the virtual Audio source selection (depending on or Android Auto applications (certain buttons in the touch screen. equipment):
240 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
– FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls - equipment). 11 – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Type 2
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Steering mounted controls - – USB Memory stick. Type 1 – Media player connected via the auxiliary Voice commands:
socket (depending on equipment). This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio: (depending on equipment). Select the previous/next preset radio Short press, smartphone voice commands via station. the system. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Increase volume. Media: Select the previous/next track. Decrease volume. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Mute by pressing the volume increase Radio: and decrease buttons simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio (depending on equipment).
stations. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two Long press: update the list. In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to volume buttons. Media: create a profile for an individual or for a (short press): change the Short press: display the list of folders. Media group of people with shared interests, and multimedia source. Long press: display the available sorting options. configure a wide range of settings (radio (short press): start telephone Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if Telephone presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). call. equipment connected; CD; streaming). Settings are applied automatically. (short press): access Confirm a selection. Call in progress telephone menu. (long press): reject an incoming call, In very hot conditions, the volume may Increase volume. Telephone be limited to protect the system. It may end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. enter standby mode (with the screen and Decrease volume. sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. The system will resume normal operation Mute/restore sound by simultaneously (rotate): previous/next track, move in a when the temperature in the passenger pressing the increase and decrease Media list. compartment has dropped. volume buttons.
241 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Radio Media Settings Navigation selected, access to presets. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Menus Applications
Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or Configure the navigation and select your TM ® configure the sound (balance, ambience, destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, Android Auto. Telephone etc.). Air conditioning Driving
Access configurable equipment. 18,5 21,5
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.
Run certain applications on a smartphone Manage various temperature and air flow connected via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain settings. Auto. vehicle functions.
242 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a recipient. 11 Viewing photos Select the "Quick messages” tab. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display To protect the system, do not use a USB settings for messages. hub. Press this button to write a new message.
The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it. Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected page. message to display the secondary page. Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the TM ® destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or existing text. Android Auto. Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message.
Air conditioning Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.
Press this button to display the details of the photo. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Radio 18,5 21,5 Selecting a station Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main Press Applications to display the main page. page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations. Press "SMS". Manage various temperature and air flow Or settings. Select the "SMS” tab. Move the slider to manually search for frequencies up or down. Press this button to select the display Or settings for messages. Press the frequency.
243 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved Activating/Deactivating RDS by the Brand, such as a USB charger RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages connected to the 12 V socket. listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives The exterior environment (hills, buildings, retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio Media page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press the " " button to access the information is being broadcast, the current context of radio wave transmission, and OPTIONS secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the in no way indicative of an audio system Activate/deactivate " ". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the malfunction. RDS previously playing media resumes at the end of Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message. Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main RDS station tracking may not be Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. available nationwide, as many radio secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Activate/deactivate "TA". secondary page. This explains the loss of reception of the Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Displaying text information The "Radio Text" function displays information Audio settings Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page. Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page. already preset. Press "Audio settings".
244 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound", DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm. "Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure 11 the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. may be a time offset of a few seconds Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume. Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB". source. order. Press to display the main In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Radio Media If the "DAB" station being listened to is page. Driver and Front only settings are common not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB Press the " " button to access the to all sources. OPTIONS Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut secondary page. In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate out while the digital signal is too weak. "Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band". and "Touch tones". Press in the shaded area to confirm. Media The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys© system) uses audio processing to adjust the sound quality FM-DAB Follow-up USB port according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the port or connect the USB device to the "FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). listening to the same station by automatically Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© To protect the system, do not use a USB switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue optimises the sound distribution inside hub. station (if there is one). the passenger compartment. Press Radio Media to display the main The system builds playlists (in temporary page. memory); this operation can take from a Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the few seconds to several minutes at the first secondary page. connection. Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
245 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice Telephone is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the The system supports USB mass storage connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone. USB sockets devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Depending on equipment, for more information have not been changed. the system's touch buttons. supplied. on the USB sockets compatible with the ®, TM or Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system CarPlay MirrorLink Android Auto smartphone is considered to be a media controls. applications, refer to the "Ease of use and Depending on equipment source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, comfort" section. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using The synchronisation of a smartphone etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple® players allows users to display applications streaming, if compatible. adapted to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket has been selected in the audio settings. To protect the system, do not use a USB Android Auto technology of the smartphone using a suitable cable (not supplied). ® First adjust the volume on the portable device hub. on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay Play starts automatically. ® (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the technology, the CarPlay function must be Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with audio system. activated on the smartphone beforehand. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Controls are managed via the portable device. The classifications available are those of For the communication process between the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and the smartphone and the system to work, it is Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps. essential in all cases that the smartphone is podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. unlocked. Press Radio Media to display the main classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. As the principles and standards are page. library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. constantly changing, it is recommended Press the "SOURCES" button. The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and that you keep the smartphone's operating Select the source. modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz. system up-to-date, as well as the date and BluetoothStreaming® first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we time of the smartphone and of the system. classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20 For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed confirm to go down through the menu to the characters long that do not contain any special Brand's national website. from your smartphone. desired track. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the We recommend using the original USB system. Apple® player. cable for the portable device.
246 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Telephone MirrorLinkTM smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the application in the system. 11 USB sockets connection Once the connection is established, a page is Depending on equipment, for more information The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a displayed, showing the applications already on the USB sockets compatible with the compatible smartphone and applications. downloaded to the smartphone that are TM CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto compatible with MirrorLink technology. applications, refer to the "Ease of use and Access to the different audio sources remains TM comfort" section. Telephone not connected by available in the margin of the MirrorLink Bluetooth® display, using the touch buttons located in the The synchronisation of a smartphone When connecting a smartphone to the upper bar. allows users to display applications system, we recommend enabling Access to the menus for the system is possible ® TM adapted to the CarPlay , MirrorLink or Bluetooth® on the smartphone. at any time using the dedicated buttons. Android Auto technology of the smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® There may be a pause before on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay charges when connected by a USB cable. ® applications become available, technology, the CarPlay function must be From the system, press " " to Telephone depending on the quality of the network. activated on the smartphone beforehand. display the main page. For the communication process between TM Press "MirrorLink " to start the the smartphone and the system to work, it is application in the system. CarPlay® smartphone essential in all cases that the smartphone is Depending on the smartphone, it may be unlocked. TM connection necessary to activate the "MirrorLink " Connect a USB cable. The smartphone As the principles and standards are function. charges when connected by a USB cable. constantly changing, it is recommended During the procedure, several screen From the system, press to that you keep the smartphone's operating pages relating to certain features are Telephone display the CarPlay® interface. system up-to-date, as well as the date and displayed. Or time of the smartphone and of the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the If the smartphone has already connected Brand's national website. Telephone connected by Bluetooth® by Bluetooth®. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Telephone" to From the system, press "Telephone" to display the main page. display the main page. Press the "PHONE" button to access the Press the "PHONE" button to display the secondary page. secondary page.
247 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Press "Android Auto" to start the Pairing a Bluetooth® Procedure from the system interface. application in the system. Press Telephone to display the main Depending on the smartphone, it may be telephone On connecting the USB cable, the page. necessary to activate the "Android Auto" CarPlay® function deactivates the The services available depend on the Press "Bluetooth search". function. system's Bluetooth® mode. network, the SIM card and the The list of detected telephones is During the procedure, several screen compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. displayed. pages relating to certain features are Consult the telephone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen telephone When the USB cable is disconnected displayed. service provider to check which services are in the list. and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection. available. on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the Connection sharing Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling The Bluetooth function must be activated The system offers to connect the telephone with changed manually. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. and the telephone configured as "Visible 3 profiles: ® – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), The CarPlay navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth® to all” (in the telphone settings). at any time by pressing the system's – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of From the system, press "Telephone" to Navigation button. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is audio files on the telephone), display the main page. used (from the telephone or from the system), – "Mobile internet data". Android Auto smartphone Press the "PHONE" button to display the ensure that the code is the same in the system Select one or more profiles. secondary page. and in the telephone. connection Press "Android Auto" to start the Press "OK" to confirm. On the smartphone, download the application in the system. If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend deactivating and then Android Auto application. Access to the different audio sources remains Depending on the type of telephone, you may by available in the margin of the Android Auto reactivating the Bluetooth function on the The "Android Auto" function requires the prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and display, using the touch buttons located in the telephone. use of a compatible smartphone and messages. upper bar. applications. The ability of the system to connect just Access to the menus for the system is possible Procedure from the telephone at any time using the dedicated buttons. one profile depends on the telephone. Select the name of the system in the list Telephone not connected by All three profiles may connect by default. There may be a pause before of detected devices. Bluetooth® applications become available, In the system, accept the connection request The profiles compatible with the system Connect a USB cable. The smartphone depending on the quality of the network. from the telephone. charges when connected by a USB cable. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, From the system, press "Telephone" to MAP and PAN. display the main page.
248 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. 11 Press Telephone to display the main page. Press again to connect it. Press "Bluetooth search". Automatic reconnection The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically Press the basket at the top right of the Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the in the list. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone Connection sharing To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. The system offers to connect the telephone with Press Telephone to display the main 3 profiles: page. Receiving a call – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), Press the "PHONE" button to access the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page. superimposed display in the screen. audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to Make a short press on the steering – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices. mounted PHONE button to accept an Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired incoming call. device. And Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Make a long press
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and to reject the call. messages. Or Managing paired telephones Press "End call". The ability of the system to connect just This function lets you connect or disconnect a one profile depends on the telephone. device or delete a pairing. All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call page. The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Using the telephone is not recommended are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page. while driving. MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Parking the vehicle. display the list of paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.
249 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Calling a new number It is always possible to make a call Press the back arrow again to confirm. Press Telephone to display the main directly from the telephone; as a safety page. measure, first park the vehicle. Press this button to reset the selected Enter the phone number using the digital profile. keypad. Setting the ringtone Press "Call" to start the call. Adjusting the brightness Press Telephone to display the main Press Settings to display the main page. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press Brightness. secondary page. Press Telephone to display the main Press "Ring volume" to display the page. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of volume bar. Or press and hold the screen and/or the instrument panel Press the arrows or move the slider to set (depending on version). the ring volume. the steering mounted PHONE button. Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Press "Contacts". Settings Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Modifying system settings Press "Call". Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Calling a recently used secondary page. Press "Profiles". number Press "System configuration". Press Telephone to display the main Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile ”3 or Press the "Units" tab to change the units of page. " ". Common profile distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Or Press this button to enter a name for the Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the Press and hold profile using the virtual keypad. initial settings. Press "OK" to save. the steering mounted button. Returning the system to factory settings Press the back arrow to confirm. activates the English language by default Press "Recent calls". (depending on version). Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press this button to activate the profile.
250 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press the "System info" tab to display the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to save the settings. versions of the various modules installed in the 11 system. The system may not automatically Press the "Privacy" tab, Selecting the language manage the change between winter and or Press to display the main page. Settings summer time (depending on the country of Press Settings to display the main page. sale). Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate secondary page. the private data mode. Select "Language" to change the Setting the date Activate or deactivate: language. Press Settings to display the main page. Press the back arrow to confirm. – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "Configuration" to access the – "Only data sharing” secondary page. – "Data and vehicle position sharing" Setting the time Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Date". Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press this button to set the date. secondary page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. secondary page. Press "Screen configuration". Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. Press this button to set the time using the Press "Brightness". virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Press "OK" to save the time. the screen and/or the instrument panel Time and date setting is only available if (depending on version). Press this button to set the time zone. Press the back arrow to confirm. "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. Select the display format for the time Press "Animation". (12h/24h). Activate or deactivate: “Automatic Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 scrolling”. hour). Select "Animated transitions". Activate or deactivate GPS synchronisation (UTC).
251 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Frequently asked ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer Some telephones offer display options. "Radio" page. of this information. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can questions Some radio stations send other information be transferred in a specific order. The following information groups together the in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone ► Modify the telephone directory display answers to the most frequently asked questions example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. settings. concerning the system. The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be name. switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Settings Radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth When the treble and bass settings are The reception quality of the tuned radio "Radio" page. switched on. changed, the ambience is deselected. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Check in the telephone settings that it is When the ambience is changed, the treble presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media "visible to all". and bass settings are reset. is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. bass settings, and vice versa. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. When the balance settings are changed, the to enable the system to check whether there is time). Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the distribution is deselected. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical ► Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality. When the distribution setting is changed, the area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure balance settings are deselected. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the The volume of the telephone connected in balance settings, and vice versa. including in RDS mode. currently playing media are not displayed Bluetooth mode is inaudible. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. The volume depends on both the system and the setting to obtain the desired sound quality. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain telephone. There is a difference in sound quality The aerial is missing or has been damaged types of character. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to between audio sources. (for example while entering a car wash or ► Use standard characters to name tracks and maximum if required, and increase the volume of To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound underground car park). folders. the telephone if necessary. settings can be tailored to different audio ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Playback of streaming files does not start. Ambient noise affects the quality of the sources, which can generate audible differences I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically telephone call. when changing source. received stations. launch playback. ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate The name of the radio station changes. ► Start playback from the device. reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not The contacts are not listed in alphabetical functions to the middle position. changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. order.
252 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Some telephones offer display options. When the engine is off, the system switches Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can off after several minutes of use. 11 be transferred in a specific order. When the engine is switched off, the system's ► Modify the telephone directory display operating time depends on the state of charge of settings. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system Settings automatically goes into energy economy mode When the treble and bass settings are and switches off to maintain an adequate charge changed, the ambience is deselected. in the battery. When the ambience is changed, the treble ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound functions to the middle position.
253 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
PEUGEOT Connect Nav applications interrupt their display while the Use the menu buttons on either side of or below
vehicle is moving). the touch screen for access to the menus, then – Watching a video (the video stops when the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. vehicle starts to move again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Changing the system settings and "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing The system is protected in such a way the screen briefly with three fingers. that it will only operate in the vehicle. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. The Energy Economy Mode message is Press the back arrow to go back a level. displayed when the system is about to enter Press "OK" to confirm.
the corresponding mode. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" GPS navigation - type. System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive Applications - Multimedia downloaded from the Brand’s website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional audio system - Bluetooth® The update procedure is also available on the product. website. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. telephone Do not touch the screen with wet hands. The functions and settings described The system’s Open Source Software Certain information is displayed permanently vary according to the vehicle version and (OSS) source codes are available at the in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch configuration. following addresses: screen (depending on equipment): https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ For safety reasons and because they on version), and direct access to the require sustained attention by the driver, corresponding menu. the following operations must be carried out – Go directly to the audio source selection with the vehicle stationary and the ignition First steps option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of on: With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source). – Pairing the smartphone with the system in the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails, Bluetooth mode. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services, – Using the smartphone. Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications. ® TM – Connection to the CarPlay , MirrorLink the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the or Android Auto applications (certain (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
254 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access 12 – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. previous / next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a – USB memory stick. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). selected, access to presets. Voice control: – Video (depending on equipment). Radio: display the list of stations. This control is located on the steering Media: display the list of tracks. wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio (press and hold): update the list of (depending on equipment). stations received. Short press, system voice control. Long press, voice control for smartphone or CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM (availability depending on Menus country), Android Auto via the system. Increase volume. Connected navigation
Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to and decrease buttons simultaneously create a profile for an individual or for a (depending on equipment). group of people with shared interests, and Restore the sound by pressing one of the two configure a wide range of settings (radio volume buttons. presets, audio settings, navigation history, Media (short press): change the favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied multimedia source. automatically. Telephone (short press): start telephone call. (short press): access Enter navigation settings and choose a In very hot conditions, the volume may Call in progress telephone menu. destination. be limited to protect the system. It may Use real-time services, depending on equipment.
255 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Applications Telephone Vehicle Voice commands
Steering wheel-mounted controls Voice commands: Voice commands can be issued from any screen page after a short press on the "Voice commands" button located on the steering wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment), as long as there is no
telephone call in progress. Run certain applications on a smartphone Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions. To ensure that voice commands are (available in some countries) or Android Auto. messages. always recognised by the system, please Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning follow these recommendations: connections. Settings – use natural language in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your Radio Media voice. – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) 18,5 21,5 before speaking. – for best results, closing the windows and FM 87.5 MHz sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous interference (depending on version). – before issuing a voice command, ask any other passengers to refrain from speaking.
Manage various temperature and air flow Configure a personal profile and/or settings. First steps
configure the sound (balance, ambience, Example of a "voice command" for Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, navigation: display photographs. etc.). "Navigate to address 11 regent street, London"
256 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and media: 12 "Play artist Madonna" Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the controls telephone: Voice commands: "Call David Miller" Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, commands" button located on the steering Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a (depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected. telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system. always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms. – use natural language in a normal tone Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... without breaking up words or raising your The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate voice. to address" and "Display POI in the city", are – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available. before speaking.
– for best results, closing the windows and Information - Using the sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous Press the Push To Talk button and tell me interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember – before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you menus and enabling voice-based interaction with need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to First steps the system. undo something, say "undo". And to get
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help". navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some "Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you London" some examples or take you through it step by
257 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more "Radio Media" voice "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation". "expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands commands London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", Voice commands Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London - … Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route Help messages Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see You can select an audio source by saying "turn Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can on source" followed by the device name. For Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination" or "turn on source, radio". Use the command There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". or "album". Just say something like "play artist, radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point album, Thriller". Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI Voice commands and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination". your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 "Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest Tune to 98.5 FM commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter Tune to preset number five further by saying something like "select POI in Help messages Voice commands Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" Navigate home Tell me the arrival time "previous page". and the station name or frequency. For example Navigate to work Stop route guidance "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give Help messages FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the example "tune to preset number five". language configured for the system. Navigate to address 11 regent street, London You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance". Help messages To get information about your current route, you * This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining download has been performed.
258 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available only with a USB connection. 12 commands What's playing? Voice commands Help messages "Telephone" voice Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands - … "play" and then the item. For example, say "play Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces: You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed. example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands or "turn on source, radio". Use the command Voice commands "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude Call David Miller* hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna Call voicemail* or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller Display calls* Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages album, Thriller". Help messages Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say To make a phone call, say "call" followed by "play" and then a song title, an album title, or the contact name, for example: "Call David Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song Miller". You can also include the phone type, for Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play example: "Call David Miller at home". To make Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the a call by number, say "dial" followed by the Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 a displayed list, you can say "next page" or 417". You can check your voicemail by saying You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" message to", followed by the contact, and then "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action. the name of the quick message you'd like to FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for send. For example, "send quick message to example "tune to preset number five".
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.
259 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages. SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next The system only sends pre-recorded To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "Quick messages". line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action. action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands "cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving "Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination commands wait for me Help messages To a new destination If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method: Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main "Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page. voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…". say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or key words for your function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination. an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria". between each word. Or When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method: system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages Before you can use the navigation Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to feature, you must enter the "City", the most recent message". When you want to send "Street" (suggestions are displayed Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for automatically when you begin typing), and the Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" on the virtual keypad, or select an and say something like "send quick message to
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.
260 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
address from the "Contact" list or the address To a recent destination To a contact "History". 12 Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the house number, Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the the navigation system will show one end secondary page. secondary page. of the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations". Press the "MENU" button to access the Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab. secondary page. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided Select "Enter address". the "Guidance criteria”. navigation. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Then To points of interest (POI) Select the Country Guided method: Select "Position" to see the point of Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map. categories. Press to display the main Change the keyboard "type" according to Navigation page. the selected "language": ABCDE; To "Home" or "My work" Press the " " button to access the AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Press Navigation to display the main MENU secondary page. Enter the "City", the "Street" and the page. Select "Points of interest". "Number", and confirm by pressing on Press the "MENU" button to access the the displayed suggestions. secondary page. Select the "Travel", "leisure", Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Select "My destinations". "Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic” criteria". tab. And/or Select the "Preferred” tab. Or Select "See on map" to choose the Select "Home". Select "Search" to enter the name and "Guidance criteria". address of a POI. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Or Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.
Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:
261 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
You can only select this method in order To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the legislation and subscription to the to use the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and corresponding service. Press Navigation to display the main is active; this may be either a "network " " coordinates. page. Longitude connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates: Explore the map by sliding a finger on the use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. screen. Connected navigation else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals. Select the destination by pressing on the map. user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided Tap the screen to place a marker and In both cases, the system is automatically navigation. Connected navigation display the sub-menu. connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or Press this button to start guided connection permits. Press this button to save the displayed navigation. Depending on version, vehicle trim level and address. Or subscription to online services and options. Press Navigation to display the main OR Press this button to save the displayed page. Press this button to enter the " " Network connection provided by the address. Latitude Press the "MENU" button to access the value using the virtual keypad. vehicle secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And If you use the Peugeot Connect Packs Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude" solution, the system is automatically value using the virtual keypad. connected to the Internet and connected Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of services, and does not require the user to the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message provide a connection via their smartphone. "Database". Press Navigation to display the main OR Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page. Channel) Available in some countries. mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Network connection provided by the "Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages are based on a European standard for traffic user Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next
image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on Enter an address or key words for your Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS destination (POI). map. For the list of suitable smartphones, visit Navigation system map and taken into account Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or the Brand's national website. region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads. Activate and enter settings for sharing the vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be smartphone connection. your search. displayed, depending on the applicable As processes and standards are Select the desired address to calculate the route. constantly changing, we recommend you
262 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab. 12 smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. communication process between the Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the Wi-Fi correctly. network "Key” and "Password". Press "OK" to establish a connection Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system. The smartphone charges when Depending on version, vehicle trim level and connected by the USB cable. Usage restrictions: subscription to online services and options. ® Bluetooth connection – With CarPlay , connection sharing is Network connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on the only available with a Wi-Fi connection. – With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing is vehicle telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connect-App" section). only available with a USB connection. If you use the Peugeot Connect Packs Wi-Fi connection The quality of services depends on the quality solution, the system is automatically Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the of the network connection. connected to the Internet and connected system and connect to it. services, and does not require the user to provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has Authorize sending OR been activated either via the information "Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu. Network connection provided by the Press Settings to display the main page. user Press "Notifications".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select Wi-Fi to activate it. secondary page. Select "System configuration". For the list of suitable smartphones, visit OR the Brand's national website. Press Connect-App to display the main Select the "Private mode” tab. page. Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the OR smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Notifications". As processes and standards are Select "Wi-Fi network connection". constantly changing, we recommend you
263 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "Private mode". – “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon Declaration: "Risk areas Select the "Settings” tab. (triangle) to configure alerts. THEN – "Give an audible warning". alert" Select the desired fuel. Activate or deactivate: – "Advise proximity of POI 1". To send information about danger zones, – "Advise proximity of POI 2". select the option:Allow declaration of Press "OK" to save. – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. danger zones – “Only data sharing" – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Press Navigation to display the main Displaying charging station The "Notifications", in the upper bar, can page. be accessed at any time. details Settings specific to Press the "Declare a new danger zone" Press Navigation to display the main button located in the side bars or the connected navigation page. Danger zone alerts may or may not be upper bar of the touch screen (depending on Press Navigation to display the main Press this button to display the list of displayed, depending on the applicable equipment). page. services. legislation and subscription to the Select the "Type” option to select the type Press the "MENU" button to access the Press "POI on map" to display the list corresponding service. of "Danger area". secondary page. of points of interest. Select the ""Speed" option and enter it Select "Settings". When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the Press one of the buttons to search for using the virtual keypad. services are available. "Stations". Press "OK" to save and send the Select the "Map” tab. Activate/deactivate "Stations". The services offered with connected information. navigation are as follows. Activate or deactivate: Press this button to display a secondary A Connected Services pack: Displaying fuel information – "Allow declaration of danger zones". page. – Weather, Press Navigation to display the main – "Guidance to final destination on foot". Select the "Settings” tab. – Filling stations, page. These settings must be configured for each – Car park, Press this button to display the list of profile. Select the desired connector type. – Traffic, services. Press “OK” to confirm your selection. – POI local search. Press "POI on map" to display the list Press "OK" to save. A Danger area pack (optional). of points of interest. Select the "Alerts” tab. Press one of the buttons to search for " ". Activate or deactivate: Stations Displaying weather Activate/deactivate "Stations". information – "Advise of car park nearby". Press this button to display a secondary Press Navigation to display the main – "Filling station alert". page. page.
264 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Settings” tab. Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® function must first be activated on services. the smartphone. 12 Select the desired fuel. Select "View map". In all cases, the smartphone must be unlocked, to enable the communication Press "OK" to save. Select "Weather". process between the smartphone and the system to function. Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly Displaying charging station information. changing, we recommend keeping the details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to- weather information. date, together with the date and time on Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone and the system. page. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will Press this button to display the list of be the maximum temperature for the day. services. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity Press "POI on map" to display the list the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main of points of interest. page. Press one of the buttons to search for Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay®, "Stations". Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Activate/deactivate "Stations". USB ports CarPlay® smartphone Press this button to display a secondary Depending on equipment, for more information ® connection page. on the USB ports compatible with CarPlay , TM Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Select the "Settings” tab. MirrorLink or Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of use and comfort" section. charges when connected by a USB cable. Select the desired connector type. Press "Telephone" to display the For the list of suitable smartphones, visit CarPlay® interface. the Brand's national website. Press "OK" to save. Or Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Synchronising a smartphone enables charges when connected by a USB cable. Displaying weather users to display applications that support From the system, press "Applications" to the smartphone’s MirrorLinkCarPlay®, TM or display the main page. information Android Auto technology on the vehicle’s Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” Press Navigation to display the main screen. For CarPlay® technology, the function. page.
265 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press "Applications" to Internet Browser interface. necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" display the main page. Press Applications to display the main function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android On connecting the USB cable, the page. During the procedure, several screen Auto” function. CarPlay® function deactivates the Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected pages relating to certain features are Press "Android Auto" to start the system's Bluetooth® mode. Apps” function. displayed. application in the system. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser Accept to start and complete the connection. During the procedure, several screen home page. When the USB cable is disconnected Once the connection is established, a page is pages relating to certain features are Select the country of residence. and the ignition is switched off then back displayed, showing the applications already displayed. on, the system will not automatically switch to downloaded to the smartphone that are Accept to start and complete the connection. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. Radio Media mode; the source must be compatible with MirrorLinkTM technology. Access to the different audio sources remains changed manually. Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using the touch buttons located in the Connection to the internet is via one of MirrorLinkTM smartphone display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. the network connections provided by the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible vehicle or the user. connection Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. at any time using the dedicated buttons. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a In Android Auto mode, the function that Bluetooth connection® compatible smartphone and compatible There may be a pause before displays rolling menus by briefly pressing applications. applications become available, the screen with three fingers is disabled. The services available depend on the You can check that your telephone is depending on the quality of the network. network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. compatible on the Brand's website (services). There may be a pause before Consult the smartphone user guide and the applications become available, When connecting a smartphone to the Android Auto smartphone service provider to check which services are depending on the quality of the network. system, we recommend enabling connection available. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Install the "Android Auto" application on Car Apps The Bluetooth function must be activated charges when connected by a USB cable. the smartphone via "Google Play". Press Applications to display the main and the smartphone configured as From the system, press " " to Applications The "Android Auto" function requires the use page. "Visible to all". display the main page. of a compatible smartphone and applications. Press "Car Apps" to display the applications Press " " to access the To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connectivity home page. "MirrorLinkTM” function. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone used (from the smartphone or from the system), Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the charges when connected by a USB cable. ensure that the code is the same in the system application in the system. and in the smartphone.
266 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Internet Browser If the pairing procedure fails, we – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of recommend deactivating and then audio files on the smartphone), 12 Press Applications to display the main reactivating the Bluetooth function on the – " ". page. Mobile internet data smartphone. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected The "Mobile internet data" profile must Apps” function. be activated for connected navigation (if Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and home page. Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating Select the country of residence. of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. In the system, accept the connection request Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. from the smartphone.
Press "OK" to confirm. Connection to the internet is via one of Procedure from the system the network connections provided by the Press Connect-App to display the main vehicle or the user. page. Wi-Fi connection Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. secondary page. ® Press Connect-App to display the main Bluetooth connection Press "Bluetooth connection". page. The services available depend on the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Search". network, the SIM card and the secondary page. The list of detected smartphones is compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Select " ". displayed. Wi-Fi network connection Consult the smartphone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen service provider to check which services are Select the " ", " " or smartphone in the list. Secured Not secured available. "Stored” tab. Depending on the type of smartphone, Select a network. The Bluetooth function must be activated you may by prompted to accept the and the smartphone configured as transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi "Visible to all". network "Key" and "Password". Press "OK" to establish the connection. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connection sharing used (from the smartphone or from the system), The system offers to connect the smartphone ensure that the code is the same in the system with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi and in the smartphone. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive.
267 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Wi-Fi connection sharing Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press "OK" to confirm. context of radio wave transmission, and Depending on equipment. in no way indicative of an audio system Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. RDS station tracking may not be Selecting a station malfunction. Press Connect-App to display the main Press Radio Media to display the main available nationwide, as many radio page. page. stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "Frequency". Presetting a station This explains the loss of reception of the secondary page. Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. station during a journey. Select " ". Share Wi-Fi connection automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section) Or Press "Presets". Select the " " tab to activate or Displaying text information Activation Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. The "Radio Text" function displays information frequencies up or down. to preset the station. And/or transmitted by the radio station relating to the Or Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s station or the currently playing song. Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband network name and password. Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…", secondary page. To protect against unauthorised access Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen. Select "Radio settings". and to make all systems as secure as page. possible, the use of a security code or a Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Select "General". complex password is recommended. Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press "OK" to confirm. Managing connections decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. page. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Playing TA messages Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page. secondary page. The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings". Select "Manage connection". priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this by the Brand, such as a USB charger function needs good reception of a radio station connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General". With this function, you can view the access to that carries this type of message. While traffic The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow". connected services, the availability of connected information is being broadcast, the current tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may services and modify the connection mode. media is automatically interrupted so that the block reception, including in RDS mode.
268 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm. TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the previously playing media resumes at the end of secondary page. 12 the message. Select "Radio settings". RDS station tracking may not be Select "Announcements". available nationwide, as many radio Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". stations do not cover 100 % of the country. announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". This explains the loss of reception of the Press "OK" to confirm. station during a journey. Activate/deactivate "Station follow". Displaying text information DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK". The "Radio Text" function displays information transmitted by the radio station relating to the Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated, station or the currently playing song. there may be a time offset of a few Press Radio Media to display the main Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM" page. Digital radio provides higher quality sound. analogue radio, and in some cases a change Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a in volume. secondary page. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical When the digital signal quality is restored, the Select "Radio settings". order. system automatically changes back to "DAB". Press Radio Media to display the main Select " ". General page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option display the "DAB" waveband. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Press " " to confirm. OK activated, the sound will cut out while the FM-DAB tracking digital signal is too weak. “DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory. Playing TA messages When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this to the same station by automatically switching to function needs good reception of a radio station the corresponding FM analogue station (if there that carries this type of message. While traffic is one). information is being broadcast, the current Press Radio Media to display the main media is automatically interrupted so that the page.
269 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Media Selecting the source If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice necessary to start the audio playback from the Press Radio Media to display the main The system supports USB mass storage smartphone. page. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players USB port Control is from the portable device or by using Select "SOURCES". via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Insert the USB memory stick into the USB the system's touch buttons. Select the source. supplied. port or connect the USB device to the Devices are managed using the audio system USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Once connected in streaming mode, the Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media controls. To protect the system, do not use a USB Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, hub. Depending on country. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth The system builds playlists (in temporary ® Connecting Apple players streaming, if compatible. memory); this operation can take from a Video control commands are accessible ® Connect the Apple player to the USB port using The audio system will only play audio files with few seconds to several minutes at the first only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file connection. Play starts automatically. extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and Reduce the number of non-music files and the Press Radio Media to display the main Control is via the audio system. 320 Kbps. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. page. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Select "SOURCES". The classifications available are those of No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select Video to start the video. the portable device connected (artists/ All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. connected. The audio system memorises these albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and lists, which will subsequently load faster if they To remove the USB memory stick, press podcasts). 48 KHz. have not been changed. the pause button to stop the video, then The default classification used is by artist. To To avoid reading and display problems, we remove the memory stick. modify the classification used, return to the recommend choosing file names less than 20 The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 first level of the menu then select the desired Auxiliary socket (AUX) characters long that do not contain any special Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, classification (playlists for example) and Depending on equipment characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). WMV and RealVideo formats. confirm to go down through the menu to the Connect a portable device (MP3 player, Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format desired track. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® (File Allocation Table). audio cable (not supplied). Streaming Bluetooth The version of software in the audio system may This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed We recommend using the original USB not be compatible with the generation of the has been selected in the audio settings. from your smartphone. cable for the portable device. Apple® player. First adjust the volume on the portable device The Bluetooth profile must be activated. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the First adjust the volume on the portable device (to audio system. a high level). Controls are managed via the portable device. Then adjust the volume of the audio system.
270 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Information and advice Telephone Procedure from the system 12 The system supports USB mass storage Press Telephone to display the main devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players Pairing a Bluetooth® page. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Press "Bluetooth search". supplied. telephone Or Devices are managed using the audio system The services available depend on the Select "Search". controls. network, the SIM card and the The list of detected telephones is Other devices, not recognised on connection, compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. displayed. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using Consult the telephone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen telephone a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth service provider to check which services are in the list. streaming, if compatible. available. The audio system will only play audio files with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Connection sharing The Bluetooth function must be activated extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and The system offers to connect the telephone with and the telephone configured as "Visible 320 Kbps. 3 profiles: to all” (in the telphone settings). It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), – “ " (streaming: wireless playing of No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Streaming audio files on the telephone), All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. used (from the telephone or from the system), – " ". The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and ensure that the code is the same in the system Mobile internet data 48 KHz. and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must To avoid reading and display problems, we be activated for connected navigation, If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend choosing file names less than 20 after first activating smartphone connection recommend deactivating and then characters long that do not contain any special sharing. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). reactivating the Bluetooth function on the Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format telephone. Select one or more profiles. (File Allocation Table). Press "OK" to confirm. We recommend using the original USB Procedure from the telephone cable for the portable device. Select the system name in the list of Depending on the type of telephone, you may by detected devices. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and In the system, accept the connection request messages. from the telephone.
271 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The ability of the system to connect just Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. Calling a recently used one profile depends on the telephone. This function lets you connect or disconnect a number All three profiles may connect by default. device or delete a pairing. Press Telephone to display the main Press Telephone to display the main Making a call page. The profiles compatible with the system page. Using the telephone is not recommended Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. Press and hold MAP and PAN. secondary page. Park the vehicle. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted Visit the Brand's website for more information the steering mounted telephone button. the list of paired devices. controls. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). Press on the name of the telephone Select " ". selected in the list to disconnect it. Calls Automatic reconnection Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press again to connect it. Calling a new number On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call connected is present again, it is automatically Deleting a telephone page. directly from the telephone; as a safety recognised and within about 30 seconds Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is screen to display a basket alongside the keypad. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call. To modify the connection profile: Press the basket alongside the telephone Managing contacts/entries Press Telephone to display the main chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main page. Calling a contact page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main Select "Contact". secondary page. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Create" to add a new contact. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold the list of paired devices. Make a short press on the steering Press the "Telephone" tab to enter the Press the "Details" button. mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. contact’s telephone number(s). incoming call. Press the "Address" tab to enter the Select one or more profiles. And Select "Contact". contact’s address(es). Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press the "Email" tab to enter the Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Call". contact’s email address(es). on the steering mounted telephone button Press "OK" to save. to reject the call. Or
272 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Calling a recently used Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Surname+first name or by First 12 Press Telephone to display the main number name+surname. page. Press Telephone to display the main Press the " " button to access the page. The "Email" function allows email OPTIONS secondary page. Or addresses to be entered for a contact, Select " " to display the Press and hold but the system is not able to send emails. Quick messages list of messages. Select the " ", " ", " the steering mounted telephone button. Delayed My arrival Not Managing messages available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Telephone to display the main create new messages. Select "Calls". page. Press " " to write a new message. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Create Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the It is always possible to make a call secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the directly from the telephone; as a safety Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. measure, first park the vehicle. messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” recipients. tab. Press " Play" to start playing the Managing contacts/entries Select the details of the message chosen message. Press Telephone to display the main in one of the lists. page. Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email Select "Contact". stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main Select " " to add a new contact. Create Press "Call" to start the call. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press the " " tab to enter the Telephone Press " Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. contact’s telephone number(s). Select "Email" to display the list of Press the " " tab to enter the Address messages. contact’s address(es). Access to "Messages" depends on the Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not Press the "Email" tab to enter the compatibility between the smartphone read” tab. contact’s email address(es). and the onboard system. Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press "OK" to save. Some smartphones retrieve messages or email messages more slowly than others. Press " Play" to start playing the message.
273 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Access to email messages depends on The "Position” settings (All passengers, Press "OK" again to save the settings. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the compatibility between the Driver and Front only) are common to all the screen and/or the instrument panel. smartphone and the onboard system. sources. Press Settings to display the main page. The location for the photograph is Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", square; the system reshapes the original "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the photograph if in another format. Settings input". secondary page. Press this button to reset the selected Select "System settings". Audio settings Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile. optimises the sound distribution inside Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Press Settings to display the main page. Resetting the selected profile activates the passenger compartment. fuel consumption and temperature. the English language by default. Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial Select "Audio settings". settings. Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio settings" with it. Resetting the system to "Factory Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Press Settings to display the main page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Audio settings". settings" activates English and degrees Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Press "OK" to save the settings. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", secondary page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "System info" to display the versions of Select "Setting of the profiles". The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s the various modules installed in the system. © with the Arkamys system) uses audio settings. processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile ”3 or Selecting the language according to the number of passengers in the "Common profile". Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page. Press this button to enter a name for the vehicle. Press Settings to display the main page. Available only with the front and rear speaker profile using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "OK" to confirm. configuration. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the Press this button to add a photograph to The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Select "Screen configuration". language. the profile. ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and Insert a USB memory stick containing the Treble sound settings are different and Select "Animation". Setting the date photograph in the USB port. independent for each audio source. Activate or deactivate:Automatic Press Settings to display the main page. Select the photograph. Activate or deactivate "Loudness". scrolling Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the photograph. secondary page.
274 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. the screen and/or the instrument panel. 12 Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Date". The system may not automatically Press this button to set the date. manage the change between winter and Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the summer time (depending on the country of secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. sale). Select "System settings". Select the display format for the date. Select "Units" to change the units of distance, Colour schemes fuel consumption and temperature. Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. settings. As a safety measure, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is only Resetting the system to "Factory possible when the vehicle is stationary. settings" activates English and degrees Setting the time Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page.
Select "System info" to display the versions of Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". the various modules installed in the system. secondary page. Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then Selecting the language press "OK" to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Time". Press this button to set the time using the Whenever the colour scheme is Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the virtual keypad. changed, the system restarts, temporarily secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. displaying a black screen. Select "Languages" to change the language. Press this button to set the time zone. Frequently asked Setting the date Select the display format for the time questions Press Settings to display the main page. (12h/24h). Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions secondary page. Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system. synchronisation (UTC).
275 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Navigation ► Activate the audible warning in the The altitude is not displayed. The aerial is missing or has been damaged "Navigation" menu and check the voice volume On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to (for example while entering a car wash or I cannot enter the navigation address. in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites underground car park). The address is not recognised. correctly. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing The system does not suggest a detour ► Wait until the system has started up The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, the "Search…" button at the bottom of the around an incident on the route. The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, "Navigation” page. messages. least 4 satellites. including in RDS mode. The route calculation is not successful. ► Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is The route settings may conflict with the current the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of not indicative of an audio system malfunction. location (for example, if toll roads are excluded Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. but the vehicle is on a toll road). I cannot find some radio stations in the list of This behaviour is normal. The system is ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" I receive a warning about a "Danger area" stations received. dependent on the GPS signal reception menu. that is not on my route. The name of the radio station changes. As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. The station is no longer received or its name has I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. changed in the list. You have not subscribed to the online services in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical Some radio stations send other information option. provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. in place of their name (the title of the song for ► If you have subscribed to the option: nearby or parallel roads. ► Check that the online services are activated example). - a few days may elapse before the service is ► Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). The system interprets these details as the station activated, of the "Danger area". You can select "On the name. - services may not be selected in the system route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio menu, Radio warning duration. stations” secondary menu. - online services are not active ("TOMTOM The reception quality of the tuned radio TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station indicated in real time. The POIs do not appear. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media On starting, a few minutes may elapse before The POIs have not been selected. is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only the system begins to receive traffic information. ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). ► Wait until traffic information is being received POIs in the POI list. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may correctly (traffic information icons shown on the The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory map). not working. ► Activate the "RDS" function by means of the stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing In certain countries, only major routes The audible warning is not active or the volume short-cut menu to enable the system to check time). (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic is too low. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in ► Delete the files supplied with the memory information. the geographical area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the This is perfectly normal. The system is file structure on the memory stick. dependent on the traffic information available.
276 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The aerial is missing or has been damaged There may be an extended pause after The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with (for example while entering a car wash or inserting a USB stick. the system. 12 underground car park). The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check that your telephone is ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to compatible on the Brand's website (services). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, a few minutes. The volume of the telephone connected in basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, This is perfectly normal. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. including in RDS mode. Some characters in information about the The volume depends on both the system and the This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is currently playing media may not be displayed telephone. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. correctly. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The audio system is unable to process certain maximum if required, and increase the volume of stations received. types of character. the telephone if necessary. The name of the radio station changes. ► Use standard characters to name tracks and Ambient noise affects the quality of the The station is no longer received or its name has folders. telephone call. changed in the list. Playback of streaming files does not start. ► Reduce the ambient noise level (close Some radio stations send other information The connected device does not automatically windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). in place of their name (the title of the song for launch playback. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. example). ► Start playback from the device. The options for synchronising contacts are: The system interprets these details as the station Track names and playing times are not synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the name. displayed on the audio streaming screen. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer synchronisations are selected, some contacts stations” secondary menu. of this information. may be duplicated. ► Select "Display SIM card contacts" or Media Telephone "Display telephone contacts". Playback of my USB memory stick starts only I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). The telephone's Bluetooth function may be order. Some files supplied with the memory stick may switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Some telephones offer display options. greatly slow down access to reading the memory ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing switched on. be transferred in a specific order. time). ► Check in the telephone settings that it is ► Modify the telephone directory display ► Delete the files supplied with the memory "visible to all". settings. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Deactivate then reactivate the telphone’s The system does not receive SMS. file structure on the memory stick. Bluetooth function. SMS text messages cannot be sent to the system in Bluetooth mode.
277 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Settings a high level) first.Then adjust the volume level on the audio system. When the treble and bass settings are When the engine is off, the system switches changed, the ambience is deselected. off after several minutes of use. When the ambience is changed, the treble When the engine is switched off, the system's and bass settings are reset. operating time depends on the state of charge of Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and the battery. bass settings, and vice versa. The switch-off is normal: the system ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience automatically goes into energy economy mode settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. and switches off to maintain an adequate charge When the balance settings are changed, the in the battery. distribution is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the When the distribution setting is changed, the charge of the battery. balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available balance settings, and vice versa. if the synchronisation with the satellites is ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution deactivated. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. There is a difference in sound quality Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS between audio sources. synchronisation" (UTC). To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to "None", setting loudness correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
278 Alphabetical index
180° rear vision 159 Air conditioning, automatic 64 Blind 42–43 Air conditioning, digital 61, 64 Blind spot monitoring system, active 155 Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic 61, 64 Blind spot sensors 154–155 Air conditioning, manual 59, 64 Blinds, side 72 A Air conditioning, mono-zone 59, 64 BlueHDi 18, 20, 182, 190 ABS 90 Air intake 62, 64 Bluetooth (hands-free) 234–235, Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) 169 Air vents 58 248–249, 271–272 Accessories 87 Alarm 34–35 Bluetooth (telephone) 248–249, 271–272 Active Safety Brake 146–148 Amplifier, audio 67 Bodywork 188 AdBlue® 18, 185 Android Auto connection 266 Bonnet 179–180 AdBlue® tank 186 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 90 Boot 36–37, 40, 77 Additive, Diesel 182–183 Antitheft / Immobiliser 29 Boot (fittings) 73 Adjusting headlamps 80 Apple CarPlay connection 247, 265 Brake discs 184 Adjusting head restraints 46 Applications 266 Brake lamps 204 Adjusting seat 45, 47, 52–54 Armrest, front 68 Brakes 184 Adjusting the air distribution 60, 62–63 Armrest, rear 71 Braking 125 Adjusting the air flow 62–63 Assistance call 88 Braking assistance system 90 Adjusting the date 23–24, 251, 275 Assistance, emergency braking 90, 148 Braking, automatic emergency 146–148 Adjusting the height and reach of Audible warning 88 Braking, dynamic emergency 119–120 the steering wheel 49 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 234, 246, 270 Brightness 250 Adjusting the lumbar support 45, 47 Bulbs 203 Adjusting the seat belt height 95 Bulbs (changing) 201–202, 204–205 Adjusting the temperature 60–61 Adjusting the time 23–24, 251, 275 B Advanced Grip Control 92 Backrest, folding 46 Advice on care and maintenance 168, 187 Battery 179 C Advice on driving 7, 113 Battery, 12 V 183, 210–214 Cable, audio 270 Airbags 97–101 Battery, ancillaries 213 Cable, Jack 270 Airbags, curtain 99–100 Battery, charging 167, 171, 211, 214 Capacity, fuel tank 166 Airbags, front 98–99, 102 Battery (Hybrid) 168, 171 Cap, fuel filler 166 Airbags, lateral 98–99 Battery, remote control 33–34 Care of the bodywork 188 Air conditioning 58–60, 63 Blanking screen (snow shield) 178 CD 233, 246
279 Alphabetical index
CD, MP3 233, 246 Connection, Bluetooth 235, 248–249, Deferred charging 27, 168, 171, 173 Central locking 31–32 267, 271–272 Defrosting 64 Changing a bulb 201–202, 204–205 Connection, MirrorLink 247–248, 266 Defrosting, front 64 Changing a fuse 205–206, 208–209 Connection, Wi-Fi network 267–268 Demisting 64 Changing a wheel 191–192, 196–198 Connectivity 265 Demisting, front 64 Changing a wiper blade 84–85 Consumption figures 26 Demisting, rear 65 Changing the remote control battery 33 Container, AdBlue® 185–186 Demisting, rear screen 65 Charge level indicator 20 Control, emergency boot release 37 Dials and gauges 9 Charger, induction 67 Control, emergency door 32–33 Digital instrument panel 9–10 Charger, wireless 67 Control, heated seats 48 Dimensions 226 Charging cable 169–170, 172 Controls, steering mounted 121–124 Dipstick 17, 181 Charging connector 168, 171–172 Control stalk, lighting 78–79 Direction indicators 79, 202–204 CHECK 20 Control stalk, wipers 83–86 Domestic charging 170, 173 Checking the engine oil level 17 Control unit 169–170, 172 Door pockets 66 Checking the levels 181–182 Courtesy lamps 69 Doors 36 Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) 193, 195 Cover, load space 73 Drive Assist Plus 139 Checks 180, 183–184 Cruise control 132, 134, 136–138 Driver’s attention warning 149 Checks, routine 183–184 Cruise control, adaptive 139 Driving 44–45, 113 Child lock 112 Cruise control by speed limit recognition 134 Driving aids camera (warnings) 131 Children 97, 103, 105, 107, 110–111 Cruise control, dynamic with Stop function 134 Driving aids (recommendations) 130 Children (safety) 112 Cup holder 66 Driving economically 7 Child seats 97, 100–103, 107, 110–111 Driving positions (storing) 47–48 Child seats, conventional 102–103 Dynamic pack 125–126 Child seats, i-Size 110 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 90–92 Child seats, ISOFIX 105, 107, 110 D Cleaning (advice) 168, 187–189 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Closing the boot 31, 37 Digital radio 231–232, 245, 269 Closing the doors 31, 36 Date (setting) 23–24, 251, 275 E Collision Risk Alert 146–147 Daytime running lamps 79, 202 EBFD 90 Configurations, seats 57 Deactivating the passenger Eco-driving (advice) 7 Configuration, vehicle 23–25, 27 airbag 98, 101–102 Economy mode 179 Connected applications 266–267 Deadlocking 29, 31 Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid) 124
280 Alphabetical index
Electric windows 41 Fittings, front 66 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 90 Fittings, interior 66 indicator 127 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 90 Fittings, rear 70 Glove box 66 Emergency call 88 Flap, charging 168, 171–173 G.P.S. 262 Emergency switching off 117–118 Flap, fuel filler 166–167 Grab handles 66 Emergency warning lamps 87, 190 Flashing indicators 79, 203 Emissions control system, SCR 19, 185 Flat bed (recovery) 216 Energy economy mode 179 Floor, boot, adjustable 76 Energy flows 26 Floor, concertina 55 H Energy recovery 20, 125 Fluid, brake 182 Hands-free access 39 Engine 184 Fluid, engine coolant 182 Hands-free tailgate 37, 39–40 Engine compartment 179–180 Foglamps, front 78, 82, 202–203 Hazard warning lamps 87, 190 Engine, Diesel 166, 180, 190, 222 Foglamps, rear 78, 205 headlamp adjustment 80 Engine, petrol 126, 180, 220 Folding the rear seats 51–54 Headlamp adjustment 80 Engines 219–220, 222 Four-wheel drive (4WD) 127, 178 Headlamps, automatic dipping 81–82 Environment 7, 34 Frequency (radio) 268–269 Headlamps, automatic illumination 80 e-Save function (energy reserve) 26 Fuel 7, 166 Headlamps, dipped beam 202–203 ESC (electronic stability control) 90 Fuel consumption 7, 20 Headlamps, halogen 80, 202–203 Fuel tank 166–167 Headlamps, main beam 202–203 Fusebox, dashboard 206 Head restraints, front 46–47 Fusebox, engine compartment 206, 208–209 Head restraints, rear 50–52 F Fuses 205–206, 208–209 Heating 58–59 Fatigue detection 149 Heating, programmable 27, 65 Filling the AdBlue® tank 182, 186 Hi-Fi system 67 Filling the fuel tank 166–167 Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) 93 Filter, air 183 G Hill start assist 125 Filter, oil 183 Gauge, fuel 166 Histogramme, fuel consumption 26–27 Filter, particle 182–183 Gearbox, automatic 121–126, 128, 184, 211 Horn 88 Filter, passenger compartment 58, 183 Gearbox, manual 120, 125–126, 128, 184 Horn for pedestrians 88 Fitting a wheel 199–200 Gear lever, automatic gearbox 122 Hybrid 26, 116, 167, 225 Fitting roof bars 176–177 Gear lever, manual gearbox 120 Hybrid engine 225 Fittings, boot 73
281 Alphabetical index
Keyless Entry and Starting 30–31, 116–117 Lighting, interior 69–70 I Key not recognised 117–118 Lighting, mood 21, 70 i-Cockpit® amplify function 48, 125–126 Key with remote control 28, 114 Lighting, welcome 81 Ignition 117, 273 Kit, hands-free 234–235, 248–249, 271–272 Loading 75–76, 176–177 Ignition on 117 Kit, puncture repair 191–192 Load reduction mode 179 Ignition switch 114, 116 Kit, temporary puncture repair 191–195 Locating your vehicle 29 Immobiliser, electronic 114 Locking 29, 31 Indicator, AdBlue® range 18 Locking from the inside 32 Indicator, coolant temperature 18 Locking the doors 32 Indicator, engine oil level 17, 20 L Long objects, transporting 71 Indicators, direction 79, 203 Labels, identification 227 Low fuel level 166 Inflating tyres 184, 227 Lamp, boot 77 Inflating tyres and accessories Lamps, parking 79 (using the kit) 193, 195 Lamps, rear 204 Infrared camera 131 Lams with Full LED technology 80, 82 M Instrument panel 9–10, 20–22, 132 Lane assist 139, 143–144, 146 Mains socket (domestic network) 169, 173 Instrument panel (Hybrid) 9 Lane departure warning active 150, 155 Maintenance (advice) 168, 187 Intelligent Traction Control 90 Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) 150 Maintenance, routine 131, 183 Internet browser 263, 267 Leather (care) 189 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 130 ISOFIX mountings 105 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 79, 202, 204 Map reading lamps 69 Level, AdBlue® 182 Markings, identification 227 Level, brake fluid 182 Massage function 48 Level, Diesel additive 182–183 Massage, multi-point 48 J Level, engine coolant 18, 182 Mat 69, 132 Jack 193, 196–198, 270 Level, engine oil 17, 181 Memorising a speed 132 Jump starting 210 Levels and checks 180–182 Menu 247 Level, screenwash fluid 84, 182 Menu, main 25, 229 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 79, 202, 204 Menus (audio) 242–243, 255–256 Lighting, cornering 82 Menu short cuts 25 K Lighting dimmer 21 Messages 273 Key 28–29, 32–33 Lighting, exterior 78 Messages, quick 273 Key, electronic 30–31 Lighting, guide-me home 29, 81 Mirror, rear view 50
282 Alphabetical index
Mirrors, door 49–50, 65, 154 Mirror, vanity 66 P Q Misfuel prevention 167 Pads, brake 184 Quiet vehicle warning sound 88 Modularity, seats 57 Paint 188, 227 Motor, electric 126, 167, 225 Paint colour code 227 Motorised tailgate 37–38, 40 Paint, matt 188 Mountings, ISOFIX 105 Parcel shelf, rear 71, 73 R MP3 CD 233 Park Assist 161–162 Radar (warnings) 131 Parking brake, electric 118–120, 184 Radio 230–231, 243–244, 246, 268 Parking sensors, audible and visual 155 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Parking sensors, front 156 Broadcasting - DAB) 231, 245, 269 N Parking sensors, rear 155 Range, AdBlue® 18, 182 Navigation 260–262 Personalisation 10 RDS 244, 268–269 Navigation, connected 263–265 Plates, identification 227 READY lamp 179 Net 73–74 Player, Apple® 234, 246, 270 Rear air blower 63 Net, high load retaining 75–76 Player, MP3 CD 233 Rear screen, demisting 65 Number plate lamps 205 Player, USB 232, 245, 270 Rechargeable hybrid system 5, 26, 116, 126, Port, USB 67, 232, 245, 265, 270 167 Power 20 Recharging the battery 211, 214 Power indicator 20 Recirculation, air 62, 64 O Pressures, tyres 184, 196, 227 Recorder, total distance 20 Obstacle detection 155 Pre-tensioning seat belts 97 Recovery 215–218 Oil change 181 Priming pump 191 Recovery of the vehicle 216 Oil consumption 181 Priming the fuel system 190 Reduction of electrical load 179 OIl, engine 181 Profiles 250, 274 Regeneration of the particle filter 183 On-board tools 76, 191–193 Protecting children 98, 100–103, Regenerative braking (deceleration Opening the bonnet 179–180 105, 107, 110–111 by engine braking) 125 Opening the boot 30, 36 Puncture 193–194, 196 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Opening the doors 30, 36 detection system 130 Opening the windows 28 Reinitialising the remote control 34 Reminder, key in ignition 116 Reminder, lighting on 79
283 Alphabetical index
Remote control 28–32 Seat belts 94–97, 102 Starting the vehicle 114–116, 121–124 Remote functions 26–27, 65, 172–173 Seat belts, rear 95–96 Starting using another battery 117, 210 Removing a wheel 199–200 Seat, rear bench 50–51 State of charge, battery 26, 168 Removing the mat 69 Seats, additional 55–57 Station, radio 230, 243–244, 268–269 Replacing bulbs 201–202, 204–205 Seats, electric 47–48 Stay, bonnet 180 Replacing fuses 205–206 Seats, front 45, 47–48 Steering mounted controls, Replacing the air filter 183 Seats, heated 48 audio 229, 241, 255 Replacing the oil filter 183 Seats, rear 50–57, 101 Steering wheel, adjustment 49 Replacing the passenger compartment Selector, gear 121–124 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, filter 183 Sensors (warnings) 131 expressive 188 Reservoir, screenwash 182 Serial number, vehicle 227 Stopping the vehicle 114–117, 121–124 Resetting the trip recorder 21 Service indicator 17, 20 Stop & Start 23, 59, 64, 127–129, Reset trip 22 Servicing 17, 183, 184 166, 179, 183, 213 Rev counter 9 Settings, equipment 23–25, 27 Storage 66, 68, 71–72 Reversing camera 131, 157–159 Settings, system 250, 274 Storage box 76 Reversing lamps 204 Sidelamps 79, 202, 204 Storage boxes 72 Roof bars 176–177 Ski flap 71 Storage compartments 66 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 190 Smartphone 26–27, 65, 172–173 Storage wells 76 Snow chains 129, 177–178 Storing driving positions 47–48 Snow screen 178 Sunroof, panoramic 42–43 Socket, 12 V accessory 66, 70, 77 Sunshine sensor 58 S Socket, 230 V 70 Sun visor 66 Safety, children 98, 100–103, Socket, auxiliary 233, 246, 270 Suspension 184 105, 107, 110–111 Socket, Jack 233, 270 Switching off the engine 114 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 183 Speakers 67 Synchronising the remote control 34 Screen menu map 247 Speed limiter 132, 134–136 Screen, monochrome 23–24 Speed limit recognition 132–133 Screen, multifunction (with audio system) 229 Speedometer 9, 132 Screens, very cold conditions 178 Sport mode 127 T Screenwash 84 Spotlamps, side 81 Table position 46 Screenwash, front 84 Stability control (ESC) 90–92 Tables, aircraft 71 Screenwash, rear 84 Starting a Diesel engine 166 Tables of engines 225 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 19, 185 Starting the engine 114, 116 Tables of fuses 206, 208–209
284 Alphabetical index
Tailgate 36 Tyre under-inflation detection 129, 196 Warning lamps 11, 20 Tank, fuel 166–167 Warning lamp, seat belts 96 Technical data 220, 222, 225 Warnings and indicators 11 Telephone 67, 234–237, 248–250, 271–273 Washing 131 Telephone, Bluetooth with voice recognition 237 U Washing (advice) 168, 187–188 Temperature, coolant 18 Under-inflation (detection) 129 Weights 219–220, 222 Textured Paint 188 Unlocking 28, 30 Welcome lighting 29, 81 Thermal preconditioning of the passenger Unlocking from the inside 32 Wheel, spare 184, 191–193, 196–198 compartment 27, 65 Unlocking the boot 29–30 Windscreen, heated 64–65 Ticket holder 66 Unlocking the doors 32 Windscreen wipers 83, 85 Time (setting) 23–24, 251, 275 Unlocking the tailgate 29–30 Wiper blades (changing) 84–85 TMC (Traffic info) 262 Updating the date 251, 275 Wiper, rear 84 Tool box 76 Updating the time 251, 275 Wipers 83, 86 Tools 191–193, 197–198 USB 232, 245–246, 265, 270 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 85–86 Topping-up AdBlue® 186 Total distance recorder 20–21 Touch screen 21, 24, 26, 65 Towball, quickly detachable 174–176 V Towbar 91, 173 Ventilation 58 Towbar with quickly detachable Video 270 towball 174–176 Visibility 64 Towed loads 219–220, 222, 225 Vision, 180° forward 159 Towing another vehicle 215–218 Visiopark 1 158 Traction control (ASR) 90–92 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 157, 159 Traffic information (TA) 230 Voice commands 257–260 Traffic information (TMC) 262 Trailer 91, 173 Trailer stability assist (TSA) 91 Trajectory control systems 90 W Triangle, warning 190 Wallbox 169 Trip computer 22–23 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Trip distance recorder 21 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt Tyres 184, 227 not fastened 96
285
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Printed in the EU
11-19
www.peugeot.com *19.P8.0040* ANG. 19.P8.0040